Intelilite4 Amf25 Global Guide

InteliLite 4
AMF 25
Controller for single gen-set
applications
SW version 1.4.0
1 Document information 5
2 System overview 11
3 Applications overview 21
4 Installation and wiring 23
5 Controller setup 63
6 Communication 190
7 Technical data 211
8 Appendix 212
Copyright © 2023 ComAp a.s.

Written by Michal Slavata
Prague, Czech Republic
ComAp a.s., U Uranie 1612/14a,
170 00 Prague 7, Czech Republic
Tel: +420 246 012 111
E-mail: [email protected], www.comap-control.com Global Guide
Table of contents
1 Document information 5 2.6.2 Inteli AIN8 17
1.1 Clarification of Notation 5 2.6.3 Inteli AIN8TC 17
1.2 About this Global Guide 5 2.6.4 Inteli AIO9/1 18
1.3 Legal notice 5 2.6.5 Inteli AOUT8 18
1.3.1 General security recommendations 2.6.6 InteliSys AIN8 19
and set of measures 6 2.6.7 InteliSys BIN16/8 19
1.3.2 Used open source software 7 2.6.8 IGS-PTM 20
1.4 General warnings 7 2.6.9 IGL-RA15 20
1.4.1 Remote control and programming 7
1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility 7 3 Applications overview 21
1.4.3 Dangerous voltage 8 3.1 AMF – Automatic Mains Failure Start 21
1.4.4 Adjusting the setpoints 8 3.2 MRS – Manual Remote Start 22
1.5 Functions and protections 8

4 Installation and wiring 23
1.6 Certifications and standards 9
4.1 Package content 23
1.7 Document history 9
4.2 Controller installation 23
1.8 Symbols in this manual 10
4.2.1 Dimensions 23
2 System overview 11 4.2.2 Mounting 24
2.1 General description 11 4.3 Terminal Diagram 25
2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4 11 4.4 Recommended wiring 26
2.2 True RMS measurement 11 4.4.1 General 27
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 11 4.4.2 Example of AMF Wiring 28
2.3.1 Supported configuration and 4.4.3 Grounding 28

monitoring tools 11 4.4.4 Power supply 28
2.3.2 Configuration parts 12 4.4.5 Measurement wiring 29
2.4 PC Tools 13 4.4.6 Magnetic pick-up 50
2.4.1 InteliConfig 13 4.4.7 Binary inputs 51
2.4.2 WebSupervisor 13 4.4.8 Binary Outputs 52
2.4.3 WinScope 1000 14 4.4.9 E-Stop 53
2.4.4 InteliSCADA 14 4.4.10 Analog inputs 53
2.5 Plug-in Modules 15 4.4.11 CAN bus and RS485 wiring 55
2.5.1 CM3-Ethernet 15 4.4.12 USB 60
2.5.2 CM2-4G-GPS 15 4.4.13 USB HOST 60
2.5.3 CM-RS232-485 15 4.5 Plug-in module installation 60
2.5.4 EM-BIO8-EFCP 16 4.5.1 Installation 60
2.6 CAN modules 16 4.6 Maintenance 61
2.6.1 Inteli IO8/8 16 4.6.1 Backup battery replacement 61
InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 2

5 Controller setup 63 5.5.11 Additional running engine
5.1 Default configuration 63 indications 120
5.1.1 Binary inputs 63 5.5.12 RPM Measurement 120
5.1.2 Binary outputs 63 5.5.13 Multi ECU 121
5.1.3 Analog inputs 63 5.5.14 History log 122
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools 5.5.15 Breaker control 123

connection 64 5.5.16 Protections 126
5.2.1 USB 64 5.5.17 Maintenance Timers 141
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 65 5.5.18 Exercise timers 141
5.2.3 Ethernet 66 5.5.19 Rental Timers 148
5.3 Operator Guide 73 5.5.20 Pulse Counters 149
5.3.1 Front panel elements 73 5.5.21 Analog switches 149
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 75 5.5.22 Voltage phase sequence detection 150
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 88 5.5.23 Load shedding 150
5.3.4 Login 89 5.5.24 Dummy Load 152
5.3.5 Production mode 92 5.5.25 Sensor curves 153
5.3.6 Information screen 93 5.5.26 Power formats and units 155
5.3.7 Language selection 95 5.5.27 PLC 155
5.3.8 Display contrast adjustment 96 5.5.28 Geo-fencing 161
5.4 Remote Display 97 5.5.29 After-treatment Support 161
5.4.1 General description 97 5.5.30 Alternate configuration 166
5.4.2 IL4-RD Firmware installation 97 5.5.31 USB host 167
5.4.3 Wiring 98 5.5.32 Firewall 171
5.4.4 Interconnection variants 98 5.5.33 E-Stop 171
5.4.5 Connection process 100 5.5.34 ECU Frequency selection 172
5.4.6 Connection troubleshooting 100 5.5.35 User Buttons 173
5.4.7 Function description 101 5.5.36 User setpoints 174
5.4.8 Firmware compatibility 101 5.6 User management and data access control 176
5.5 Functions 102 5.6.1 Types of interfaces 176
5.5.1 Operating Modes 103 5.6.2 User accounts 177
5.5.2 Start-stop sequence 104 5.6.3 Managing accounts 179
5.5.3 Engine start 106 5.6.4 Account break protection 184
5.5.4 Stabilization 110 5.6.5 Access to controller data 185
5.5.5 Connecting to load 111 5.6.6 Cybernetic security 185
5.5.6 MRS operation 111
6 Communication 190
5.5.7 AMF operation 111
6.1 PC 190
5.5.8 Dual Operation 113
6.1.1 Direct communication 190
5.5.9 Engine cool down and stop 116
6.1.2 Remote communication 191
5.5.10 Gen-set operation states 117
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 196

6.2.1 SNMP 196
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 199
7 Technical data 211
8 Appendix 212
8.1 Controller objects 212
8.1.1 List of controller objects types 212
8.1.2 Setpoints 212
8.1.3 Values 548
8.1.4 Logical binary inputs 607
8.1.5 Logical binary outputs 637
8.1.6 Logical analog inputs 690
8.1.7 PLC 696
8.2 Alarms 713
8.2.1 Alarm levels in the controller 714
8.2.2 Alarms level 1 714
8.3 Modules 782
8.3.1 Plug-in modules 782
8.3.2 CAN modules 794
6 back to Table of contents

1 Document information
1.1 Clarification of Notation 5
1.2 About this Global Guide 5
1.3 Legal notice 5
1.4 General warnings 7
1.5 Functions and protections 8
1.6 Certifications and standards 9
1.7 Document history 9
1.8 Symbols in this manual 10
1.1 Clarification of Notation

Note: This type of paragraph calls the reader’s attention to a notice or related theme.
IMPORTANT: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.
WARNING: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.
Example: This type of paragraph contains information that is used to illustrate how a specific function
works.
1.2 About this Global Guide

This manual contains important instructions for InteliLite 4 family controllers which must be followed during
installation and maintenance of the controllers.
This manual provides general information how to install and operate InteliLite 4 controllers.
This manual is dedicated for:
Operators of Gen-sets
Gen-set control panel builders
Anyone who is involved with the installation, operation and maintenance of the Gen-set
1.3 Legal notice

This End User's Guide/Manual as part of the Documentation is an inseparable part of ComAp’s Product
and may be used exclusively according to the conditions defined in the “END USER or Distributor LICENSE
AGREEMENT CONDITIONS – COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS SOFTWARE” (License Agreement) and/or in
the “ComAp a.s. Global terms and conditions for sale of Products and provision of Services” (Terms) and/or in
the “Standardní podmínky projektů komplexního řešení ke smlouvě o dílo, Standard Conditions for Supply of
Complete Solutions” (Conditions) as applicable.

ComAp’s License Agreement is governed by the Czech Civil Code 89/2012 Col., by the Authorship Act
121/2000 Col., by international treaties and by other relevant legal documents regulating protection of the
intellectual properties (TRIPS).
The End User and/or ComAp’s Distributor shall only be permitted to use this End User's Guide/Manual with
ComAp Control System Registered Products. The Documentation is not intended and applicable for any
other purpose.
Official version of the ComAp’s End User's Guide/Manual is the version published in English. ComAp
reserves the right to update this End User's Guide/Manual at any time. ComAp does not assume any
responsibility for its use outside of the scope of the Terms or the Conditions and the License Agreement.
Licensed End User is entitled to make only necessary number of copies of the End User's Guide/Manual. Any
translation of this End User's Guide/Manual without the prior written consent of ComAp is expressly
prohibited!
Even if the prior written consent from ComAp is acquired, ComAp does not take any responsibility for the
content, trustworthiness and quality of any such translation. ComAp will deem a translation equal to this End
User's Guide/Manual only if it agrees to verify such translation. The terms and conditions of such verification
must be agreed in the written form and in advance.
For more details relating to the Ownership, Extent of Permitted Reproductions Term of Use of the
Documentation and to the Confidentiality rules please review and comply with the ComAp’s License
Agreement, Terms and Conditions available on www.comap-control.com.
Security Risk Disclaimer
Pay attention to the following recommendations and measures to increase the level of security of ComAp
products and services.
Please note that possible cyber-attacks cannot be fully avoided by the below mentioned recommendations
and set of measures already performed by ComAp, but by following them the cyber-attacks can be
considerably reduced and thereby to reduce the risk of damage. ComAp does not take any responsibility for
the actions of persons responsible for cyber-attacks, nor for any damage caused by the cyber-attack.
However, ComAp is prepared to provide technical support to resolve problems arising from such actions,
including but not limited to restoring settings prior to the cyber-attacks, backing up data, recommending other
preventive measures against any further attacks.
Warning: Some forms of technical support may be provided against payment. There is no legal or factual
entitlement for technical services provided in connection to resolving problems arising from cyber-attack or
other unauthorized accesses to ComAp's Products or Services.
1.3.1 General security recommendations and set of measures

1. Production mode
Disable production mode BEFORE the controller is put into regular operation.
2. User accounts
Change password for the existing default administrator account or replace that account with a
completely new one BEFORE the controller is put into regular operation mode.
Do not leave PC tools (e.g. InteliConfig) unattended while a user, especially administrator, is logged in.
3. AirGate Key
Change the AirGate Key BEFORE the device is connected to the network.
Use a secure AirGate Key – preferably a random string of 8 characters containing lowercase,

uppercase letters and digits.
Use a different AirGate Key for each device.
4. MODBUS/TCP
The MODBUS/TCP protocol (port TCP/502) is an instrumentation protocol designed to exchange data
between locally connected devices like sensors, I/O modules, controllers etc. By it's nature it does not
contain any kind of security – neither encryption nor authentication. Thus it is intended to be used only
in closed private network infrastructures.
Avoid using MODBUS/TCP in unprotected networks (e.g. Internet).
5. SNMP
The SNMP protocol (port UDP/161) version 1 and version 2 are not encrypted. They are intended to be
used only in closed private network infrastructures.
Avoid using SNMP v1 and v2 in unprotected networks (e.g. Internet).
1.3.2 Used open source software

License condition web
Name of software License name
address
Mbed TLS Apache 2.0 license
Aladin MD5 Zlib license
Segger License Agreement v.
EmbOS license
150515
emFile Segger License Agreement license
emUSB Device Segger License Agreement license
emUSB-Host Segger License Agreement license
Tiny Mersenne Twister
BSD 3 license
(tinymt32)
1.4 General warnings

1.4.1 Remote control and programming
Controller can be controlled remotely. In the event that maintenance of a Gen-set needs to be done, or the
controller must be programmed, check the following points to ensure that the engine cannot be started or any
other parts of the system cannot be affected.
Make sure:
Disconnect remote control
Disconnect binary outputs
1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

Be certain to use the proper combination of SW and HW versions.

1.4.3 Dangerous voltage
Under no circumstances should you touch the terminals for voltage and current
measurement!
Always connect grounding terminals!
Under no circumstances should you disconnect controller CT terminals!
1.4.4 Adjusting the setpoints

All parameters are adjusted to their typical values. However the setpoints must be checked and adjusted to
their real values before the first use of the Gen-set.
IMPORTANT: Wrong adjustment of setpoints can destroy the Gen-set.
Note: The controller contains a large number of configurable setpoints, because of this it is impossible to
describe all of its functions. Some functions can be changed or have different behavior in different SW
versions. Always check the Global guide and New feature list for SW version which is used in a controller.
This manual only describes the product and is not guaranteed to be set for your application.
IMPORTANT: Be aware that the binary outputs can change state during and after software
reprogramming (before the controller is used again ensure that the proper configuration and
setpoint settings are set in the controller).
The following instructions are for qualified personnel only. To avoid personal injury do not perform any action
not specified in related guides for product.
1.5 Functions and protections

Support of functions and protections as defined by ANSI (American National Standards Institute):
Description ANSI code Description ANSI code

Voltage unbalance / Negative
Master unit 1 47
sequence voltage
Stopping device 5 Incomplete sequence relay 48
Multi-function device 11 Overcurrent 50/50TD
Overspeed 12 Earth fault** 50G
Underspeed 14 Breaker failure 50BF
Starting-to-running transition contactor 19 Overcurrent IDMT 51
Thermal relay 26 Overvoltage 59
Undervoltage 27 Aux Over Voltage 59X
Aux Battery Under Voltage 27X Pressure switch 63
Annunciator 30 Liquid level switch 71
Overload (real power) 32P Alarm relay*** 74
Reverse power 32R Reclosing relay 79
Master sequence device 34 Overfrequency 81O
Unit sequence starting* 44 Underfrequency 81U
Current unbalance 46 Auto selective control/transfer 83
*Dual-operation **Extension module EM-BIO8-EFCP required *** extension module IGL-RA15 required

1.6 Certifications and standards
EN 61000-6-2 EN 60068-2-6 (2÷25 Hz / ±1,6 mm; 25÷100 Hz / 4.0 g)
2
EN 61000-6-4 EN 60068-2-27 (a=500 m/s ; T=6 ms)
EN 61010-1 EN 60068-2-30:2005 25/55°C, RH 95%, 48hours
EN 60068-2-1 (-20 °C/16 h) EN 60529 (front panel IP65, back side IP20)
EN 60068-2-2 (70 °C/16 h) UL 6200
Supplier's Declaration of Conformity

47 CFR § 2.1077 Compliance Information
Unique identifier: IL4AMF25BAA, IL4AMF25BLA
Responsible Party:
Kevin Counts
10 N Martingale Rd #400
60173 - Schaumburg, IL
USA
Tel: +1 815 636 2541

E-mail: [email protected]
FCC Compliance Statement

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1.7 Document history

Revision number Related sw. version Date Author
6 1.4.0 5.1.2022 Michal Slavata
5 1.3.0 30.4.2022 Jan Liptak
4 1.2.0 12.11.2021 Jan Liptak
3 1.1.1 9.7.2021 Jan Liptak
2 1.1.0 18.6.2021 Jan Liptak
1 1.0.0 28.2.2021 Jan Liptak

1.8 Symbols in this manual
Connector - Resistor
3 x Phases Grounding
male adjustable
Active Resistive
current Contact GSM sensor
sensor RPTC
GSM RS 232
Contactor
AirGate modem male
Controller RS 232
IG-AVRi
Alternating simplified female
current
Module IG-AVRi
Starter
Analog simplified TRANS
modem
Switch -
Current
Jumper manually
measuring
Battery operated
Current
Load Transformer
Binary measuring
output
USB type B
Diode Mains male
Breaker
contact
Ethernet USB type B
Mains female
Breaker male
contact
Voltage
Ethernet Mobile
measuring
female provider
Breaker
Passive Wi-fi / WAN
Fuel
current / LAN
solenoid
Breaker sensor
6 back to Document
information
Fuse Pick - up
Breaker
Fuse switch Relay coil

Capacitor
Relay coil of
Generator slow-
Coil
operating
Generator
Connector - schematic Resistor
female

2 System overview
2.1 General description 11
2.2 True RMS measurement 11
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 11
2.4 PC Tools 13
2.5 Plug-in Modules 15
2.6 CAN modules 16
2.1 General description

InteliLite 4 family controller are a comprehensive Gen-set controllers for single Gen-set operating in prime
power source (MRS) or back-up (AMF) applications. A modular construction allows upgrades to different
levels of complexity in order to provide the best solution for various customer applications.
2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4

Easy-to-use operation and installation. The factory default configuration covers most applications.
Various customizations are possible thanks to its configurability
Excellent remote communication capabilities
High level of support for EFI engines (most world producers)
High reliability
2.2 True RMS measurement

This controller measures AC values based on True RMS principle. This principle corresponds exactly to the
physical definition of alternating voltage effective values. Under normal circumstances, voltage should have a
pure sinusoidal waveform. However some nonlinear elements can produce harmonic waveforms with
frequencies of multiples of the basic frequency and this may result in deformation of the voltage waveforms.
The True RMS measurement gives accurate readings of effective values not only for pure sinusoidal
waveforms, but also for deformed waveforms.
2.3 Configurability and monitoring

One of the key features of the controller is the system's high level of adaptability to the needs of each
individual application and wide possibilities for monitoring. This can be achieved by configuring and using the
powerful PC/mobile tools.
2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools

InteliConfig – complete configuration and single or multiple Gen-sets monitoring
WebSupervisor – web-based system for monitoring and controlling
WebSupervisor mobile – supporting application for smart-phones
WinScope 1000 – special graphical monitoring software
InteliSCADA – monitoring and management of ComAp devices

Note: Use the InteliConfig PC software to read, view and modify configuration from the controller or disk and
write the new configuration to the controller or disk.
The firmware of the controller contains a large number of logical binary inputs and outputs needed for all
necessary functions available. However, not all functions are required at the same time on the same Gen-set;
also the controller hardware does not have so many input and output terminals. One of the main tasks of the
configuration is mapping of "logical" firmware inputs and outputs to the "physical" hardware inputs and
outputs.
2.3.2 Configuration parts

Mapping of logical binary inputs (functions) or assigning alarms to physical binary input terminals
Mapping of logical binary outputs (functions) to physical binary output terminals
Assigning sensor characteristics (curves) and alarms to analog inputs
Selection of peripheral modules, which are connected to the controller, and performing the same functions
(as mentioned above) for them
Selection of ECU type, if an ECU is connected
Changing the language of the controller interface
Image 2.1 Principle of binary inputs and outputs configuration
The controller is shipped with a default configuration, which should be suitable for most standard applications.
This default configuration can be changed only by using a PC with the InteliConfig software. See InteliConfig
documentation for details.
Once the configuration is modified, it can be saved to a file for later usage with another controller or for
backup purposes. The file is called archive and has the file extension .ail4. An archive contains a full image of
the controller at the time of saving (if the controller is online for the PC) except the firmware. Besides

configuration it also contains current adjustment of all setpoints, all measured values, a copy of the history log
and a copy of the alarm list.
The archive can be easily used for cloning controllers, i.e. preparing controllers with identical configuration
and settings.
2.4 PC Tools
2.4.1 InteliConfig
Configuration and monitoring tool for various ComAp controllers. See more in InteliConfig Reference Guide.
This tool provides the following functions:

Direct or internet communication with the
controller
Offline or online controller configuration
Controller firmware upgrade
Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
Exporting data into an XLS file
Controller language translation
2.4.2 WebSupervisor
Web-based system for monitoring and controlling of controllers. See more at the WebSupervisor webpage.

Site and fleet monitoring
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
On-line notification of alarms
Email notification
Also available as a smart-phone application
WebSupervisor available at: www.websupervisor.net

Demo account:
Login: comaptest
Password: ComAp123

2.4.3 WinScope 1000
Special graphical controller monitoring software used mainly for commissioning and Gen-set troubleshooting.
See more in the WinScope 1000 Reference guide.

Monitoring and archiving of ComAp controller’s
parameters and values
View of actual / historical trends in controller
On-line change of controller's parameters for
easy regulator setup
2.4.4 InteliSCADA
InteliSCADA is a Windows based software with modern look and feel that has been developed with current
web technologies. See more in the InteliSCADA Global guide.

Basic SCADA in a few minutes (auto-generated
SCADA)
Broad range of instruments with easy and fast
configuration
Fully customizable SCADA diagram
Browsing of all measured and computed values
More than 200 images available
Browsing of controllers' history records
Multimedia support (IP cam, video, animated
images, map, …)
Industrial security level – sites are protected
against stealing of controllers' credentials
Support of new controllers as well as old
important ones
Simple and less time-consuming SCADA
creation
Modern look and feel
Reliability

2.5 Plug-in Modules
2.5.1 CM3-Ethernet
Internet/Ethernet module.
10/100 Mbit interface over RJ45 socket

Remote control and monitoring of the controller
via InteliConfig, WebSupervisor
Modbus TCP support
Full SNMP support including traps (v1 & v2c)
Active e-mail sending
AirGate 2.0 technology support for easy
connection – no need of public and static IP
address
2.5.2 CM2-4G-GPS
GSM/4G module
GSM/4G Internet module and GPS locator
Global 4G (LTE) module with 3G/2G backup
Remote control and monitoring of the controller
via InteliConfig, WebSupervisor
Active e-mail and SMS support
AirGate 2 technology support for easy
connection – no need of public and static IP
address
Tracking via GNSS (GPS,GLONASS) module
2.5.3 CM-RS232-485
Communication module with two communication ports.
RS232 and RS485 interface
Modbus RTU support
Serial connection to InteliConfig

2.5.4 EM-BIO8-EFCP
Hybrid current input and binary input/output extension module.
One additional AC current (CT) measuring for
Earth Fault Current protection (EFCP)
Wide range of measured current – one input for
1 A and 1 input for 5 A
Up to 8 additional configurable binary inputs or
outputs
Note: This protection is active ONLY when Engine
is running.
2.6 CAN modules

2.6.1 Inteli IO8/8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, and 2
analog outputs, or 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs via switches inside the controller.
Configuration 8/8
8 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
8 Binary outputs (options: Low side switch
(LSS) or High side switch (HSS))
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10 V),
current (0-20 mA) and PWM (5 V, adjustable
frequency 200 Hz-2.4 kHz))
Configuration 16/0
16 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
0 Binary outputs
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10 V),
current (0-20 mA) and PWM (5 V, adjustable
frequency 200 Hz-2.4 kHz))

2.6.2 Inteli AIN8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog inputs.
Supported sensors:
Resistor 3-wire input
Common resistor: 0-250 Ω, 0-2400 Ω, 0-
10 kΩ
Temperature sensor: Pt100, Pt1000,
Ni100, Ni1000
Current (active or passive sensors)
±20 mA, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Voltage
±1 V, 0-2.4 V, 0-5 V, 0-10 V
Lambda probes
Thermocouples are not supported (the
measuring loop was designed for lambda
probes, which caused non-support of
thermocouples)
Impulse/RPM sensor:
RPM measuring pulses with frequency 4 Hz-
10 kHz
Impulse
Possibility to measure pulses from
electrometer, flowmeter (measurement of
total consumption, average fuel
consumption)
2.6.3 Inteli AIN8TC

8 Analog Channels Module. The unit offers flexibility to configure 8 thermocouple inputs.
8 analog input channels for measuring
temperature by thermocouples

2.6.4 Inteli AIO9/1
9 Analog Inputs and 1 Analog Output Module
4× differential voltage inputs for measurement
in range of 0 – 65 V or -65 – 0 V
4× shielded, galvanically separated ±75 mV
inputs
Resistance analog input 0-2500 Ω
One analog output
2.6.5 Inteli AOUT8

The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog outputs via switches inside the
controller.
8 configurable analog outputs

Outputs are configurable to:
0-10 V DC or
0/4-20 mA range or
1200 Hz PWM
Up to four I-AOUT8 can be connected to one
controller
UL certified

2.6.6 InteliSys AIN8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog inputs via switches inside the
controller.
Configurable 8 analog inputs

Precision of inputs is 1%
Accept 2/3 wire resistive, current, voltage
sensors
Predefined sensor (Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100,
Ni1000, thermocouple type J/K/L, 0-20 mA, 0-
10 V)
Up to 10 IS-AIN8 can be connected to the
controller
UL certified
2.6.7 InteliSys BIN16/8

The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 16 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs via
switches inside the controller.
Configurable 16 galvanically separated inputs

Configurable 8 outputs
2 pulse inputs (frequency measurement or
pulse counting)
LEDs indicate the state of binary inputs and
outputs
Up to 6 IS-BIN16/8 can be connected to the
controller
UL certified

2.6.8 IGS-PTM
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, 4 analog
inputs and 1 analog outputs.
Configurable 8 binary and 4 analog inputs
Configurable 8 binary and 1 analog output
LEDs indicate the state of binary inputs/outputs
Measures values from Pt100 and Ni100
sensors
Analog inputs (resistance range 0-250 Ω,
voltage range 0-100 mV, current range 0-20 mA
– selectable via jumper)
UL certified
2.6.9 IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator.
15 programmable LEDs with configurable
colors red-green-yellow
Lamp test function with status LED
Customizable labels
Local horn output
Maximal distance 200 m from the controller
Up to 4 units can be connected to the controller
UL certified
6 back to System overview

3 Applications overview
3.1 AMF – Automatic Mains Failure Start 21
3.2 MRS – Manual Remote Start 22
3.1 AMF – Automatic Mains Failure Start

The typical schematic of Automatic Mains Failure Start application is shown below. The controller controls
two breakers – a mains breaker and a generator breaker. Feedback from both breakers is not necessary.
InteliLite 4 controllers can also work without breaker feedback.
Image 3.1 AMF application overview

3.2 MRS – Manual Remote Start
The typical schematic of Manual Remote Start application is shown below. The controller controls one
breaker – a generator breaker. Feedback from the breaker is not necessary. InteliLite 4 controllers can also
work without breaker feedback.
Image 3.2 MRS application overview
6 back to Applications overview

4 Installation and wiring
4.1 Package content 23
4.2 Controller installation 23
4.3 Terminal Diagram 25
4.4 Recommended wiring 26
4.5 Plug-in module installation 60
4.6 Maintenance 61
4.1 Package content

The package contains:
Controller
Mounting holders
Terminal blocks
Note: The package does not contain any communication or extension modules. The required modules
should be ordered separately.
4.2 Controller installation

4.2.1 Dimensions
① Plug-in module
Note: Dimension x depends on plug-in module
Note: Dimensions are in millimetres.

4.2.2 Mounting
The controller should be mounted onto the switchboard door. Requested cutout size is 187 × 132 mm. Use
the screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the door as described in pictures below.
Recommended torque for holders is 0.15 N·m.
Panel door mounting
Note: Enclosure Type rating with mounting instruction – For use on a Flat surface of a type 1 enclosure.

4.3 Terminal Diagram
① GENERATOR ② GENERATOR ③ MAINS VOLTAGE ④ BINARY INPUTS
CURRENT VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT
T30 COM T38 N T42 N T46 BI1
T31 L1 T39 L1 T43 L1 T47 BI2
T32 L2 T40 L2 T44 L2 T48 BI3
T33 L3 T41 L3 T45 L3 T49 BI4
T50 BI5
T51 BI6
T52 BI7
T53 BI8
Image 4.1 Terminal diagram for InteliLite 4 AMF 25
⑤ CAN1 ⑦ ANALOG INPUTS ⑨ BINARY OUTPUTS ⑪ POWER SUPPLY,

D+
T27 L T22 AI4 T12 BO8 T01 BATT -
T28 COM T21 AI3 T11 BO7 T02 D+
T29 H T20 AI2 T10 BO6 T03 BATT +
T19 AI1 T09 BO5 ⑫ RS485
⑥ +5 V T18 ACOM T08 BO4 T56 B
T23 +5 V T07 BO3 T57 COM
⑧ RPM T06 BO2 T58 A
T17 RPM IN T05 BO1 ⑬ USB
T16 RPM GND ⑩ E-STOP ⑭ USB HOST
T04

4.4 Recommended wiring
Current inputs 30-33 Current measurement wiring (page 30)
Voltage measurement AMF wiring (page 34)

Generator voltage inputs 38-41
Voltage measurement MRS wiring (page 42)
Mains voltage inputs 42-45 Voltage measurement AMF wiring (page 34)
Binary inputs 46-53 Binary inputs (page 51)
CAN1 H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 55)
+5 V 23
Analog inputs 18-22 Analog inputs (page 53)
RPM 16,17 Magnetic pick-up (page 50)
Binary outputs 05-12 Binary Outputs (page 52)
E-Stop 04 E-Stop (page 53)
Power supply "+", D, "-" Power supply (page 28)

RS485 A, B, C CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 55)
USB Device USB (page 60)
USB Host USB HOST (page 60)
2
Note: Wiring terminal markings to included tightening torque: 0.5 N-m (4.5 lb-in)., and wire size: 2 mm (12-
26 AWG).
4.4.1 General
To ensure proper function:
Use grounding terminals.
Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables.
Analog and binary inputs should be wired with shielded cables, especially when the length is more than
3 m.
Tightening torque, allowable wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals:
For Mains Voltage, Generator Voltage and Current terminals
Specified tightening torque is 0.56 Nm (5.0 In-lbs)
use only diameter 0.5 - 2.0 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 90 °C minimum.
For other controller field wiring terminals
Specified tightening torque 0.79 nm (7.0 In-lb)
Use only diameter 0.5 - 2.0 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 75 °C minimum.
Use copper conductors only

4.4.2 Example of AMF Wiring
4.4.3 Grounding
2
The shortest possible length of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min. 2.5 mm .
The negative "–" battery terminal must be properly grounded.
Switchboard and engine must be grounded at common point. Use the shortest possible cable to the
grounding point.
4.4.4 Power supply

2
Use power supply cable min. 1.5 mm
Maximum continuous DC power supply voltage is 36 V. The controller’s power supply terminals are protected
against large pulse power disturbances. When there is a potential risk of the controller being subjected to
conditions outside its capabilities, an outside protection device should be used.
It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between generator current COM terminal and battery "–"
terminal is maximally ±2 V. Therefore it is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals
together.
Note: The controller should be grounded properly in order to protect against lighting strikes. The maximum
allowable current through the controller's negative terminal is 4 A (this is dependent on binary output load).

For the connections with 12 V DC power supply, the controller includes internal capacitors that allow the
controller to continue in operation during cranking if the batter voltage dip occurs. If the voltage dip goes to 0 V
during cranking and after 50 ms it recovers to 4 V, the controller continues operating. This cycle can repeat
several times. During this voltage dip the controller screen backlight can turn off.
Note: Recommended fusing is 4 A fuse.
Note: In case of the dip to 0 V the high-side binary outputs will be temporarily switched off and after
recovering to 4 V back on.
IMPORTANT: When the controller is powered up only by USB and the USB is disconnected then
the actual statistics can be lost.
Note: Suitable conductor protection shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 240.
Note: Low voltage circuits (35 volts or less) shall be supplied from the engine starting battery or an isolated
secondary circuit.
Note: It is also possible to further support the controller by connecting the external capacitor and separating
diode. The capacitor size depends on required time. It shall be approximately thousands of μF. The capacitor
size should be 5 000 μF to withstand 150 ms voltage dip under following conditions: Voltage before dip is
12 V, after 150 ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage, i.e. 8 V. Diode should be able to withstand at
least 1 kV.
Power supply fusing

The controller should never be connected directly to the starting battery. A 4 A fuse should be connected in-
line with the battery positive terminal to the controller and CAN modules. Fuse value and type depends on the
number of connected devices and wire length. Recommended fuse (not fast) type – T4 A. Not fast types are
recommended due to internal capacitors charging during power up.
IMPORTANT: 4 A fuse is calculated without BOUT consumption nor extension modules. Real
value of fuse depends on consumption of binary outputs and modules.
4.4.5 Measurement wiring

2 2
Use 1.5 mm cables for voltage connection and 2.5 mm for current transformers connection. Adjust
Connection type (page 225), Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 227), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 227),
Nominal Current (page 223), Gen VT Ratio (page 230), Mains VT Ratio (page 230) and Gen CT Ratio
Prim (page 224) to appropriate setpoints in the Basic Settings group.

IMPORTANT: Risk of personal injury due to electric shock when manipulating voltage terminals
under voltage. Be sure the terminals are not under voltage before touching them.
Do not open the secondary circuit of current transformers when the primary circuit is closed.
Open the primary circuit first.
CT Location
Image 4.2 CT Location
There are three options of CT location.

Load
Gen-set
None
Note: The current measurement protections are active only when the Gen-set is running.
If the CT Location is set to Load the Short Circuit BOC (page 282) protection is enabled only when GCB is
closed.
Current measurement wiring

The number of CT's is automatically selected based on selected value of setpoint Connection type (page
225) [3Ph4Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / Mono Ph].
Generator currents and power measurement are suppressed if current level is bellow <1 % of CT range.
2
Use cables of 2.5 mm
Use transformers to 5 A
Connect CT according to following drawings:

3 phase application
Image 4.3 3 phase application
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so ground properly both terminals.
Image 4.4 3 phase application
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so interconnect these two terminals.
Note: This wiring is recommended for Indian market.

SplPhL1L2 application
Image 4.5 SplPhL1L2 application

SplPhL1L3 application
IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where the
third phase is normally connected.

Mono phase application
Connect CT according to following drawings. Terminals phase 2 and phase 3 are opened.
Image 4.9 Mono phase application
Voltage measurement AMF wiring

There are 6 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 225) [3Ph4Wire / High
Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / Mono Ph] options, each type matches to corresponding
generator connection type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.
The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 225)
setting:
3Ph 4W – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
High Leg D – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage

3Ph 3W – Ph-Ph voltage
SplPhL1L2 – Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage
Connection Type: 3 Phase 4 Wires
Image 4.11 3 phase application with neutral
Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.
Image 4.12 Typical 3 Phase 4 Wires generator wiring, also known as 3ph High Y
Note: Connection type 277/480V 3-PHASE, Nominal Voltage 3Ph High Y (page 228).

Image 4.13 3 Phase 4 Wires generator wiring, also known as 3ph Low Y
Note: Connection type 120/208V 3-PHASE, Nominal Voltage 3Ph Low Y (page 228).
Connection Type: High Leg D
Image 4.14 High Leg Delta application

Image 4.15 Typical High Leg D generator wiring
Note: Connection type 120/240V 3-PHASE, Nominal Voltage High Leg D (page 229).
Image 4.16 3 phase application without neutral

Image 4.17 Typical 3 Phase 3 Wires generator wiring
Connection Type: SplPhL1L2
Image 4.18 Split phase L1L2 application

Image 4.19 Typical Split Phase generator wiring
Note: Connection type 120/240V 1-PHASE, Nominal Voltage SplitPhase (page 229).


Connection Type: Mono Phase

Image 4.25 Typical Mono Phase generator wiring
Voltage measurement MRS wiring

There are 4 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 225) [3Ph4Wire / High
Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / Mono Ph] options, each type matches to corresponding
generator connection type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.
The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 225)
setting:
3Ph 4W – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
3Ph 3W – Ph-Ph voltage
High Leg D – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage

Image 4.26 3 phase application with neutral
Image 4.27 Typical 3 Phase 4 Wires generator wiring, also known as 3ph High Y
Note: Connection type 277/480V 3-PHASE, Nominal Voltage 3Ph High Y (page 228).

Image 4.28 3 Phase 4 Wires generator wiring, also known as 3ph Low Y
Note: Connection type 120/208V 3-PHASE, Nominal Voltage 3Ph Low Y (page 228).
Image 4.29 3 phase application without neutral

Image 4.30 Typical 3 Phase 3 Wires generator wiring
Connection Type: High Leg D
Image 4.31 High Leg Delta application

Image 4.32 Typical High Leg D generator wiring
Note: Connection type 120/240V 3-PHASE, Nominal Voltage High Leg D (page 229).


IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where the
third phase is normally connected.

Connection Type: Mono Phase

Image 4.40 Typical Mono Phase generator wiring
4.4.6 Magnetic pick-up

A magnetic speed sensor (pickup) is the most common method of engine speed measurement. To use this
method, mount the pickup opposite the engine flywheel, connect the cable to the controller as shown on the
picture below and adjust the setpoint Gear Teeth (page 231) according to the number of teeth on the
flywheel.
For the details about the pick-up input parameters see Technical data on page 211.
IMPORTANT: To ensure proper function use a shielded cable.
If engine will not start:

Check ground connection from pick-up to controllers, if the problem continues, disconnect ground
connection from one of them.
Note: In some cases the controller will measure RPM value even though the gen-set is not running: RPM is
measured from the generator voltage (Gear Teeth = 0). Controller is measuring some voltage value on input
terminals due to open fusing. If RPM > 0 the controller will be put into a Not ready state and the engine will not
be allowed to start.

4.4.7 Binary inputs
2
Use minimally 1 mm cables for wiring of Binary inputs.
Image 4.41 Wiring binary inputs
Note: The name and function or alarm type for each binary input must be assigned during the configuration.

4.4.8 Binary Outputs
2
Use min. 1 mm cables for wiring of binary outputs. Use external relays as indicated on the schematic below
for all outputs except those where low-current loads are connected (signalization etc.).
IMPORTANT: Use suppression diodes on all relays and other inductive loads!
Image 4.42 Binary outputs wiring
Note: Every single low current binary output can provide up to 0.5 A of steady current.
IMPORTANT: Binary output 1 and 2 is power up by E-Stop terminal.
IMPORTANT: When operating temperature is higher than 60 °C it is strongly recommended to

limit output current of high current binary outputs to 4 A (each).

4.4.9 E-Stop
E-Stop has dedicated terminal T04. Power supply of binary output 1 and binary output 2 is internally
connected (in controller) to E-Stop terminal. It means higher security and faster disconnection of these
outputs. More information about E-Stop functions see E-Stop on page 171.
Note: This function has the same behavior as binary input EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 619).
Image 4.43 E-Stop wiring
Note: Recommended fusing is 10 A fuse.
Note: Grey dashed line symbolizes internal connection between E-Stop and binary outputs 1 and 2.
Note: For proper functionality of E-Stop, the terminal T04 must be always wired. Terminal can be connected
to battery+ or to terminal T03 (BATT+)
IMPORTANT: Suppression diodes are not indicated, but required.
4.4.10 Analog inputs

On each analog input, there is the possibility to connect a voltage, current or resistive sensor.
The analog inputs for resistive automotive type sensors like VDO or DATCON are connected either by one
wire (the second pole is the sensor body) or by two wires.

Image 4.44 Wiring of analog sensor
In the case of grounded sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the engine body as near to the sensors
as possible.
In the case of isolated sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the negative power supply terminal of the
controller as well as one pole of each sensor.
Analog inputs are typically used for: Oil Pressure, Coolant Temperature and Fuel Level. All of these
parameters are connected with relevant protections.
Image 4.45 Grounded sensors Image 4.46 Isolated sensors
Note: Schematics show only analog input connection overview, not actual wiring.
Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.

Analog as binary or tristate inputs
Analog inputs can be used also as binary or tri-state, i.e. for contact sensors without or with circuit check. The
threshold level is 750 Ω. In the case of tri-state, values lower than 10 Ω and values over 2400 Ω are evaluated
as sensor failure (short or open circuit).
Image 4.47 Analog inputs as tristate Image 4.48 Analog inputs as binary
Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.
Note: Tristate and binary sensors are not suitable for Analog Switch functions.
Analog Voltage sensor

Controller is equipped with +5 V terminal which can be used as power supply for a voltage analog sensor.
Image 4.49 Analog Voltage sensor
Note: Maximal current of 5V output is 45 mA.
4.4.11 CAN bus and RS485 wiring

CAN bus wiring
The wiring of the CAN bus should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:

The maximum length of the CAN bus depends on the communication speed. For a speed of 250 kbps,
which is used on the CAN1 bus (extension modules, ECU), the maximum length is 200 m.
The bus must be wired in linear form with termination resistors at both ends. No nodes are allowed except
on the controller terminals.
Shielded cable1 must be used, and shielding must be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the CAN bus line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails,
no star) is necessary.
The CAN bus must be terminated by 120Ω resistors at both ends using a cable with following parameters:
Cable type Shielded twisted pair

Impedance 120 Ω
Propagation velocity ≥ 75 % (delay ≤ 4.4 ns/m)
2
Wire crosscut ≥ 0.25 mm
Attenuation (@1MHz) ≤ 2 dB / 100 m
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.
Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close
the jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.
Image 4.50 CAN bus topology
1Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

For shorter distances (connection within one building)
Image 4.51 CAN bus wiring for shorter distances
Note: Shielding shall be grounded at one end only. Shielding shall not be connected to CAN COM terminal.
For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)
Image 4.52 CAN bus wiring for longer distances
① Recommended PT5-HF-12DC-ST1
1Protections recommended: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-12DC-ST with PT2x2-

BE (base element) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-012/2 R DJ

RS485 wiring
The wiring of the RS485 communication should be provided in such a way that the following rules are
observed:
Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close
the jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.
Standard maximum bus length is 1000 m.

Shielded cable1 must be used, and shielding must be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the RS485 line in any order, but keeping the line arrangement (no
tails, no star) is necessary.
The line must be terminated by 120Ω resistors at both ends.
For shorter distances (connection within one building)
Image 4.53 RS485 wiring for shorter distances
For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)
Image 4.54 RS485 wiring for longer distances
① Recommended PT5HF-5DC-ST2
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.
1Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) – for shorter distances: 3105A Paired – EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired – EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)
2Recommended protections: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-
BE (base element)(or MT-RS485-TTL) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-006/2 R DJ

On board RS485 description
Balancing resistors
The transmission bus into the RS485 port enters an indeterminate state when it is not being transmitted to.
This indeterminate state can cause the receivers to receive invalid data bits from the noise picked up on the
cable. To prevent these data bits, force the transmission line into a known state. By installing two 620Ω
balancing resistors at one node on the transmission line, a voltage divider is created that forces the voltage
between the differential pair to be less than 200 mV, which is the threshold for the receiver. Install these
resistors on only one node. The figure below shows a transmission line using bias resistors. Balancing
resistors are placed directly on the PCB of controller. Use the jumpers PULL UP/PULL DOWN to connect the
balancing resistors.
Image 4.55 Balancing resistors
Image 4.56 RS485 on board

4.4.12 USB
This is required for computer connection. Use the shielded USB A-B cable.
Image 4.57 USB connection
Controller can be also powered by USB (only for service purpose like an uploading firmware, change of
configuration etc.).
IMPORTANT: Power supply by USB is only for service purpose. Binary inputs and outputs are in
logical 0. Also plug-in modules are not working.
4.4.13 USB HOST

USB Flash Drive can be connected into USB A connector.
Note: For more information see USB host on page 167.
6 back to Recommended wiring
4.5 Plug-in module installation

4.5.1 Installation
IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.
Remove the back cover. To do this, press four holders which are located in corners.

After removing the back cover insert the plug-in module. The plug-in module must be inserted under holders.
Start with holders marked by arrows. After inserting plug-in module under holders press it down. This locks
the module in place.
After locking the plug-in module into holders, place back the back cover (small cover for connectors has to be
removed from back cover). Finally insert the small cover for connectors. Small covers are unique for each
plug-in module.
4.6 Maintenance
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement
This battery serves to maintain the run of RTC (real time clock) so that controller does not lose information
about time and date when disconnected from power supply.
The internal backup battery lifetime is approx. 6 years. If replacement of backup battery is needed, follow
these instructions:
Connect the controller to a PC and save an archive for backup purposes (not necessary but
recommended).
Disconnect all terminals from the controller and remove the controller from the switchboard.
Remove the back cover and all plug-in modules.
Release the rear cover using a flat screwdriver or another suitable tool.

The battery is located in a holder on the circuit board. Remove the old battery with a small sharp
screwdriver and push the new battery into the holder using a finger.
Replace the rear cover. Use slight pressure to lock the snaps into the housing. Pay attention that the cover
is in correct position and not upside down!
Replace the plug-in modules and back cover.
Power the controller on, adjust date and time and check all setpoints.
6 back to Installation and wiring

5 Controller setup
5.1 Default configuration 63
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 64
5.3 Operator Guide 73
5.4 Remote Display 97
5.5 Functions 102
5.6 User management and data access control 176
5.1 Default configuration

5.1.1 Binary inputs
Number Description Configured function
BIN1 Generator circuit breaker feedback GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 623)
BIN2 Mains circuit breaker feedback MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 626)
BIN3 Not Used Not Used
BIN4 Access lock keyswitch ACCESS LOCK (PAGE 609)
BIN5 Switch controller to OFF mode REMOTE OFF (PAGE 631)
BIN6 Switch controller to TEST mode REMOTE TEST (PAGE 633)
BIN7 Suppression of alarms SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633)
BIN8 Not Used Not Used
5.1.2 Binary outputs

Number Description Function
BOUT1 Starter motor control STARTER 1 (PAGE 682)
BOUT2 Fuel solenoid valve FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658)
BOUT3 Indication of breaker state GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 660)
BOUT4 Indication of breaker state MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671)
BOUT5 Activation of any devices before start PRESTART (PAGE 677)
BOUT6 Gen-set can be connected to load READY TO LOAD (PAGE 680)
BOUT7 Indication of unconfirmed alarm ALARM (PAGE 645)
BOUT8 Not Used NOT USED (PAGE 677)
5.1.3 Analog inputs

Number Configured sensor Function
AIN1 VDO 10 Bar OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 694)
AIN2 VDO40-120°C COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 694)

AIN3 VDOLevel % FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 694)
AIN4 Not Used NOT USED (PAGE 694)
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools

connection
5.2.1 USB 64
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 65
5.2.3 Ethernet 66
6 back to Controller setup

This chapter contains brief introduction into the specifics of firmware and archive upload, as well as the
connection of various PC tools to the controller. If you require detailed information on each PC tool please use
the included Help in those PC tools or download their Global Guides.
5.2.1 USB
You may connect to the controller using the USB port. In this case standard USB A to B cable should be used.
Connection using InteliConfig
Image 5.1 First screen of InteliConfig – select connect to controller
Image 5.2 Second screen of InteliConfig – select detected controllers

Connection using WinScope 1000
Image 5.3 WinScope 1000 screen – select USB connection
Select your controller from the HID Device drop-down list.

Note: Username and password are not mandatory.
5.2.2 RS232/RS485
It is possible to connect to the controller using RS232 or RS485 direct connection (serial port or USB to
RS232/RS485 converter may be used). The following settings should be checked in the controller:
COM1 Mode (page 485) = Direct
Controller Address (page 240) must be set

Image 5.5 Second screen of InteliConfig – select Serial link
Image 5.6 WinScope 1000 screen – select serial link
Note: Username and password are not mandatory.
5.2.3 Ethernet
It is possible to connect to the controller using Ethernet port either directly or using ComAp's AirGate service.
Direct connection
If you use a direct connection the controller needs to be reachable directly from the PC you use (i.e. one LAN
or WAN without any firewalls and other points that may not allow the connection). The following settings
should to be checked in the controller:
Controller Address (page 240) must be set to the same value as in the PC tool
IP Address Mode (page 513) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service available.
Otherwise it should be set to FIXED
IP Address (page 514) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Subnet Mask (page 514) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Gateway IP (page 515) can be set here when it is used

Image 5.8 Second screen of InteliConfig – select Internet / Ethernet
Image 5.9 WinScope 1000 screen – select Ethernet

Following information has to be filled to establish connection:
IP address
Controller address
User name and Password
Access code is required
AirGate connection
You can use ComAp's AirGate service that allows you to connect to any controller via the internet regardless
of the restrictions of the local network (as long as the controller can connect to the internet AirGate service will
work). The following setpoints must be adjusted:
Controller Address (page 240) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool
IP Address Mode (page 513) must set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service available.
Otherwise it should be set to FIXED
IP Address (page 514) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Subnet Mask (page 514) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Gateway IP (page 515) can be set here when it is used
AirGate Connection (page 517) must be set to Enabled
AirGate Address (page 518) currently there is one AirGate server running at URL global.airgate.link
(enter this URL into the setpoint)
IMPORTANT: AirGate Key has to be configured. User with administrator rights has a possibility to
set up or change AirGate Key via InteliConfig using Tools -˃ Access Administration -˃ Change
AirGate Key.
IMPORTANT: Controller has to be connected to the Internet.
Getting started with AirGate

1. Make sure controller has link to Internet
a. CM3-Ethernet is connected to LAN infrastructure, has an IP address and access to Internet
b. CM2-4G-GPS is connected to a mobile operator (preferably to 3G/4G network) and has an IP
address
2. Connect with InteliConfig e.g. via USB and check setpoints as follows:
a. AirGate connection = ENABLED
b. AirGate port = 54440
c. AirGate address = global.airgate.link
3. Adjust AirGate key in InteliConfig – this is your "secret key" that you have to provide always when you
want to connect to the controller via AirGate.

Image 5.10 Changing AirGate key
4. Wait for approx 2 – 4 minutes until the controller connects to AirGate. You can see the progress by
observing the value AirGate status in InteliConfig
5. When the controller is connected to AirGate it will generate AirGate ID for the controller. This AirGate ID is
the "phone number" of the controller.
Note: If CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS are used simultaneously the assigned AirGate ID will be different
for each module, so the controller will be accessible via two different AirGate ID.
Connecting from InteliConfig via AirGate 2.0
AirGate ID controller addressing ID (see above)

Access Code leave empty
AirGate Key AirGate Key adjusted in controller as per description above
AirGate Server "global.airgate.link:54441"
Username, Password use your credentials
AirGate operational and diagnostic information

Object Description
Indicated while the controller is actually not trying to connect to AirGate. This is initial
Not defined
value of the status.
Wait to Indicated while the controller is waiting the "repetition period" before next attempt to
connect connect to a node is performed.
Indicated while the controller is resolving domain name of the node to which it is
Resolving
attempting to connect.
Connecting Indicated while the controller is attempting to establish TCP link to the node.
Creat sec chan Indicated while CCS encrypted channel is being negotiated.
Indicated when the CCS channel has been established until AirGate sends message
Registering
"setRuntimeParams" (with any registration status).

Object Description
Conn Indicated when AirGate sent registration status other than "Authorized" until the status
inoperable changed to "Authorized".
Indicated when AirGate sent registration status "Authorized" until the status changed
Conn operable
to any other one.
Indicated when the service is enabled but suspended due to empty AirGate key.
Susp
Note: If you see this status message you have to adjust AirGate Key as per
AGkeyEmpty
instructions above.

In order to connect to InteliConfig following information have to be filled out:
AirGate ID (page 599)
AirGate Server → AirGate Address (page 518)
Controller Address (page 240)
AirGate Key
AirGate Key.

Image 5.12 Second screen of InteliConfig – AirGate

In order to connect to WinScope 1000 following information have to be filled out:
AirGate ID (page 599)
AirGate Server → AirGate Address (page 518)
Controller Address (page 240)
Device Access Key →AirGate Key
Access code is required
AirGate Key.

Image 5.13 WinScope 1000 screen – select AirGate

5.3 Operator Guide
5.3.1 Front panel elements 73
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 75
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 88
5.3.4 Login 89
5.3.5 Production mode 92
5.3.6 Information screen 93
5.3.7 Language selection 95
5.3.8 Display contrast adjustment 96
5.3.1 Front panel elements
Image 5.14 Operator interface of InteliLite 4 AMF 25
Control buttons
Position Picture Description
LEFT button. Use this button to move left or to change the mode. The button
can change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of currently
selected mode is displayed.

Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced
by one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – "Operating modes"
chapter.
RIGHT button. Use this button to move right or to change the mode. The
button can change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of
currently selected mode is displayed.
Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced
by one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – "Operating modes"
chapter.
HORN RESET button. Use this button to deactivate the horn output without
acknowledging the alarms.
FAULT RESET button. Use this button to acknowledge alarms and

deactivate the horn output. Inactive alarms will disappear immediately and
status of active alarms will be changed to "confirmed" so they will disappear
as soon as their reasons dismiss.
UP button. Use this button to move up or increase value.
PAGE button. Use this button to switch over display pages.
DOWN button. Use this button to move down or decrease value.
ENTER button. Use this button to finish editing a setpoint or moving right in
the history page.
START button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the
start sequence of the engine.
STOP button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the stop
sequence of the Gen-set. Repeated pressing of button will cancel current
phase of stop sequence (like cooling) and next phase will continue.
GCB button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to open or close
the GCB.
MCB button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to open or close
the MCB.
Indicators and others

Position Description
GENERATOR status indicator. There are two states – Gen-set OK (indicator is green)
and Gen-set failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on if the generator voltage and
frequency is present and within limits. Red LED starts flashing when Gen-set failure
occurs. After FAULT RESET button is pressed, Red LED goes to steady light (if an alarm

is still active) or is off (if no alarm is active).
MAINS status indicator. There are two states – Mains OK (indicator is green) and Mains
failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on, if mains is present and within limits. Red LED
starts blinking when the mains failure is detected and after the Gen-set has started and
connected to the load it lights permanently until the mains failure disappears.
Graphic B/W display, 132 × 64 px.
GCB Status. Consists of 3 green LEDs. The middle green LED is on if GCB is closed. It
is driven by GCB CLOSE/OPEN output or by GCB feedback signal. Side green LEDs are
on in case the generator status indicator is ok.
LOAD. Green LED is ON if load is supplied by mains or by generator. It means, that Gen-
set or mains is OK and proper circuit breaker is closed.
MCB Status.Consists of 3 green LEDs. The middle green LED is on if MCB is closed. It is
driven by MCB CLOSE/OPEN output or by MCB feedback signal. Side green LEDs are
on in case the mains status indicator is ok.
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure

The displayed information is structured into "pages" and "screens". Use the PAGE button to switch over the
pages.
The page Measurement consists of screens which display measured values such as voltages, current, oil
pressure etc.; computed values such as Gen-set power, statistic data and the alarm list on the last screen.
The page setpoints contains all setpoints organized to groups and also a special group for entering a
password.
The page History log shows the history log with the most recent record displayed first.
Main Screen
Symbols
Padlock – active when LBI ACCESS LOCK is active
R – active when there is active remote connection to controller
Exclamation mark – active when there is any alarm in alarm list

Optional
Value can be chosen via setpoints Main Screen Line 1 (page 239) and Main Screen Line 2 (page 239).
Possibilities are: RPM, PF, Run Hours, ATT, AIN1
Measurement Screens
Note: Use the Up and Down buttons to move between measurement pages.


Note: Available only with plug-in module.



Note: Available only with ECU supported by TIER4F

Note: From all of these pages it is possible to switch seamlessly to the setpoint group page by pressing
Page button.
Note: There can be some additional screens and also some screens can be hidden. Screen’s visibility
depends on actual configuration (usage of extension or communication modules, ECU etc.).
Setpoint Screens
Note: From all measurement pages you can easily go to the setpoint group page by pressing the Page
button.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
setpoint group.
Note: Use the Enter button to enter selected setpoint group.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
setpoint.
Note: Use the Left and the Right button to select required setpoint.
Note: Use the Enter button to enter selected setpoint.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to set
required value of
selected setpoint.
Note: Use the Enter button to confirm adjusted value of setpoint.
Note: Use the Page button to discard changes, to set setpoint to previous value and to return to the list of
setpoints of selected group.

History Log
button.
Note: From setpoint group page we can fluently go to the history log pages by pressing the Page button.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.
Note: Use the Enter button to move to the next page of history log.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.

Note: Use the Up
and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.

Note: Use the Up
and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.

Note: Use the Up
and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.
Note: Use Enter button to move to the first page of history log.
IMPORTANT: The records are numbered in reverse order, i.e. the latest (newest) record is "0" and
older records have "-1", "-2" etc.

Note: This is only basic history record. There can be some additional screens in case that in controller is
extension module or ECU is configured. Also it depends on connection type.
5.3.3 Browsing alarms
Note: Use the Up button to move to alarm list from main measurement screen.
Active alarms are displayed as white text on black background. It means the alarm is still active, i.e. the
appropriate alarm conditions are still present.
Inactive alarms are displayed as black text on white background. It means the alarm is not active, i.e. the
appropriate alarm conditions are gone.
Unconfirmed alarms are displayed with an asterisk. This means the alarm is still not acknowledged
(confirmed).
ECU alarms: SPN/FMI/OC/SC
SPN – Suspect parameter number
FMI – type of protection
OC – number of errors
SC – source of error

User access management alarms
The controller comes to the customer with Production mode turned on, the default administrator password
installed and with no prefilled email address for password reset. For security purposes, the following user
access management alarms will appear. Detailed description of situation when the alarms are active is
provided below:
Wrn Production Mode is present in the alarm list any time the production mode is turned on. To turn off
the Production mode go to User management and uncheck the checkbox Production mode or go to
Production Mode display screen and select disable.
Wrn Default Password appears in alarm list when the default administrator password is set and
communication module is plugged in the controller. The purpose of alarm is to inform that the controller
might be or is connected to an untrusted interface and cybersecurity rules are not fulfilled because there is
default administrator password.
Wrn Password reset e-mail address is not set appears in alarm list when there is no email address set
and the administrator password is not the default one. The purpose of alarm is to inform that there is
possibility that the controller might not be accessible by administrator password due to a forgotten
password. The password reset procedure cannot be performed without a filled email address. To fill out
email address, the administrator password is required.
5.3.4 Login
button.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down button
to select setpoint
group Login.
Note: Use the Enter button to enter setpoint group Login.

Note: Use the Up
and the Down Button
to select Login.
Note: Use the Enter button to enter Login.
UserID Edit
Note: Use the Up

and the Down Button
to change the digit.
Note: Use the Left and the Right buttons to move between digits.
Note: Use the Enter button to confirm the UserID or Page button to cancel entering Login.

PIN Edit
Note: Use the Up

and the Down Button
to change the digit.
Note: Use the Left and the Right buttons to move between digits.
Note: Use the Enter button to confirm the PIN and Login or the Page button to cancel entering the Login.
Note: In case that invalid UserID or PIN are entered, the controller shows Wrong Credentials screen. Use
the Enter button to enter Login again or the Page Button to go back to menu.

5.3.5 Production mode
Note: From all measurement pages you can fluently go to the setpoint group page by pressing the Page
button.
Note: Use the Enter button to enter setpoint group Login.
Note: Use the Up

and the Down Button
to select Production
Mode
Note: Use the Enter button to enter the Production Mode.

Note: Use the Up
and the Down Button
to change to
disabled
Note: Use the Enter button to disable the Production Mode.
Note: Once Disabled is confirmed by Enter button the option Enabled is no longer on the screen and
therefore it is not possible to enable Production mode by HMI display screen. Use InteliConfig to enable the
Production mode.
5.3.6 Information screen
+
Note: On Main measurement screen press the Enter and the Page button together. The Enter button has to
be pressed first.

Note: Use the Page button to move to the next page.
Note: Use the Up button to move back to main measurement screen.

5.3.7 Language selection
+
Note: On Main measurement screen press the Enter and the Page button together. The Enter button has to
be pressed first.

Note: Use the Up
and the Down
button to select
required language.
Note: Use the Enter button to confirm the selected language.
5.3.8 Display contrast adjustment
+ +
Note: On any measurement screen press the Enter Note: On any measurement screen press the Enter
and the Up button together for higher contrast. and the Down button together for lower contrast.
Note: After setting the contrast, no another action is needed.

5.4 Remote Display
This chapter describes Remote display firmware IL4-RD, which is designed as a remote signalling and control
software for InteliLite 4 family controllers. It is an optional software which is possible to upload into the
controller rather than the controller’s standard firmware.
5.4.1 General description

Remote display software works as "remote display and control" for the Master InteliLite 4 family controller.
Gen-set can be controlled using the Remote display and the Master controller simultaneously and
independently. All Remote display screens (Measurement screens, Setpoint screens and History Log)
display the same data as the Master controller. The front panel buttons on both controllers work the same
way. All remote display LEDs show the same state as corresponding LEDs on Master controller.
Note: Some settings are not shared between display and control unit (setpoint Backlight Timeout (page
235), Controller language and Controller user mode).
5.4.2 IL4-RD Firmware installation

The IL4-RD Remote display firmware is installed in the same way as any other InteliLite 4 firmware using the
InteliConfig PC tool. Reverting the Remote display controller back to regular Gen-set controller is carried out
the same way.
Note: InteliConfig shows the most compatible and the most recent firmware as default option. Thus, it is
necessary use "More options" (…) button to pick IL4-RD firmware for uploading to controller. (See details on
picture below.)
Note: IL4-RD consists of firmware only, there is no archive included.
Note: When IL4-RD firmware is uploaded to controller there is only possible connect InteliConfig using USB
connection. InteliConfig serves only for firmware update when connected to Remote display. There is no
Master controller SCADA displayed, no possibility to adjust setpoints, display Values etc.
Note: Please refer to InteliConfig Global Guide for details about firmware uploading to controller.

5.4.3 Wiring
IL4-RD can be connected to any InteliLite 4 family controller via an onboard RS485 communication port or via
the external RS232/RS485communication ports on CM-RS232-485 communication module . It is possible to
connect up to three Remote displays to one Master controller, but each one needs to be using different
communication interface.. Connecting two or more remote displays to one communication line (e.g. RS485) is
not possible. Using one Remote display it is possible to monitor only one Master controller at the time.
Note: IL4 AMF8 and AMF9 do not have an onboard RS485 comm port.
5.4.4 Interconnection variants

RS232
It is necessary to use CM-RS232-485 communication module on both the Master controller and the Remote
display. COM 1 communication channel is used with these settings:
COM 1 Mode: Direct
COM 1 Communication Speed: 57600 or 115200 bps
Controller Address: 1 – 32
The maximal distance between Master controller and Remote display is 10 m for RS-232 connection. It is
recommended to use standard Null modem cable (crossover cable), although three wire (TxD, RxD, GND)
RS-232 connection is sufficient for communication.
RS485
Any combination of internal RS485 port or external one on CM-RS232-485 communication module can be
used for the Master and Remote Displays.
COM 2 communication channel is used with these settings:
COM 2 Mode: Direct
COM 2 Communication Speed: 57600 or 115200 bps
Controller Address: 1 – 32

The maximal distance between Master controller and Remote display is 1200 m for RS485 connection. It is
recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables that comply with the EIA RS-485 standard to reduce
interference and to achieve maximal distance.
Onboard RS485
The remote display can be connected by onboard RS485 communication port on both the Master controller
and CM-RS232-485 Remote Display or a combination of these.
RS485 Mode: Direct
RS485 Communication speed: 57600 or 115200 bps
Controller address: 1-32
The maximal distance between Master controller and Remote display is 1200 m for RS485 connection. It is
recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables that comply with the EIA RS-485 standard to reduce
interference and to achieve maximal distance.
RS232 + RS485
Master Controller with Two Remote Displays
It is possible to combine two of the previous methods of interconnection and connect two Remote display to
one Master controller concurrently. All parameters and settings are the same as mentioned above.
Note: Onboard RS485 and CM-232-485 communication module can be used to achieve both remote
displays being connected via RS485 for IL4 MRS16 and IL4 AMF25.
Note: IL4 AMF8, IL4 AMF9 and IL4 AMF20 as master controller can only have up to two remote displays at
the same time and will need to use RS232 combined with RS485.

Master Controller with Three Remote Displays
It is possible to combine all of the previous methods of interconnection and connect three Remote display to
one Master controller concurrently. All parameters and settings are the same as mentioned above.
Note: This is only possible if IL4 MRS16 or IL4 AMF25 is the master controller.
5.4.5 Connection process

After powering up, the Remote Display automatically tries to connect to the last known Master controller (if
such configuration exists in Remote display). Otherwise the Remote display searches for any Master
controller connected. It starts to search on internal RS485 line using Master controller address 1 – 32 and
continues with COM 2 (RS485) and COM 1 (RS232). The Remote Display tries two communication speeds
57600 bps and 115200 bps.
During this autodetection process the message "Trying to connect" is displayed on screen. This process
takes approx. one minute.
When an incompatible configuration type is found in a detected controller, the message "Unknown cfg format
COM x Addr yy" is displayed on screen for 5 seconds. Detecting continues with the next address in the range.
If detecting finishes with no compatible Master controller found, the message "No connection" is displayed on
screen for 5 seconds. The detecting process starts from the beginning and continues until compatible a
Master controller is found.
Unsupported types of controllers or controllers that are not properly communicating are skipped during the
search.
5.4.6 Connection troubleshooting

There are a few reasons why the Remote display may not connect to the Master controller:
An unsupported type of Master controller connected.
Unsupported firmware in Master controller.

Configuration table error in Master controller.
Wrong settings of setpoint COM x Mode in master controller.
Wrong settings of setpoint COM x Communication Speed in master controller.
Wrong connection, wiring, or communication failure.
5.4.7 Function description

Remote display software works as "remote display and control" for the Master InteliLite 4 family controller.
Gen-set can be controlled using the Remote display and the Master controller simultaneously and
independently. All Remote display screens (Information screens, Measurement screens, Setpoint screens
and History Log) display the same data as the Master controller. The front panel buttons on both controllers
work the same way. All remote display LEDs show the same state as corresponding LEDs on Master
controller. User can switch screens, enter or set password, adjust setpoints, change language, change
Configuration Level, change display contrast and view history records.
Note: It is recommended to use the same type and model of controller for Master and for Remote display.
Only in such case is assured the proper function of all buttons, LED diodes and display.
Example: When AMF controller HW type is used as a Master controller and MRS controller HW type is
used for Remote display there is no possibility to control MCB in MAN mode as there is no MCB button on
the MRS controller. Even though all these not recommended combinations may work, all of the limitations
above must be considered.
Master device is always able to function without a connected Remote display. Disconnecting of the serial line
between the Master controller and Remote display has no effect on the Master controller.
When the serial line between the Master controller and Remote display is disconnected, or communication
cannot be established, Remote display shows its own Init screen with the message "Trying to connect" and all
LEDs are off.
Once the Remote display finds compatible Master controller it shows message "Cfg processing" and
downloads configuration table from master controller. After the configuration from Master controller is
downloaded and the Remote display is reinitiated, jump to master controller's Main measurement screen and
regular operation is started.
It is possible to switch to Remote display's own Init screen to check IL4-RD FW version and serial number of
used controller and communication status by pressing and holding the Page button for more than 3 seconds.
5.4.8 Firmware compatibility

Remote Display
IL4-RD FW is able to be uploaded into the following controllers:
InteliLite 4 AMF25
InteliLite 4 AMF20
InteliLite 4 AMF9
InteliLite 4 AMF8
InteliLite 4 MRS16
Note: All controllers from IL4 family can act as Remote Display of master controller and will always be
compatible with each other.

Note: If IL4 MRS16 is used as a Remote Display in AMF application, the user won't be able to see
information about mains status and there will be no option to control MCB.
5.5 Functions
5.5.1 Operating Modes 103
5.5.2 Start-stop sequence 104
5.5.3 Engine start 106
5.5.4 Stabilization 110
5.5.5 Connecting to load 111
5.5.6 MRS operation 111
5.5.7 AMF operation 111
5.5.8 Dual Operation 113
5.5.9 Engine cool down and stop 116
5.5.10 Gen-set operation states 117
5.5.11 Additional running engine indications 120
5.5.12 RPM Measurement 120
5.5.13 Multi ECU 121
5.5.14 History log 122
5.5.15 Breaker control 123
5.5.16 Protections 126
5.5.17 Maintenance Timers 141
5.5.18 Exercise timers 141
5.5.19 Rental Timers 148
5.5.20 Pulse Counters 149
5.5.21 Analog switches 149
5.5.22 Voltage phase sequence detection 150
5.5.23 Load shedding 150
5.5.24 Dummy Load 152
5.5.25 Sensor curves 153
5.5.26 Power formats and units 155
5.5.27 PLC 155
5.5.28 Geo-fencing 161
5.5.29 After-treatment Support 161
5.5.30 Alternate configuration 166
5.5.31 USB host 167
5.5.32 Firewall 171
5.5.33 E-Stop 171
5.5.34 ECU Frequency selection 172
5.5.35 User Buttons 173
5.5.36 User setpoints 174

5.5.1 Operating Modes
Selecting the operating mode is done with the Left and the Right buttons on the front panel or by
changing the Controller Mode (page 232) setpoint (from the front panel or remotely).
Note: If this setpoint is configured as password-protected, the correct password must be entered prior to
attempting to change the mode.
Note: The mode cannot be changed if Access Lock input is active.
The following binary inputs can be used to force one respective operating mode independent of the mode
setpoint selection:
Remote OFF (page 631)
Remote TEST (page 633)
Remote MAN (page 630)
Remote AUTO (page 630)
If the respective input is active the controller will change the mode to the respective position according to the
active input. If multiple inputs are active, the mode will be changed according to priorities of the inputs. The
priorities match the order in the list above. If all inputs are deactivated, the mode will return to the original
position given by the setpoint.
AMF Operating Modes

OFF mode – AMF
No starting of the Gen-set is possible .Controller stays in Not ready status and cannot be started in any way.
The MCB is closed permanently (MCB Opens On (page 310) = GENRUN) or is open / closed depending on
whether the mains is present or not (MCB Opens On (page 310) = MAINSFAIL). No AMF function will be
performed. The buttons MCB , GCB , Start and Stop including the appropriate binary inputs for
external buttons are not active.
IMPORTANT: When engine is running, it is not possible to switch Gen-set to OFF mode.
MAN mode – AMF

The engine can be started and stopped manually using the Start and Stop buttons (or the external
buttons wired to the appropriate binary inputs) in MAN mode. When the engine is running, GCB can be
closed. Also MCB can be closed and opened manually using the MCB button, regardless of whether the
mains is present or not. No auto start is performed.
Note: The controller provides interlock between GCB and MCB, it means it is never possible to close both CB
together.
AUTO mode – AMF

The controller does not respond to the buttons Start , Stop , MCB ON/OFF and GCB ON/OFF .
Engine start/stop request is evaluated from Mains failure/return.
Note: When the AMF function will start the engine than the engine will be running at least for the time which is
defined in Mains Return Delay (page 296) setpoint, even if the mains would return in the meantime.

TEST mode – AMF only
The Gen-set will be started when the controller is put to TEST mode and will remain running unloaded. If a
mains failure occurs, the MCB will be opened and after Transfer Delay (page 312) the GCB will be closed
and the Gen-set will supply the load. After the mains have recovered, the delay Mains Return Delay (page
296) will count down. If the time elapses and the mains is still OK, the controller will transfer the load back to
the mains after Transfer Delay (page 312) and the Gen-set will run unloaded again until the mode is
changed.
Remote test on load

When binary input is active, the controller automatically transfers load from the mains to the Gen-set. See LBI
REM TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 629).
MRS Operating Modes

OFF mode – MRS
No start of the Gen-set is possible. Controller stays in Not ready status and cannot be started in any way. The
buttons GCB , Start and Stop including the appropriate binary inputs for the external buttons are not
active.
IMPORTANT: When engine is running, it is not possible to switch Gen-set to OFF mode.
MAN mode – MRS

The engine can be started and stopped manually using the Start and Stop buttons (or the external
buttons wired to the appropriate binary inputs) in MAN mode. When the engine is running, GCB can be
closed.
AUTO mode – MRS

The controller does not respond to the buttons Start , Stop and GCB ON/OFF .Engine start/stop
request is given by binary input Remote Start/Stop (page 632).
5.5.2 Start-stop sequence

State Condition of the transition Action Next state
Ready Start request PRESTART (PAGE 677) on Prestart Prestart
Time (page 245) counter started
RPM > 2 or Oil pressure > Stop (Stop
Starting Oil Pressure (page fail)
246) or Generator voltage >
10V or D+ voltage is higher
than D+ Threshold (page 262)
OFF Mode selected or Not Ready
Shutdown alarm active
Not Ready RPM < 2, Oil pressure not Ready
detected, Generator voltage <
10 V, D+ not Active no
shutdown alarm active, other

than OFF Mode selected
Prestart Prestart time elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) on, Cranking
STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) orSTARTER 2
(PAGE 683) on, Maximum Cranking
Cranking RPM > Starting RPM STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) or STARTER 2 Starting
(PAGE 683) off, PRESTART (PAGE 677)
off
D+ input activated or oil STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) or STARTER 2 Cranking
pressure detected or Generator (PAGE 683) off, PRESTART (PAGE 677)
voltage > 25% Nominal voltage off
Maximum Cranking Time STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) or STARTER 2 Crank pause
(page 244), 1st attempt (PAGE 683) off, FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
658) off, STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 684)
on, Cranking Fail Pause (page 244)
timer started
Maximum Cranking Time STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) or STARTER 2 Shutdown
(page 244) elapsed, last (PAGE 683) off, PRESTART (PAGE 677) (Start fail)
attempt off
all cranking attempts elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) off, STOP Shutdown
SOLENOID (PAGE 684) on (Start fail)
Crank pause Cranking Fail Pause (page STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) or STARTER 2 Cranking
244) elapsed (PAGE 683) off, FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
658) on, STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 684)
off, Maximum Cranking Time (page
244) counter started
Starting Idle Time (page 253) elapsed Minimal Stabilization Time (page Running
255) and Maximal Stabilization
any shutdown condition FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) off, STOP Shutdown
SOLENOID (PAGE 684) on
Running Stop request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 680) Cooling
off,Cooling Time (page 258) counter
started
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown READY TO LOAD (PAGE 680) off, FUEL Shutdown
condition SOLENOID (PAGE 658) off
GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 660) Loaded
closed
Loaded GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 660) Running
opened
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) off, STOP Shutdown
condition SOLENOID (PAGE 684) on, READY TO
LOAD (PAGE 680) off,

Cooling Cooling Time (page 258) FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) off, STOP Stop
elapsed SOLENOID (PAGE 684) on
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) off, STOP Shutdown
condition SOLENOID (PAGE 684) on
Start request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 680) on Running
Stop RPM = 0, Oil pressure not Ready
detected, Generator voltage
<10 V, D+ not active
If at least one of engine running Stop (Stop
indication is detected when fail)
Stop Time (page 258)
elapsed.
Note: If all generator parameters are OK and Minimal Stabilization Time (page 255) elapsed, indicates
that GCB is possible to close. In AUTO Mode GCB is closed in this moment automatically.
Note: The start-up sequence can be interrupted atn any time by a stop request.
5.5.3 Engine start

Diesel engine
The setpoint Fuel Solenoid (page 242) must be switched to the Diesel position.
After the command for start is issued (pressing the Start button in MAN mode, auto start condition is
fulfilled in AUTO mode or controller is switched to TEST mode), PRESTART (PAGE 677) and GLOW PLUGS
(PAGE 664) outputs are energized for a time period established by the setpoints Prestart Time (page
245) and Glow Plugs Time (page 246).
After Prestart Time (page 245) and Glow Plugs Time (page 246), the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
658) is energized after Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 253) the motor starter is activated by energizing the
output STARTER 1 (PAGE 682).
When one or more of following conditions is met, the starter output is de-energized:
The engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM (page 245), or
One of the Additional running engine indications (page 120) signals is active.
The controller remains in the Starting phase until the engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM
(page 245), after which it is considered started and the Idle period will follow.
The maximum duration that the output STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) is energized is determined by the setpoint
Maximum Cranking Time (page 244). If the engine does not start within this period, the output STARTER
1 (PAGE 682) is de-energized and a pause with a length determined by Cranking Fail Pause (page 244)
will follow. PRESTART (PAGE 677) and GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 664) outputs are active during the pause. After
the pause has elapsed, the next start attempt is executed. The number of start attempts is given by the
setpoint Cranking Attempts (page 243).
Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 667) remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle Time (page
253).

After the idle period has finished, the output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 667) is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The Stabilization (page 110) phase follows.
Image 5.15 Flowchart of start of diesel engine

GAS engine
The setpoint Fuel Solenoid (page 242) must be switched to the Gas position.
After the command for start is issued (pressing the Start button in MAN mode, auto start condition is
fulfilled in AUTO mode or controller is switched to TEST mode), PRESTART (PAGE 677) and GLOW PLUGS
(PAGE 664) outputs are energized for a time period established by the setpoints Prestart Time (page
245) and Glow Plugs Time (page 246) begins.
After Prestart Time (page 245) and Glow Plugs Time (page 246), the countdown of Sd Ventilation
Time (page 257)
After Sd Ventilation Time (page 257), the engine starter is activated by energizing the output STARTER 1
(PAGE 682).
When the engine speed exceeds 30 RPM, the outputs FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) and IGNITION (PAGE
667) are energized.
When the engine speed exceeds value of Starting RPM (page 245), the engine starter is de-energized.
The engine is considered as started and the Idle period will follow.
IMPORTANT: Additional running engine indications (page 120) signals are not evaluated during
the start of a gas engine. The Pickup must be used in any case!
The maximum duration that the output STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) is energized is determined by the setpoint
Maximum Cranking Time (page 244). If the engine does not start within this period, outputs STARTER 1
(PAGE 682) and FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) are de-energized and a pause with length determined by
Cranking Fail Pause (page 244) will follow. PRESTART (PAGE 677), GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 664) and
IGNITION (PAGE 667) outputs are active during the pause. After the pause has elapsed, the next start
attempt is executed. The number of start attempts is given by the setpoint Cranking Attempts (page
243).
Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 667) remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle Time (page
253).
After the idle period has finished, the output DESCRIPTION (PAGE 667) is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The Stabilization (page 110) phase follows.

Image 5.16 Flowchart of start of gas engine

Dual Starter
Dual Starter function is enabled if LBO STARTER 2 (PAGE 683) is configured and Setpoint Dual Starter
Sequence (page 243) is set to any of sequence options: 1-2 or 11-22 or 111-222.
Dual Starter Sequence options:
Disabled (Default)
1-2: (Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 683)
according to the order of option pattern 1-2.
11-22: (Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) then STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) then
STARTER 2 (PAGE 683) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 683) according to the order of option pattern 11-22.
111-222: (Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) then STARTER 1 (PAGE 682)
then STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 683) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 683) then STARTER 2
(PAGE 683) according to the order of option pattern 111-222.
The total number of attempts is defined by the Setpoint Cranking Attempts (page 243).
Example:
Cranking Attempts=5, Dual Starter Sequence =1-2
Gen-set will activate Starter 1 (if failed) then Starter 2 (if failed) then Starter 1 (if failed) then
Starter 2 (if failed) then Starter 1
Cranking Attempts=5, Dual Starter Sequence =11-22
Gen-set will activate Starter 1 (if failed) then Starter 1 (if failed) then Starter 2 (if failed) then
Starter 2 (if failed) then Starter 1
The order of sequence is affected by the actual status of LBI STARTER PRIORITY (PAGE 634) (0-Starter 1, 1-
Starter 2). Can be used for disabling a particular starter.
LBIs STARTER 1 DISABLED (PAGE 634), STARTER 2 DISABLED (PAGE 634). If the LBI Starter 1,2 Disabled state
is 1 then the Starter 1 ,2 will be skipped in the sequence. Skipped starter is not counted as cranking attempt.
In case both starters are disabled, controller is in the state not ready.
Value Num Starts (page 583) stores the total successful starts of both starters.
5.5.4 Stabilization
When the Engine start (page 106) sequence is finished, the Gen-set goes into the stabilization phase. There
are two timers (setpoints) in this phase:
Minimal Stabilization Time (page 255) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) and the GCB
cannot be closed even if the generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 256) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated), but contrary
to the previous timer, the GCB can be closed if generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
In situations where the GCB is closed automatically (AUTO, TEST modes), the closing of GCB will occur as
soon as the generator voltage and frequency will get into limits and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page
255) has elapsed.
In the event that the generator voltage or frequency are not within limits of the Maximal Stabilization Time
(page 256) period, the appropriate protection(s) will be activated and the Gen-set will be cooled down and
stopped.

Note: The limits for the generator voltage and frequency are given by setpoints in the Group: Generator
settings (page 281).
Note: The value of the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 255) setpoint has to be lower than the value of
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 256) setpoint.
5.5.5 Connecting to load

When the Stabilization (page 110) phase is finished, the Gen-set can be connected to the load.
The command for connecting the Gen-set to the load is issued either automatically (AUTO, TEST modes) or
manually by pressing the GCB button. The following conditions must be valid:
The Gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 255) timer has elapsed.
The Gen-set voltage and frequency are within limits.
5.5.6 MRS operation

The "MRS function" represents manual or remote start of gen-set. It is ideal for prime power applications.
The MRS procedure

When the start command is detected, the following steps are performed:
The Gen-set is started.
GCB is closed and the Gen-set begins to supply the load (in AUTO mode, otherwise GCB button must be
pressed)
When the stop command is detected, the following steps are performed:
GCB is opened and the Gen-set stops supplying the load.
After GCB is opened, the Gen-set cools down and a stops.
5.5.7 AMF operation

The "AMF function" represents the automatic start in the event that the mains have failed, and a stop after the
mains have been restored. The automatic start can be enabled or disabled by binary inputs AMF START
BLOCK (PAGE 609) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 624).
Note: The AMF function works only in AUTO mode.
AMF sequence
State Condition of the transition Action Next state

Mains Mains failed or MCB MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671)off, Mains failure
operation FEEDBACK (PAGE 626) Emergency Start Delay (page 296)
dropout, MCB Opens On timer started
(page 310) = Mains Fail
Mains failed or MCB Emergency Start Delay (page 296) Mains failure
FEEDBACK (PAGE 626) timer started
dropout, MCB Opens On
(page 310) = Gen Run
Mains failure Mains voltage and frequency After elapsing MCB Close Delay (page Mains

OK, MCB Opens On (page 297) MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671) on operation
310) = Mains Fail
Mains voltage and frequency None Mains
OK, MCB Opens On (page operation
310) = Gen Run
Emergency Start Delay Engine start sequence performed, then Island
(page 296) elapsed, MCB GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 660) on operation
Opens On (page 310) =
Mains Fail
Emergency Start Delay Engine start sequence performed, then Island
(page 296) elapsed, MCB MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671) off, time operation
Opens On (page 310) = delay Transfer Delay (page 312)
Gen Run performed and GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE
660) on
Island Mains voltage and frequency Mains Return Delay (page 296) timer Mains return
operation OK started
Mains return Mains failed Island
operation
Mains Return Delay (page GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 660) off, then Mains
296) elapsed after Transfer Delay (page 312) MCB operation
CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671) on and then
engine stop sequence performed
Note: Mains failed means mains over/under -voltage, over/under -frequency, voltage asymmetry is issued
(preset delay must elapse).
Note: If during start-up sequence mains returns, then MCB is reclosed with delay MCB Close Delay (page
297)(if opened, depending on MCB Opens On (page 310) setpoint) and start-up sequence is interrupted.
Note: If mains fails during stop procedure (cooling) again, stop sequence is interrupted, MCB opened and
GCB re-closed with Transfer Delay (page 312).
Mains failure detection

The mains is considered as faulty when one or more of the following conditions are valid:
The mains voltage is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 301) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 299) for a time period longer than Mains Undervoltage Delay (page 303) or Mains
Overvoltage Delay (page 303).
The mains voltage unbalance is out of limit given by setpoint Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 303) for a
time period longer than Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay (page 304).
The mains frequency is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Underfrequency (page 306) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 304) for a time period longer than Mains < > Frequency Delay (page
308).
The MCB close command was not successful and the alarm Wrn MCB Fail (page 739) was not reset.
Phase rotation is incorrect.

Healthy mains detection
The mains is considered to be healthy when all of the following conditions are valid:
The mains voltage is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 301) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 299).
The mains voltage unbalance is within the limits given by the setpoint Mains Voltage Unbalance (page
303).
The mains frequency is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains Underfrequency (page 306) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 304).
The alarm Wrn MCB Fail (page 739) is not active (if the MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 626) matches the
expected position given by the MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671)). This condition is not required if MCB is
open (MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 626) is inactive).
Phase rotation is correct.
The AMF procedure

When the mains failure is detected, the following steps are performed:
If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 310) is set to Mains Failure, the MCB is opened
The timer for automatic start of the Gen-set Emergency Start Delay (page 296) begins to count down.
After the timer has elapsed, the Gen-set is started.
Note: The automatic start of the Gen-set due to AMF function can be disabled by the binary inputs AMF
START BLOCK (PAGE 609) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 624).
If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 310) is set to Gen Run, the MCB is opened once the generator
voltage is within limits (after Minimal Stabilization Time (page 255) elapses).
Note: If the mains are restored to health and the Gen-set is still not connected to the load, the controller
interrupts the startup process and closes back the MCB.
After Transfer Delay (page 312) elapses, the GCB is closed and the Gen-set begins to supply the load.
After the mains is restored to normal, the timer Mains Return Delay (page 296) begins to count down.
Maximum time between closing of MCB and opening GCB is given by the setpoint Transfer Delay (page
312). After GCB is opened, the Gen-set cools down and stops.
IMPORTANT: Controller has this behavior only in AUTO mode!
5.5.8 Dual Operation

Dual operation – AMF
Dual operation - AMF consists of 2 Gen-sets and 1 mains. Principle of dual operation is in switching the Gen-
sets in supplying of load when there is a mains failure or LBI REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 632) is activated on
Master controller. Each controller measures mains and its gen-set. Interlock between all breakers (GCB1,
GCB2 and MCB) is required. If there is failure of one Gen-set, the second Gen-set will take the load.
MCB control from both controllers is not required. Slave controller in Dual Operation does not control MCB
(MCB Close/Open is in open position). However it is recommended to be prepared to also control MCB from
slave controller – in case of failure of Dual Operation, both controllers switch to normal AMF operation.
IMPORTANT: Dual operation works only in AUTO mode.

IMPORTANT: Dual operation is in fail also during process of adjustment of setpoints. In this
moment slave still tries to control MCB.
IMPORTANT: Setpoint MCB Opens On (page 310) has to be set-up to Mains Fail option.
IMPORTANT: LBI MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 624) can cause fail of dual operation system. In case of
different states of mains on master and slave controllers, alarm AHI Dual Operation Different
Mains (page 735) is activated and gen-sets are switched to normal operation.
Note: LBI AMF START BLOCK (PAGE 609) is evaluated on both controllers. When this LBI is activated, gen-
set can’t start in dual operation. Second gen-set (without active AMF START BLOCK (PAGE 609)) will start.
Gen-sets are not swapping the load until this LBI is active. Behaviour is the same like with alarm of 2nd level.
Note: MCB Fail protection is not used in Slave controller during Dual Operation. MCB is controlled only via
Master. Slave controller has MCB Close/Open in open position all the time during Dual Operation.
Start/stop events
Event Dual AMF
Mains Fail Evaluated by Master only
LBI REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 632) Evaluated by Master only
Dual operation – MRS

Dual operation MRS consists of 2 Gen-sets. The principle of dual operation is in switching the Gen-sets in
supplying of load when REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 632) is activated on Master controller (on slave controller
this LBI has no function in Dual Operation). Each controller measures its Gen-set. Interlock between all
breakers (GCB1 and GCB2) is required. If there is failure of one Gen-set, the second Gen-set will take the
load.
IMPORTANT: Dual operation works only in AUTO mode.
IMPORTANT: Dual operation is in fail also during process of adjustment of setpoints.
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to use Auto Run option in Exercise timers with dual operation.
Start/stop events
Event Dual MRS
LBI REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 632) Evaluated by Master only
Communication
Communication can be established via onboard RS485 or via communication module CM-RS232-485.
Communication line is selected via setpoints RS485 Mode (page 240) (RS485 onboard), COM1 Mode
(page 485) or COM2 Mode (page 487) (CM-RS232-485 module). There are options for DualMaster and
DualSlave. These options adjust, which communication line is selected and which role the controller has in
Dual Operation.
IMPORTANT: For correct communication it is necessary to have one Master and one Slave
controller on the same communication line.

IMPORTANT: There are no shared setpoints. It is necessary to have the same settings of AMF
setpoints and engine timers in both controllers.
In case of communication failure between controllers, alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 734) is
activated. This alarm is activated on both controllers. Both controllers are switched to normal operation.
Adjustment of COM Modes

COM COM
Mode/RS485 Mode/RS485 Behavior
in controller 1 in controller 2
Master Slave OK – normal dual operation function
Slave Master OK – normal dual operation function
There will be communication fail (it is necessary to have master and
slave to establish communication line) – there will be active
Master Master alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 734). This alarm will be
active on both controllers. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.
Slave Slave alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 734). This alarm will be
active on both controllers. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.
Disabled Master/Slave alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 734). This alarm will be
active on master/slave controller. Both controllers will be switched to
normal operation.
slave to establish communication line) – there will be active alarm
Master/Slave Disabled AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 734). This alarm will be active on
master/slave controller. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.
Disabled Disabled Both controllers are in normal operation.
Switching of Gen-sets
Switching of Gen-sets is based on their Running Hours (page 584). The time that the Gen-set runs is
adjusted via setpoint Running Hours Max Difference (page 310). When difference of Running Hours
(page 584) between Gen-sets is bigger than value adjusted in this setpoint, load is transferred from first Gen-
set to second Gen-set. First Gen-set is supplying the load until second Gen-set is in running state. Then the
GCB of first Gen-set is opened. From this moment timer Transfer Delay (page 312) counts down. When it
counts down, GCB of second Gen-set can be closed.
Note: Value of Running Hours (page 584) can be modified by setpoint Running Hours Base (page 311).
This setpoint can add or remove additional running hours to value from statistics. This modified value of
running hours is used in dual operation function.
Note: In case that both Gen-sets have the same running hours, Master controller has higher priority.

Note: Switching of Gen-sets can be inhibit by setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 311) or by binary input DUAL
SWAP GEN-SETS (PAGE 615).
Note: Priority of Gen-set can be changed by binary input DUAL TOP PRIORITY (PAGE 616). In this case
running hours values are not used to decide, which Gen-set should start.
Dual operation adjustment

Prepare two InteliLite 4 AMF 25 controllers. CM-RS232-485 module is optional.
Adjust setpoints RS485 Mode (page 240) or COM1 Mode (page 485) or COM2 Mode (page 487)
(depending on preferred communication line) to DualMaster on first controller and Dual Slave on second
controller
Copy the identical configurations to both of them
Use wiring with mechanical/electrical interlock between all breakers (mechanical interlock is preferred)
Switch both controllers to OFF mode to prevent automatic or remote start
Interconnect communication terminals on CM-RS232-485 modules
Adjust setpoint MCB Opens On (page 310) to Mains Fail option
Adjust setpoint Running Hours Max Difference (page 310) on Master controller
Adjust setpoints Running Hours Base (page 311) on both controllers if running hours change is needed
for dual operation
Adjust additional function of dual operation – Master Error Protection (page 312), Slave Error
Protection (page 312) and Swap Gen-sets (page 311) setpoints
Change the mode of both controllers to AUTO
System is now ready for dual operation function
Note: Breakers feedbacks are recommended, but not required.
Alarms related to dual operation:

AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 734)
Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail (page 734)
Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail (page 735)
AHI Dual Operation Different Mains (page 735)
ALI Dual Operation Different FW Version (page 734)
5.5.9 Engine cool down and stop

The cool down phase begins after the stop command has been issued and the GCB has been opened.
Duration of the cool down phase is determined by the setpoint Cooling Time (page 258).
Cooling is performed either at nominal speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are evaluated)
or at idle speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are not evaluated). Selection of the speed is
done by the setpoint Cooling Speed (page 258).
The cool down can be finished manually in MAN mode by pressing the STOP button.
If a new start request comes, the cool down will be interrupted and the Gen-set will go back to the
stabilization phase. If the cooling was at nominal speed, the stabilization timers will not count down again
so the GCB is ready to be closed (after 2s delay).

When the cool down is finished, the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) is de-energized and STOP SOLENOID
(PAGE 684) is energized. The engine will stop within the time period determined by the setpoint Stop Time
(page 258). If the engine does not stop within this time, the alarm Wrn Stop Fail (page 737) will be issued.
The output STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 684) is energized until the engine is stopped, but at least for the duration of
Stop Time (page 258). If the Stop Time (page 258) has elapsed and the engine has still not stopped, the
STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 684) is de-energized for 5 s and then energized again for Stop Time (page 258).This
is repeated until the engine is stopped.
The output Ignition (page 667) is continuously energized until the engine is stopped.
Stopped Gen-set evaluation

The Gen-set is considered as stopped when all of following conditions are valid:
The engine speed is lower than 2 RPM.
The generator voltage in all phases is lower than 10 V.
None of the Additional running engine indications (page 120) signals is active.
5.5.10 Gen-set operation states

Engine state machine
Autotest during controller power on.

Note: Sometimes controller stays in Init mode after FW upgrade. It means that there
Init
are new parameters which should be checked by user. It is possible to disable this
control via InteliConfig.
Gen-set is not ready to start.
Not ready
Example: When shutdown alarm is active or unit is in OFF mode.
Ready Gen-set is ready to run.
Prestart sequence in process, PRESTART (PAGE 677) output is active.
Prestart
Example: Usually used for preheating or processes executed prior Gen-set start.
Cranking Engine is cranking, STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) or STARTER 2 (PAGE 683) output is active.
Pause Pause between start attempts.
Starting Starting speed is reached and the Idle timer is running.
Running Gen-set is running at nominal speed.
Loaded Gen-set is running at nominal speed and GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 660) is active.
Cooling Gen-set is cooling before stop.
Stop.
Stop
Example: Automatic or manual stop command was issued, engine is stopping.
Shutdown Shut-down alarm activated.

Gas engine - ventilation of unburned fuel when stop command comes during
Ventil
cranking with gas
Gas engine - ventilation of unburned fuel after unsuccessful start attempt or after
SDVentil
shutdown stop.
EMERGENCY MAN (PAGE 619) Gen-set operation.
Example: Used for bypass the controller and engine manual start.
EmergMan
Controller mode, where the LBI EMERGENCY MAN (PAGE 619) is activated. All control
functions are stopped
Engine started conditions

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 245) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 246) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 627) is in logical 0 or
D+ terminal active (reached D+ Threshold (page 262) of supply voltage) for minimum 1 s or
Generator voltage > 25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 227) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 227)
(any phase)
Note: Any of these condition will disconnect starter of the engine, however for transition to next state RPM
needs to be higher than Starting RPM (page 245).
Engine running conditions

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 245) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 246) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 627) is in logical 0 or
Generator voltage > 25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 227)
Still engine conditions

Engine speed (RPM) < Starting RPM (page 245) and
Oil pressure < Starting Oil Pressure (page 246) and
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 627) is in logical 1 and
Generator voltage < 50 V (all phases)
Note: When the engine was running before and all above conditions are fulfilled, additional 2 s delay is
necessary to confirm "still engine".
When any engine running conditions are observed in still engine, then the Wrn Stop Fail (page 737) is
activated with the following delays:
For generator voltage from 10 V to < 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
For generator voltage > 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 200 ms
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 246), Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 627) is in logical 0, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
For detected RPM, there is no delay.

Stop engine conditions
If no engine running conditions are validated, then the controller will wait extra 12 s before leaving the
Machine Stop state and releasing the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 684) output.
Image 5.17 Engine stops in Stop Time (page 258)
If the total stopping time will exceed setpoint Stop Time (page 258) then the Wrn Stop Fail (page 737) and
binary outputs for stopping are activated. The controller will continuously try to stop the engine.
Image 5.18 Engine stops after first Stop Time (page 258)
Electric state machine
Mains is present and all its values are within limits.

MainsOper
Example: MCB is closed, GCB is opened
MainsFlt Mains fails
Island operation
IslOper
Example: MCB is opened, GCB is closed

MainsRet Mains recover
BrksOff GCB, MCB opened
5.5.11 Additional running engine indications

It is helpful to have information other than speed (RPM), whether the engine is rotating or not, especially if
RPM is measured from the generator frequency instead of magnetic pickup. The generator frequency
measurement can be unreliable at very low speeds and/or may have a delayed reaction to sudden and big
changes (i.e. in the moment that the engine has just started…).
The following conditions are evaluated as additional running engine indication:
Voltage on the D+ input is higher than the D+ Threshold (page 262) of battery voltage. Connect this input
to the D+ (L) terminal of the charging alternator and enable the D+ function by the setpoint D+ Threshold
(page 262). If D+ terminal is not available, leave the input unconnected and disable the function.
The pickup is not used and frequency is not detected on the pickup input. Connect the pickup input to the
W terminal of the charging alternator if you do not use pickup and the W terminal is available. If not, leave
the input unconnected.
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 246) setpoint. The oil pressure is evaluated from the analog
input or from the ECU if an ECU is configured.
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 627) is in logical 0.
At least one phase of generator voltage is >25 % of nominal voltage.
These signals are used during start for powering down the starter motor even if no RPM is measured. These
signals are used during stop in order to evaluate if the engine has really stopped.
5.5.12 RPM Measurement

InteliLite 4 offers multiple methods to measure the RPM of the engine. Please pay close attention during
configuration to ensure that you will use correct method.
Measuring using dedicated RPM input

Connect magnetic pick-up sensor to dedicated input Magnetic pick-up (page 50). Received data are
converted using setpoint Gear Teeth (page 231).
Measuring from generator frequency

RPM is calculated from generator frequency which is received from Generator Voltage L1-N (page 563). To
enable this measurement method adjust setpoint Gear Teeth (page 231) to Fgen->RPM. The calculation is
based on expectation of 4 pole alternator. Following formula is used:

5.5.13 Multi ECU
InteliLite 4 allows you to configure, monitor and control multiple Electronic Control Units (ECUs), such as
Engine Control Units, AVR modules, Breakers and Modbus modules which are connected to the CAN. At this
moment there are 4 ECU slots available, each slot can contain one ECU which settings can be separately
configured.
In order to ensure proper functionality you shall pay extra attention to settings ECU address and
Controller address. ECU address has to be always unique whereas Controller address is required to be set to
same value as Subgroup: Controller Address (page 240) of the Controller Unit that sends commands
frames to this ECU.
Moreover you can now also modify I/O Configuration and recognized Fault Codes.
Note: Module name effects name of the value screen shown on the controller.
Controller objects related to ECU

ECU
LBI LBO Alarm
Slot
ECU COMMUNICATION FAIL Wrn ECU 1 Comm Fail
1 ECU 1 COMM FAIL (PAGE 649)
BLOCK 1 (PAGE 616) (page 730)
ECU COMMUNICATION FAIL Wrn ECU 2 Comm Fail
2 ECU 2 COMM FAIL (PAGE 650)
BLOCK 2 (PAGE 616) (page 730)
For each ECU there is LBO which gets activated when communication issue with respective ECU is detected.
For easier detection whether all configured ECUs are communicating, there is LBO ECU COMM OK (PAGE
650). During detected communication issue an alarm is issued for respective ECU. This alarm and all user
protections related to respective ECU can be suppressed by appropriate LBI. To suppress all protections of

all ECUs use LBI ECU COMMUNICATION FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 616). See table above to find relative LBO, LBI
and alarm to respective ECU slot.
All protections which evaluation depends on values from the ECU with communication error are blocked in
order to prevent showing of invalid protections in the Alarm list.
5.5.14 History log

The history log is an area in the controller’s non-volatile memory that records "snapshots" of the system at
moments when important events occur. The history log is important especially for diagnostics of failures and
problems. When the history file is full, the oldest records are removed.
Each record has the same structure and contains:
The event which caused the record (e.g. "Overspeed alarm" or "GCB closed")
The date and time when it was recorded
All important data values such as RPM, kW, voltages, etc. from the moment that the event occurred.
Note: It is possible to clear history on users demand. To execute history log clearing, navigate to History
page in InteliConfig and select the option ClearHistory.
Record structure
Name Abbreviation Description

Row number (0 corresponds to the last record, -1 to the previous
Number No.
one, etc.)
Reason for history record (any event or alarm related to the gen-
Reason Reason
set
Time Time Time
Date Date Date
RPM RPM Engine rotations per minute
Power Pwr Generator active power
Reactive power Q Generator reactive power
Power Factor PF Generator power factor
Load Character LChr Generator load character
Generator
Gfrq Generator Frequency
Frequency
Generator Voltage Vg1 Generator voltage Ph1
Generator Current Ig1 Generator current Ph1

Mains Frequency Mfrq Mains Frequency
Mains Voltage Vm1 Mains voltage Ph1
Mains Current IL1 Mains current Ph1
Voltage Battery VBat Voltage of battery
Analog Input 1 Ain1 Analog input 1
Binary Inputs BIN Controller binary inputs
E-Stop E-Stop State of dedicated E-Stop input
Binary Outputs BOUT Controller binary outputs
Controller Mode Mode Controller mode
Note: When some setpoint is changed, its number of the communication object is written in the history log.
5.5.15 Breaker control

The following power switches are controlled by the controller:
The generator circuit breaker or contactor – GCB
The Mains circuit breaker or contactor – MCB
It is possible to use either a motorized circuit breaker or contactor. Below is a list of available control outputs
that should fit all types of contactors or breakers. The following rules must be followed to when designing the
wiring of power switches:
The control outputs must be configured and wiring of the power switches must be provided in such a way,
that the controller has full control over the breakers – i.e. the controller can open and close the breaker at
any time.
The breaker must respond within max. 5 seconds to a close and open command. Special attention should
be paid to opening of motorized circuit breakers, as it could take more than 5 seconds on some types. In
such cases it is necessary to use an undervoltage coil for fast opening.
After opening the breaker, there is an internal delay before closing the breaker. Delay is 6 seconds –
5 seconds for OFF coil and 1 second for UV coil. After these 6 seconds, breaker can be closed again.
There is no delay when opening a breaker.

Breaker control outputs
An output for control of a contactor. Its state represents the breaker position requested
Close/Open by the controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command,
otherwise an alarm is issued.
An output giving a 5 second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed. The
ON coil
output is intended for control of close coils of circuit breakers.
An output giving a pulse in the moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts
OFF coil until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5 seconds. The output is intended for
control of open coils of circuit breakers.
The GCB UV coil output is active the whole time the Gen-set is running (not in idle or
cooling). The MCB UV coil output is active when the controller is switched on. The output
UV coil
is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the breaker has to be switched off.
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coils of circuit breakers.
Image 5.19 Breaker control outputs
MCB special requirements

If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it is recommended that the wiring be provided in such a way
that the contactor will be normally closed and will open if the logical binary output MCB CLOSE/OPEN
(PAGE 671) is activated. This behavior is called "negative logic" and can be adjusted by the setpoint MCB
Logic (page 308). The negative logic will prevent accidental opening of the MCB when the controller is
switched off.
If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it will open itself immediately after the mains have failed,
because it will lose power to the coil. That is why the following adjustment is necessary to prevent
triggering the Wrn MCB Fail (page 739) alarm: MCB Opens On (page 310) = Mains Fail, Mains
Undervoltage Delay (page 303) ≤1.
If a 230 V motor driven circuit breaker is used on the MCB position and an undervoltage coil is not fitted, it
is not possible to open the breaker after the mains have failed, because there is no power for the motor

drive until the Gen-set is started and providing voltage. Adjusting the setpoint MCB Opens On (page
310) = Gen Run will prevent triggering the Wrn MCB Fail (page 739) alarm.
Breaker failure detection

Breaker fail detection is based on binary output breaker close/open comparing with binary input breaker
feedback.
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure breaker feedback to use this function.
IMPORTANT: If a breaker feedback is configured, it will be required all the time. Otherwise alarms
will be issued.
IMPORTANT: Also it is possible to use breakers without feedbacks. In this case there is no check
of breaker real state.
There are three different time delays for breaker failure detection – see following diagrams.
When binary output breaker close/open is in steady state and breaker feedback is changed the breaker
failure is detected immediately (no delay).
Image 5.20 Breaker failure – breaker close/open in steady position – open
Image 5.21 Breaker failure – breaker close/open in steady position – close
When binary output breaker close/open opens there is 5 sec delay for breaker failure detection.

Image 5.22 Breaker failure – breaker close/open opens
When binary output breaker close/open closes there is 5 sec delay for breaker failure detection.
Image 5.23 Breaker failure – breaker close/open closes
5.5.16 Protections
Fixed Protections
Fixed protections are built in protections for Generator, Engine, Mains or for other functionalities (battery
voltage, fuel theft, D+, etc…). Their purpose is to inform or perform actions when the malfunction is detected.

Fixed Protection types
Alarm Fault Reset LBO Horn LBO Alarm Action: Action: Gen- SD Override
Name Level Abbreviation History Common LBO
List needed activation activation CB open set stop blocking
History Record Only 1 Hst - - - - - - - -
Alarm List Indication 1 ALI - - - - - - - -
Alarmlist indication +
1 AHI - - - - - - -
history record
AL COMMON WRN
Warning 1 Wrn - - -
(PAGE 643)
AL COMMON SD
Shutdown 2 Sd
(PAGE 642)
Breaker Open & Cool AL COMMON BOC
2 BOC
Down (PAGE 642)
Shutdown Override 2 Sd -

Protection blocking
Engine and generator fixed protections are blocked during starting phases or Ready and Stop states. They
become unblocked once Maximal Stabilization Time (page 256) has elapsed or GCB is closed whichever
happens first.
Exceptions are:
Overspeed protection which has two limits defined via setpoints Overspeed Sd (page 263) and Starting
Overspeed Sd (page 263). Starting Overspeed limit is considered in the starting phase till Starting
Overspeed Time elapses. This time starts to count once the RPM exceeds the value of Starting RPM
(page 245).
E-Stop and Emergency stop
The other way fixed protections can be blocked is by active LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633).
Note: LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633) (Shutdown Override) does not block evaluation of fixed protection
conditions and their visualization. They are recorded into alarm list or history. It only blocks their actions.
Shutdown Override blocks all level 2 (Sd, BOC) fixed protection. It does not block level 1 (Wrn, AHI, Hist) or
protection of type Sd Override.
Some generators or engine protections have an option to DISABLE the protection.

The setting is done by using the setpoint which is associated to the fixed protection. Each setpoint offers
these options.
Setpoint options
Options Description
Enable Protection is enabled
Disable Protection is blocked
ExtDisable Disabling of the protection can be forced by LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 628)
Generator and engine protections lists
Generator protections
Setpoint for protection ON / OFF Alarms / Protection name
Always active BOC Short Circuit (page 778)
IDMT Overcurrent Protection (page
BOC Overcurrent IDMT (page 778)
Current 291)
Current Unbalance Protection (page
BOC Current Unbalance (page 777)
292)
Generator Frequency Protection BOC Generator Overfrequency (page
(page 293) 772)
Frequency
Generator Frequency Protection BOC Generator Underfrequency (page
(page 293) 773)

Setpoint for protection ON / OFF Alarms / Protection name
Always active ALI Gen Ph L1 Inverted (page 750)
Others ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite (page
Always active
751)
Earth Fault Current Protection (page
Sd Earth Fault Current (page 778)
531)
Overload Protection (page 291) BOC Overload (page 778)
Power
Reverse Power Protection (page 294) BOC Reverse Power (page 777)
Sd Generator L1 Overvoltage (page 765)
Sd Generator L1L2 Overvoltage (page
766)
766)
767)
BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage (page
Generator <> Voltage Protection
767)
(page 292)
Voltage 767)
767)
BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage (page
768)
768)
768)
BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N (page
Voltage Unbalance Protection (page 772)
293) BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph
(page 772)
Engine protections
Protection Enable / Disable Alarms / Protection name
Always active Sd Overspeed (page 763)
Speed
Underspeed Protection (page 294) Sd Underspeed (page 764)

Mains protections
Alarms / Protection name
Mains Overfrequency (page 752)
Frequency
Mains Underfrequency (page 752)
ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted (page 751)
Others
ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite (page 751)
MP Mains L1 Overvoltage (page 773)
MP Mains L1 Undervoltage (page 773)
MP Mains L2 Undervoltage (page 774)
MP Mains L1L2 Overvoltage (page 774)
Voltage
MP Mains L1L2 Undervoltage (page 775)
Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-n (page 751)
Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-ph (page 752)
User Protections
InteliLite 4 allows users to configure their own protections to any analog input or binary input/output. Only one
protection of 1st level and/or one protection of 2nd level can be configured on logical binary input/output.
More than one protection can be configured on analog input. Max simultaneous number of configured user
protections is 64.
Source upon which the protection is configured can be selected. It can be any analog value or binary state.
Source
Analog values Binary states
Binary inputs
Analog inputs
Controller, Modules, ECU
Controller, Modules
Binary outputs
Values
PLC
ECU, Generator, Mains, others
Protection states
Statistics
LBOs

Protection activation
Type Name of activation Description
Over Limit Protection is activated if value is over limit.
Over Limit + Fls Protection is activated if value is over limit or in a fault state.
Analog Under Limit Protection is activated if value is under limit.
Under Limit + Fls Protection is activated if value is under limit or in a fault state.
Fls only Protection is activated if value is in a fault state.
True Protection is activated if value is Logical 1.
TrueOrFls Protection is activated if value is Logical 1 or in a fault state.
Binary
False Protection is activated if value is Logical 0.
FalseOrFls Protection is activated if value is Logical 0 or in a fault state.

User Protection types
Alarm Fault Reset LBO Horn LBO Alarm Action: Action: Gen- SD Override
Name Level Abbreviation History Common LBO
List needed activation activation CB open set stop blocking
History Record Only 1 Hst - - - - - - - -
Alarm List Indication 1 ALI - - - - - - - -
Alarmlist indication +
1 AHI - - - - - - -
history record
AL COMMON WRN
Warning 1 Wrn - - -
(PAGE 643)
AL COMMON SD
Shutdown 2 Sd
(PAGE 642)
Breaker Open & Cool AL COMMON BOC
2 BOC
Down (PAGE 642)
Shutdown Override 2 Sd -

Protection blocking
It is possible to configure one Protection Blocking to any User Protections (page 130). This function is used
to block certain protections when their function is unwanted or meaningless. Each user protection has an
option to set the blocking condition.
Protection blocking
Block Type Description
All the time The protection is not blocked. It can be blocked only by LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633).
Run Only The protection is blocked depending on engine state and time defined by setpoint Run
Block Delay Only Block Delay (page 257). It can also be blocked by LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633).
The protection is blocked by LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 628) or by LBI SD
Force Block
OVERRIDE (PAGE 633).
The protection is blocked depending on engine state. It is unblocked once Maximal
Electrical
Stabilization Time (page 256) is elapsed or GCB is closed. It can also be blocked by LBI
Protection
SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633).
Note: LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633) (Shutdown Override) does not block evaluation of user protection
conditions and their visualization. They are recorded into alarm list or history. It only blocks their actions.
Shutdown Override blocks all level 2 (Sd,BOC) protection. It does not block level 1 (Wrn, AHI, Hist) or
protection of type SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633).
Image 5.24 Run only block delay and electrical protection blocking
History record
Always – History is recorded all the time.
Once – History is recorded only once after fault reset.
Note: Every User protection is evaluated with period 0.1 s.

Configuration of protections in InteliConfig
Control tab → Controller configuration → Protections tab → Analog / Binary protections
Select the desired protections to be configured (Analog protections / Binary protections).
Add protection by clicking on the icon .
Delete selected protection by clicking on the icon .
Edit selected protection by clicking on the icon .
Protection states
Protection states are states of fixed and user protections. These states can be configured as binary output or
used in PLC logic.
Fixed protection states

Important Fixed Protections (page 126) have a protection state. The protection state is (usually) named the
same as the alarm. Fixed protection states are in a group of 32 values.
Protection states groups:
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 589)
User protections states

During the Configuration of protections in InteliConfig (page 134), you can decide whether you want to
add user protection state for the protection. The name is the same as the alarm's message.
User protection states are in a group of 32 values.
Note: Group of User protection states is showed only when there is at least 1 protection state in it.
Protection states group:

USER PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 590)
Alarm management
The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. Level 1 – yellow alarm – is a pre-critical alarm that is only
informative and does not take any action regarding Gen-set control. Level 2 – red alarm – represents a critical
situation, where an action must be taken to prevent damage of the Gen-set or technology.

Analog input alarm evaluation principle
Image 5.25 Analog input alarm evaluation principle
Alarm handling
There are four different alarm categories regarding the period when the alarms are evaluated. The category is
selectable for alarms assigned to binary/analog inputs and fixed for built-in alarms. The categories are the
following:
The alarm is evaluated all the time the controller is switched on.
The alarm is evaluated only when the engine is running. This type should be used for e.g. oil pressure.
These alarms begin to be evaluated after the engine has been started with the delay given by the setpoint
Run Only Block Delay (page 257).
The alarm is evaluated only when the generator is excited. These alarms begin to be evaluated after the
engine has been started and Maximal Stabilization Time (page 256) has elapsed or the GCB has been
closed. They remain evaluated until cooling has finished. Only Generator under/overvoltage, Generator
voltage unbalance and Generator under/overfrequency belong to this category. This category is not
configurable to binary and analog input alarms.
The alarm is evaluated only when LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 628) is not active.
If an alarm is being evaluated and the appropriate alarm condition is fulfilled, the delay of evaluation will start
to run. The delay is adjustable by a setpoint (in the case of built-in alarms, analog input alarms) or is adjusted
via configuration window in InteliConfig (in the case of binary input alarms). If the conditions persist, the alarm
will activate. The alarm will not activate if the condition is dismissed while the delay is still running.
After pressing the Fault reset button or activating the binary input FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 620), all active
alarms change to confirmed state. Confirmed alarms will disappear from the Alarm list as soon as the
respective condition dismisses. If the condition is dismissed before acknowledging the alarm, the alarm will
remain in the Alarm list as Inactive.
Note: The input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633) can be used for temporary disabling of red alarms to shutdown the
engine. This input may be used in situations where providing the power is extremely important – e.g. if the
Gen-set drives pumps for fire extinguishers (sprinklers).

Alarm states
An alarm can have the following states:
Active alarm: the alarm condition persists, alarm delay has elapsed.
Inactive alarm: the alarm condition has disappeared, but the alarm has not been confirmed.
Confirmed alarm: the alarm condition persists, but the alarm has already been confirmed.
Image 5.26 Alarm List
Alarm types – Level 1

The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. This alarm does not cause any actions regarding the gen-set control.
History record only (Hst)

The event is recorded into the history. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 666) and ALARM (PAGE 645)) are
not activated.
Alarm list indication (ALI)

The event is only indicated in the Alarmlist. It disappears for the alarmist automatically as soon as the cause
disappears. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 666) and ALARM (PAGE 645)) are not activated.
Alarm list indication + History record (AHI)

The alarm appears in the Alarm list and is recorded into the history log.
Warning (Wrn)
The alarm appears in the Alarm list and is recorded into the history log. Activates the output AL COMMON WRN
(PAGE 643) as well as the standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 666) and ALARM (PAGE 645)).
Alarm types – Level 2

The level 2 alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.
Note: It is not possible to start the engine if any red level protection is active or not confirmed.
IMPORTANT: The Gen-set can start by itself after acknowledging the alarms if there is no longer
an active red alarm and the controller is in AUTO or TEST mode!
Breaker open and cool down (BOC)

The event appears in the Alarm list and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate opening of the
GCB and then the standard stop sequence with cooling follows. The Gen-set cannot be started again while
there is a BOC alarm in the Alarm list. Activates the output AL COMMON BOC (PAGE 642) as well as the
standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 666) and ALARM (PAGE 645)).

IMPORTANT: In case there is no feedback from breakers configured on physical binary input or
in PLC, Breaker open and cool down alarm will be replaced by shutdown alarm type.
Shutdown (Sd)
The alarm appears in the Alarm list and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate stop of the Gen-
set without cooling phase. Also GCB breaker will open. The Gen-set cannot be started again while there is a
shutdown alarm in the Alarm list. Activates the output AL COMMON SD (PAGE 642) as well as the standard
alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 666) and ALARM (PAGE 645)).
Shutdown override
nd
If the Logical binary input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633) is closed, all 2 level protections are disabled to allow the
Gen-set run in an emergency situation, e.g. sprinkler devices power supply.
All protections are shown in Alarmlist and recorded into History, but the controller does not stop the engine
because of them. If the input is deactivated and some protections are still active or not yet reset, the controller
starts to take these protections into account and consequently stops the engine.
nd
All 2 level protections are locked out, except of these:
Emergency stop
Overspeed
Underspeed
Binary and analog protections configured as Sd override type. In fact this protection type means
"Unoverridable shutdown", i.e. it works the same way as standard shutdown protection, however it cannot
be overridden (blocked) by the SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633) input.
Sensor failure detection (FLS)

If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor failure will be detected and a
sensor failure message will appear in the Alarm list (page 138). The valid range is defined by the far left (RL)
and far right (RH) points of the sensor characteristic ±12.5 % from RH-RL.
Note: Sometimes there can be problem with lower limit of valid range which can be counted as negative
number. In this case the lower limit is set as one half of the RL point of the sensor curve characteristic.

Image 5.27 Sensor failure detection principle
Remote alarm messaging

If the communication plug-in module is connected to the controller, the controller can send SMS messagesor
emails at the moment when a new alarm appears in the Alarm list (page 138) or new event is written in the
History log (page 122). The message will contain a copy of the Alarm list (page 138) or reasons from the
History log (page 122). To enable this function first to check the controller internet connection. Then adjust
setpoints Event Message (page 528), Wrn Message (page 529), BOC Message (page 527) and Sd
Message (page 529) to ON. Also enter a valid GSM phone number or email address to the setpoints.
The list of all supported terminals shows the table below:
Event Warning BOC Shutdown Event Warning BOC Shutdown

Terminal
SMS SMS SMS SMS email email email email
CM-
no no no no no no no no
RS232-485
CM3-
no no no no yes yes yes yes
Ethernet
CM2-4G-
yes yes yes yes yes* yes* yes* yes*
GPS
Note: * Only with enabled Internet Connection (page 489).
Alarm list
Alarm list is a container of active and inactive alarms. It will appear automatically on the controller display, if a
new alarm occurs, or can be displayed manually from the display menu.
Active alarms are shown as inverted, not yet confirmed alarms are marked with asterisk before them.
Alarm list contains three types of alarms:
Controller built-in alarms
User configured alarms on binary or analog inputs

ECU alarms
Controller built-in alarms

An alarm message in the Alarm list begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC).
Then the alarm name follows. In some cases the prefix can be omitted.
User configured alarms

An alarm message in the Alarm list begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC).
Alarm type is selected by user during the configuration of binary or analog user protection. Then the alarm
name follows, which can be adjusted by user during the configuration.
ECU alarms
The ECU alarms are received from the ECU. The alarms are represented by the Diagnostic Trouble Code,
which contains information about the subsystem where the alarm occurred, the alarm type and the alarm
occurrence counter.
The most common fault codes are translated into text form. Other fault codes are displayed as a numeric
code and the engine fault codes list must be used to determine the reason.
Built-in alarms
Protection
Events specification Description
type
Battery voltage is out of limits given by Battery Overvoltage
Wrn Battery Overvoltage WRN
(page 273) setpoint.
Wrn Battery Battery voltage is out of limits given by Battery
WRN
Undervoltage Undervoltage (page 272) setpoint.
If the controller switches off during starting sequence (
STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) output is active) it doesn't try to start
Sd Battery Flat SD
again and activates this protection (controller assumes bad
battery condition).
Gen-set start failed. All crank attempts were tried without
Sd Start Fail SD
success.
BOC Gen Lx
Undervoltage The generator voltage is out of limits given by Generator
SD
Undervoltage BOC (page 286) and Generator
Sd Gen Lx Overvoltage BOC
Overvoltage Sd (page 285) setpoints.
(where x=1,2,3)
The generator voltage is unbalanced more than the value of
BOC Gen V Unbalance BOC
Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 287) setpoint.
The generator frequency is out of limits given by Generator
BOC Gen >, <Frequency BOC Overfrequency BOC (page 288) and Generator
Underfrequency BOC (page 289) setpoints.
The generator current is unbalanced more than the value of
BOC Current Unbalance BOC
Current Unbalance BOC (page 284) setpoint.
Generator current exceeds the limit for IDMT protection given
BOC Current IDMT BOC by Nominal Current (page 223) and IDMT Overcurrent
Delay (page 283) setpoints.

Protection
type
The load is greater than the value given by Overload BOC
BOC Overload BOC
(page 281) setpoint.
This alarm is activated when Earth Fault value exceeds Earth
Sd Earth Fault SD Fault Sd (page 533) limit for at least Earth Fault Delay
(page 532) period.
The protection comes active if the speed is greater than
Sd Overspeed SD
Overspeed Sd (page 263) setpoint.
During starting of the engine when the RPM reach the value
of Starting RPM (page 245) setpoint the starter is switched
off and the speed of the engine can drop under Starting RPM
Sd Underspeed SD
(page 245) again. Then the Underspeed protection is active.
Protection evaluation starts 5 seconds after reaching
Starting RPM (page 245).
If the input Emergency Stop is active shutdown is
Emergency Stop SD
immediately activated.
If the input E-Stop is active shutdown is immediately
E-Stop SD
activated.
GCB Fail SD Failure of generator circuit breaker.
MCB Fail WRN Failure of mains circuit breaker.
Failure of magnetic pick-up sensor for speed measurement.
This alarm appears, if starter was disengaged for other
Sd RPM Measurement reason than over-crossing Starting RPM (page 245) (like oil
SD
Fail pressure or D+) and at the end of timer Maximum Cranking
Time (page 244) there are no RPMs > Starting RPM (page
245) detected.
Gen-set stop failed. See description at Gen-set Operation
Wrn Stop Fail WRN
States chapter.
Charge Alternator Fail WRN Failure of alternator for charging the battery.
Wrn Override All Sd WRN The protection is active if the output Sd Override is active.
ALI Gen Ph-Rotation Gen-set voltage phases are not wired correctly. GCB closing
ALI
Opposite is prohibited by controller.
ALI Mains Ph-Rotation Mains voltage phases are not wired correctly. GCB closing is
ALI
Opposite prohibited by controller.
The reverse power is higher than limit adjusted via setpoint
BOC Reverse Power BOC
Reverse Power Level (page 290).

Protection
type
MP Mains Lx >V The mains voltage is out of limits given by Mains
MP Mains Lx <V MP Undervoltage (page 301) and Mains Overvoltage (page
(where x=1,2,3) 299) setpoints.
Mains Voltage The mains voltage is unbalanced more than the value of
MP
Unbalance Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 303) setpoint.
The mains frequency is out of limits given by Mains
Mains >, <Frequency MP Overfrequency (page 304) and Mains Underfrequency
(page 306) setpoints.
Note: This table does not contain all alarms in the controller. It is only a list of the most common alarms.
5.5.17 Maintenance Timers

Maintenance timer contains two types of timers – Maintenance Timer RunHours and Maintenance Timer
xy Interval.
Maintenance Timer RunHours is based on engine running hours and it only counts down when engine
is running. When engine runs value Maintenance Timer RunHours counts down, but setpoint
Maintenance Timer RunHours will not change.
Maintenance Timer Interval is set in months. Specific date is calculated as the setpoint is set. E.g. when
the timer is set to 6 months on June 10th, corresponding Maintenance Timer Interval value is set to the
number of days remaining to December 10th, the timer count down is done in days and alarm is issued on
December 10th. The setpoint value does not change, as the remaining days count down is done.
Timers can be reset by changing the corresponding setpoint value (it does not have to be a different value,
editing it and confirming original value is enough)
When either of the timers elapse, appropriate LBO Maintenance will be activated and stays active until
timers are reset.
Note: For more information see Group: Maintenance Timers on page 276.
5.5.18 Exercise timers

The exercise (general-purpose) timers in controller are intended for scheduling of any operations such as
periodic tests of the Gen-set, scheduled transfer of the load to the Gen-set prior to an expected disconnection
of the mains etc.

Related setpoints for timer 1 are:
Timer 1 Function (page 347) Timer 1 Day (page 351)
Timer 1 Repetition (page 349) Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 351)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 348) Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 351)
Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 349) Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 352)
Timer 1 Duration (page 349) Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 353)
Timer 1 Repeated (page 350) Timer 1 Weekends (page 354)
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 350) Timer 1 Setup (page 348)
There are up to 16 Timers available in the InteliLite 4. For more information see Group: Scheduler on page
343.
Available modes of each timer:

This is a single shot mode. The timer will be activated only once at preset date/time for
Once
preset duration.
The timer is activated every "x-th" day. The day period "x" is adjustable. Weekends can be
Daily excluded. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd day excluding Saturdays and
Sundays.
The timer is activated every "x-th" week on selected weekdays. The week period "x" is
Weekly
adjustable. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd week on Monday and Friday.
The timer is activated every "x-th" month on the selected day. The requested day can be
Monthly selected either as "y-th" day in the month or as "y-th" weekday in the month. E.g. the timer
can be adjusted to every 1st month on 1st Tuesday.
Short The timer is repeated with adjusted period (hh:mm). The timer duration is included in the
period period.
Once mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1
Setup.
Note: First, the timer functions must be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 347).

Image 5.28 Once mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Once. In timer settings adjust date and time of occurrence of timer. Also adjust the
duration of timer.
Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 347)
setpoint. Then go to Timer 1 Setup and press the Enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 349) setpoint
select Once mode. Then adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 348), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page
349) and Timer 1 Duration (page 349).
Note: Use the Left and the Right buttons to move between timer setpoints.
Daily mode
Setup.

Image 5.29 Daily mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Daily. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Then select the xth day of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 353)) and behavior of timer on weekends (Timer 1 Weekends (page 354)).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be activated again every 3rd day at 12:00 for 1 hour including weekends.

select Repeated mode. Then adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 348), Timer 1 First Occur. Time
(page 349) and Timer 1 Duration (page 349). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 350) select Daily and
adjust Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 353) (xth day of repetition) and Timer 1 Weekends (page 354)
(behavior of timer on weekends).
Weekly mode
Setup.

Image 5.30 Weekly mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Weekly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Then select the xth week of
repetition (Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 353)) and days when timer should be active (Timer 1 Day (page
351)).
be again activated every 2nd week on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

(page 349) and Timer 1 Duration (page 349). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 350) select Weekly and
adjust Timer 1 Day (page 351) (days when timer should be active) and Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 353)
(xth week of repetition).
Monthly mode
Setup.

There are two types of monthly repetition. The first is based on repeating one day in month.
Image 5.31 Monthly mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Then select the type of monthly
repetition and the xth day of repetition (Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 351)). Than select the xth
month of repetition.
be activated again every 2nd day in 2nd month at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.
Image 5.32 Monthly mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Then select the type of monthly
repetition, the xth week of repetition and days in week. Than select the xth month of repetition.
be activated again every 2nd week in 2nd month on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

There are two types of monthly repetition. The first is based on repeating one day in month.
(page 349) and Timer 1 Duration (page 349). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 350) select Monthly and
adjust type of monthly repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 350), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 353)
(xth month of repetition) and Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 351) (concrete day in repeated months).
The second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating on certain days of the week in a month.
select Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 348), Timer 1 First Occur. Time
(page 349) and Timer 1 Duration (page 349). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 350) select Monthly and
adjust type of monthly repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 350), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 353)
(xth month of repetition), Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 351) (days in week when timer is active)
and Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 352) (concrete week in repeated months).

Short period mode
Setup.
Image 5.33 Short period mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Short period. In timer settings adjust date and time of
first occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Then select the interval of
repetition (shorter than 1 day).
be activated again every 4th hour for 1 hour.

(page 349) and Timer 1 Duration (page 349). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 350), select Short
Period and adjust Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 353) (interval of repetition).
5.5.19 Rental Timers

In controller, there are two timers which are designed like rental timers. Rental timers will stop the Gen-set
after their elapse.

How to set-up rental timer
This is a short guide for settings of rental timers. Please see following few steps regarding how to set up rental
timers:
Choose the type of rental timer
Rental Timer 1 (page 474) (based on engine running hours)
Rental Timer 2 (page 476) (based on date)
Adjust the length of chosen timer
Adjust the warning for user Rental Timer 1 Wrn (page 476) or Rental Timer 2 Wrn (page 478) (warning
will be displayed in Alarm list before elapsing of rental timer)
Adjust Rental Timer BOC (page 478) – common for both timers (if engine is still running after rental timer
counts down, this timer will start tocount down. After the time has elapsed, the Gen-set will be cooled
down and stop).
5.5.20 Pulse Counters

InteliLite 4 has 2 internal counters. Value of the each pulse counter is increased by one step whenever the
number of pulses counted reaches the value of setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse. Pulse counters are able to
count reliably pulses longer than 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF.
Conversion setpoint Value Binary Input

Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 (page Pulse Counter 1 (page PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE
274) 583) 628)
Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 (page Pulse Counter 2 (page PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE
274) 583) 629)
Note: Value of the internal counters remains even if the controller is unplugged from power.
Note: Counter counts leading edges.
5.5.21 Analog switches

There are logical analog function dedicated for analog switches. Each analog switch has setpoints for level
ON and level OFF and logical binary output.
Analog switch Setpoints Binary output

AIN Switch01 On (page 336)
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 692) AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 640)
AIN Switch01 Off (page 337)
The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints.

Image 5.34 Principle of analog switch
5.5.22 Voltage phase sequence detection

The controller detects phase sequence voltage terminals. This protection is important after controller
installation to avoid wrong voltage phase connection. The phase sequence is adjusted via setpoint Phase
Rotation (page 238). When the phases are connected in different order (e.g. L1,L3,L2 or L2,L1,L3) the
following alarms are detected:
ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite (page 751)
ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite (page 751)
5.5.23 Load shedding

The Load shedding is the controlled disconnection of less important load groups (circuits) when the object
consumption is too high.
Load shedding stages

The Load Shedding function consists of 5 stages which are numbered 1-5. Stages are disconnected in
ascending order up to the last configured stage. Reconnecting of stages is in descending order and starts
with higher configured stage. A stage is considered configured when the respective Load Shedding Output is
configured. Highest activated load shedding stage is stored in value Load Shedding Status (page 586).
Load shedding outputs

Stage LBO
Stage 1 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE 669)
How the Load shedding controls the Load shedding outputs

The load shedding function is active in all controller modes except OFF.
Load shedding has 5 steps and each step is linked with its own binary output, LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE
669), LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 2 (PAGE 669), LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 3 (PAGE 669), LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 4
(PAGE 670) and LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 5 (PAGE 670).
The Load shedding outputs can be activated one by one in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. The conditions for activation
are defined by setpoints Load Shedding Level (page 315) and Load Shedding Delay (page 316).

The Load shedding outputs are deactivated one by one according to the conditions given by the setpoints
Load Reconnection Level (page 316), Load Reconnection Delay (page 317), AUTO LOAD
RECONNECTION (PAGE 317).
If manual reconnection of the load is desired the Auto Load Reconnection (page 317) setpoint must be
disabled and the MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE 625) digital input must be configured.
Image 5.35 Load shedding
Image 5.36 Load reconnection
Image 5.37 Load manual reconnection

5.5.24 Dummy Load
This function is meant to prevent engine from running without load, which can in some cases shorten engine
lifespan. It is a way user can set when to load external power bank and when to unload it.
This function can only be active if the setpoint Dummy Load Active (page 318) is set to correct value (Gen
Only) and Engine State is loaded. Dummy Load function is triggered when the conditions mentioned before
are met and Generator power is bellow Dummy Load On (page 318) setpoint level, or above Dummy Load
Off (page 319) level.
Controller supports up to 5 Dummy Load stages. When the function is enabled, controller will always use all
the dummy load stages up to the highest one configured. User can configure any number of these either in
PLC or as LBO, but if just Dummy Load Stage 1 and Dummy Load Stage 5 are configured, Dummy Load On
Delay (page 319) will trigger five times anyway when going from Dummy Load Stage 1 to Dummy Load
Stage 5. Whenever controller checks conditions and Dummy Load function is triggered, it will do the following
(depending on the power level):
Power is bellow level set by Dummy Load On (page 318) – in this case controller will wait for a period of
time specified in Dummy Load On Delay (page 319) before activating DUMMY LOAD STAGE 1 (PAGE
648) LBO if no Dummy Load was active before. Otherwise the original outputs will stay on and controller
will activate next stage of Dummy Load LBO (if DUMMY LOAD STAGE 2 (PAGE 649) was active before,
DUMMY LOAD STAGE 3 (PAGE 649) will be activated and all 5 LBOs DUMMY LOAD STAGE 1 (PAGE 648),
DUMMY LOAD STAGE 2 (PAGE 649), DUMMY LOAD STAGE 3 (PAGE 649) will be active).
Power is above level set by Dummy Load Off (page 319) – in this case controller will wait for time set by
setpoint Dummy Load Off Delay (page 319) before deactivating the highest active stage of Dummy
Load (If DUMMY LOAD STAGE 1 (PAGE 648), DUMMY LOAD STAGE 2 (PAGE 649) are active, controller will
deactivate DUMMY LOAD STAGE 2 (PAGE 649)). If no Dummy Load outputs are active, nothing will happen.
Controller will always work only with Dummy Load Stages up to highest one configured (if you only
configure DUMMY LOAD STAGE 1 (PAGE 648) and DUMMY LOAD STAGE 2 (PAGE 649), there will effectively
only be two stages and if DUMMY LOAD STAGE 1 (PAGE 648) is already active and Dummy Load On
Delay (page 319) timer collapses, DUMMY LOAD STAGE 2 (PAGE 649) will be activated but there will be no
timer for DUMMY LOAD STAGE 3 (PAGE 649).
IMPORTANT: Check how big your load bank is and set the Dummy Load On (page 318) and
Dummy Load Off (page 319) setpoints to correct levels, so that when dummy load is activated ,
power will not immediately go over the Dummy Load Off (page 319).

5.5.25 Sensor curves
Background of the sensor calibration
To correct measuring error of each analog input (pressure, temperature, level, etc.), calibrating constants
should be set. To correct an offset of each analog input, select an option Offset in InteliConfig and set the
appropriate value.
Note: The calibration must be done at the operational point of the analog input (e.g. 80 °C, 4.0 Bar etc..)
Sensor curve HW configuration

InteliLite 4 analog inputs allows you to select Input HW type. Three HW configuration options are available:
0-15 kΩ
0-10 V
0-20 mA passive
Setup controller analog input in this way to use other than the default HW configuration (0-15 kΩ):
1. Start with a sensor configuration and select requested HW configuration
2. Use the adjusted sensor with an analog input and the requested HW configuration will be used with the
analog input automatically. There is no need to use a jumper, configured Input HW type is used by

controller automatically.
Default sensor curves

There are 16 default resistive curves available. The following table provides information on
minimum/maximum values of respective sensors. Actual values especially of temperature curves may differ.
The purpose is to prolong curve to the lower temperature values, so the cold engine will not raise alarm failure
sensor.
Curve Min [Ω] Max [Ω] Units

VDO 10 Bar 10 180 Bar
VDO40-120°C 22 3200 °C
VDOLevel% 0 180 %
General line 1 0 1000 Ω
Note: Curves can be modified via InteliConfig. Some standard curves are also prepared in InteliConfig.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of function Total Fuel Consumption, curve for analog input FUEL
LEVEL (PAGE 694) has to be in percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 269) has to be
adjusted correctly.

5.5.26 Power formats and units
InteliLite 4 allows users to choose from several Power Formats that affect dimensions in which values and
some setpoints are interpreted or adjusted. Power formats and units can be changed with InteliConfig in the
following way. Control tab → Controller configuration → Others tab → Units/Power format
Power formats are available in decimal and non decimal format. Units can be changed to metric or US units.
Units
Metric 20 °C 10.0 bar 11.4 l/h
US 68 °F 145 psi 3.01 gph
Power Format
Identification/Name Power Voltage Current

Small 0.1 kW / kVA / kVAr 1V 1 A
Standard 1 kW / kVA / kVAr 1V 1 A
Range of some setpoints and values is changed significantly when different Power Formats are selected.
Affected setpoint are displayed during selection of power format.
5.5.27 PLC
PLC Editor is a powerful tool which helps you to create your own PLC scheme. It has a graphical interface to
make user interface easy to use.
List of available PLC blocks
PLC block Number of blocks

OR/AND 64
XOR/RS 16
Comparator with hysteresis (Comp Hyst) 8
Comparator with delay (Comp Time) 8
Comp Win 8
Math Fc 4
Timer 2
Delay 32
Counter 4
Hold 2
Decomposer 4
Analog Switch 4

Working with the editor
If the currently opened archive does not contain any PLC program, then an empty drawing is created
automatically when you select the PLC Editor. The procedure of creation of a PLC drawing (program)
contains the following essential steps:
Adjust the sheet to your needs. See Working with sheets (page 156) for more information.
Add PLC blocks into the sheets. See Adding PLC blocks (page 156) for more information.
Define inputs and outputs of the PLC program. See Define inputs and outputs (page 157) for more
information.
Create connections between inputs, blocks and outputs. See Creating wires (page 159) for more
information.
Adjust properties of the blocks. See List of PLC blocks (page 696) for more information about blocks.
Working with sheets

Drag the sheet edges to re-size the sheet according to your needs.
Image 5.38 Adjusting PLC sheet
Adding PLC blocks

Adding a PLC block is simple and intuitive. Follow the procedure below to add PLC block.
Select the required block from the list of available PLC blocks at the left and drag it into the sheet.
Double-click on the block and adjust the properties of the block. See List of PLC blocks (page 696) for
more information about blocks.

Connect the block inputs and outputs by drawing wires in the sheet. See Define inputs and outputs
(page 157) for more information. It is also possible to connected inputs and outputs via properties of
selected PLC block.
Image 5.39 Adding PLC blocks
Note: To delete a PLC block just click on it and press delete button. Also the delete selection function can be
used.
Note: To see context help for selected PLC block just press the F1 button.
Define inputs and outputs
Image 5.40 Blank sheet of PLC Editor

Inputs
Sheet inputs are located at the left side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.
Double-click on a free input position or existing input to add new input or edit the existing one.
Select the source for the input.
If you create a binary input, you can select a source from the following categories:
Bin. values – this category contains all binary values available in the controller as binary inputs,
logical binary outputs, fixed protection states, user buttons, user protection states.
PLC outputs – this category contains all PLC blocks binary outputs available in the controller.
If you create an analog input, you can select a source from the following categories:
Ana. values – this category contains all analog values available in the controller as analog inputs,
electrical values, values from ECU etc.
All setpoints – this category contains all setpoints of the controller except the dedicated PLC
setpoints. Names, resolutions and dimensions of these setpoints can not be modified.
Image 5.41 PLC inputs
Outputs
Sheet output is located at the right side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.
Double-click on a free output position to add a new sheet output.
Double-click on an already created output to configure the output onto a controller output terminal or a
logical binary input (first some PLC block output must be connected to this output to enable configuration
of output).

Image 5.42 PLC outputs
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to click on Connect button after selecting the output. Otherwise PLC
output is not connected to output.
Creating wires
Wires can be created between PLC inputs and PLC blocks and between PLC blocks and PLC outputs.
IMPORTANT: Keep the order of starting and finishing connection points. Wires between inputs
and blocks have to start from inputs. Wires between blocks and outputs have to start from
blocks.
Follow the procedure below to create wire:

Situate the mouse pointer over the starting point of the wire. If the area under the mouse pointer is a
connection point, the pointer will change color (fill of pointer will be white).
Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the wire to the destination of required connection point. If
you point over a valid connection point, the connection point will be marked with a red circle.
Release the left mouse button to create a wire between the two points. The wire is routed automatically.
Note: It is possible to make connection only between the outputs and inputs with the same type of value
(binary or analog). Binary values are marked by black pointer, analog values are marked with green pointer.

Note: To delete wire just click on it and press the Delete button. Also the Delete selection function can be
used.
PLC logic execution rules

The PLC program is executed every 100 ms. The blocks are executed in order according to block numbers
(item numbers), which are indicated in each block. Block numbers are assigned automatically according to
their position on sheet.
Image 5.43 PLC execution logic
IMPORTANT: Please always check that the blocks are ordered correctly, especially if you use
direct feedbacks from outputs to inputs within one sheet. Wrong order may lead to incorrect
results!!!

Other functions
Consistency check
Use this function to check if all inputs and outputs of PLC block are connected.
Delete whole content of sheet

Use this function to delete the whole content of sheet (including blocks, wires, inputs, outputs, etc...).
Hints
Use this function to enable or disable quick hints for blocks (controller help is not affected by this function).
PLC monitor
PLC Monitor is a powerful tool for monitoring your PLC. Just click on PLC Monitor button on main InteliConfig
page to see your PLC. Active inputs and outputs are a blue color. Also wires with active signals are blue color.
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to edit PLC in PLC Monitor tool.
5.5.28 Geo-fencing
Geo-fencing function (available with CM2-4G-GPS) is kind of protection that evaluates whether the actual
GPS location is within a predefined area, then based on this evaluation takes an action (sends SMS
message, stops engine, make history record etc.). This function is enabled by setpoint Geo-Fencing (page
479) or by logical binary input GEO-FENCING ENABLE (PAGE 624).
Using InteliConfig, it is possible to set two concentric geo-circles within which the unit is allowed to be located.
Each geo-circle is defined as a circular geographic area with its center (common for both geo-circles) named
Home Position. This point is adjusted via setpoints Home Latitude (page 479) and Home Longitude (page
480) and radius named Fence Radius adjusted via setpoints Fence 1 Radius (page 482) and Fence 2
Radius (page 484).
The Protection can be different for both circles and are adjusted via setpoints Fence 1 Protection (page
481) and Fence 2 Protection (page 483).
It is also possible to see the current position of the controller in WebSupervisor map view.
5.5.29 After-treatment Support

Afer-treatment support generally provides monitoring and control of the after-treatment system installed on
generators engine. The requirements are defined as:
Providing After-Treatment status information by
Displaying universal lamps (icons)
Displaying analog and binary values
Control of After-Treatment regeneration function by
Transmitting commands to the ECU
Providing After-treatment status information

After-Treatment screen
This screen is shown with configured ECU which supports Tier 4 Final / Stage V. The After-Treatment screen
is automatically shown, once any of the selected lamps gets active or change status. Deactivation of the lamp

will not trigger showing the screen. The screen is then shown until the operator switches it to another one.
Alarm list screen has lower priority so even if a new alarm appears, the After-treatment screen is still
displayed. To avoid displaying a blank screen, inactive lamps are represented by "dotted" icons. For no active
lamp the screen shows all dotted icons. Please see examples below:
Image 5.44 Example of active After-treatment screen
Image 5.45 Example of inactive After-treatment screen
Universal lamps (icons)

Universal lamp icons are shown on the After-Treatment screen. Based on specific value read in specific
frame with specific SPN, every lamp icon is either:
shown
hidden
blinking slow (1 Hz)
blinking fast (2 Hz)

Inactive
Lamp name Active icon Alarm LBO LBI
icon
ECU YELLOW LAMP
BLINK (PAGE 618)
ECU YELLOW LAMP
ECU Yellow Wrn ECU Yellow ECU YELLOW
FAST BLINK (PAGE
Lamp Lamp (page 731) LAMP (PAGE 652)
619)
ECU YELLOW LAMP
SOLID (PAGE 619)
ECU RED LAMP
BLINK (PAGE 617)
ECU Red Wrn ECU Red ECU RED LAMP ECU RED LAMP FAST
Lamp Lamp (page 731) (PAGE 651) BLINK (PAGE 617)
ECU RED LAMP
SOLID (PAGE 617)
ECU WAIT TO START
BLINK (PAGE 618)
ECU WAIT TO ECU WAIT TO START
ECU Wait To Wrn ECU Wait To
START (PAGE FAST BLINK (PAGE
Start Start (page 732)
652) 618)
ECU WAIT TO START
SOLID (PAGE 618)
ATT DPF LAMP
BLINK (PAGE 611)
ATT DPF Wrn ATT DPF ATT DPF LAMP ATT DPF LAMP FAST
Lamp Lamp (page 732) (PAGE 645) BLINK (PAGE 611)
ATT DPF LAMP
SOLID (PAGE 611)
ATT HEST LAMP
BLINK (PAGE 611)
ATT HEST LAMP
ATT HEST Wrn ATT HEST ATT HEST LAMP
FAST BLINK (PAGE
Lamp Lamp (page 732) (PAGE 646)
612)
ATT HEST LAMP
SOLID (PAGE 612)
ATT SCR ERROR
LAMP BLINK (PAGE
Wrn ATT SCR ATT SCR 613)
ATT SCR
Error Lamp (page ERROR LAMP ATT SCR ERROR
Error Lamp
732) (PAGE 646) LAMP FAST BLINK
(PAGE 613)
ATT SCR ERROR

Inactive
Lamp name Active icon Alarm LBO LBI
icon
LAMP SOLID (PAGE
613)
ATT DEF LEVEL
LAMP BLINK (PAGE
610)
Wrn ATT DEF ATT DEF LEVEL
ATT DEF ATT DEF LEVEL
Level Lamp (page LAMP FAST BLINK
Level Lamp LAMP (PAGE 645)
732) (PAGE 610)
ATT DEF LEVEL
LAMP SOLID (PAGE
610)
ATT INHIBITED LAMP
BLINK (PAGE 612)
ATT Wrn ATT ATT INHIBITED LAMP
ATT INHIBITED
Inhibited Inhibited Lamp FAST BLINK (PAGE
LAMP (PAGE 646)
Lamp (page 733) 612)
ATT INHIBITED LAMP
SOLID (PAGE 613)
Note: Lamps can by disabled during prestart phase. Checkbox: Ignore ECU lamps during prestart is located
in InteliConfig -> Controller Configuration -> Modules -> ECU module -> Electronic control unit settings.
Note: Aftertreatment support can be disabled. Aftertreatment HMI Screen is hidden and alarms related to
aftertreatment are not shown. Use the checkbox: Disable aftertreatment support located in InteliConfig ->
Controller Configuration -> Modules -> ECU module -> Electronic control unit settings.
Changing behavior of Aftertreatment lamps using PLC

The behavior of lamps can be changed using PLC logic. For this reason there is group of LBI introduced
which directly controls each lamp state. These LBIs can be used for control of the lamps the way the user
wants. PLC Decomposer block should be used in a case the signal from ECU is analog one.

Example:
Image 5.46 The lamp state will be solid when signal is value 1, 2 = blink, 5 = blink fast
Control of After-Treatment regeneration function

Control of the non-mission regeneration is dependent on several conditions:
Controller is in MAN mode
GCB muset be open only when GCB Control Mode (page 233) = Internal
State Running
When these conditions are met, user can either switch LBI ATT INTERLOCK (PAGE 613) which acts as
acknowledgment for the ECU that everything is prepared for the DPF regeneration, after that user can start
regeneration by closing LBI ATT FORCE REGEN (PAGE 611). Some ECUs however do not include LBI ATT
INTERLOCK (PAGE 613) and closing just LBI ATT FORCE REGEN (PAGE 611) is enough to start the regeneration
process.
Some engines may require the regeneration to run on higher RPM than is normally expected. For this reason
we recommend to adjust Overspeed Limit setpoint.
The exact process and conditions for each particular engine should be studied carefully from the engine
documentation issued by the manufacturer.
User can also inhibit regeneration process by:
ATT INHIBIT REGEN (PAGE 612)
By doing so, the process of regeneration will be postponed until user switches the LBI back to open position.
The Regeneration Inhibit lamp should be usually on solid when the LBI is closed. If the LBI is closed during
regeneration, the process stops and it will have to start over if the ECU allows it.

General procedure of non-mission DPF regeneration
This is procedure from user standpoint, and its general idea of non-mission regeneration. There might be
variations depends on specific engine manufacturer.
Regeneration start:
State: lamps signals DPF regeneration is needed
User action: open GCB, prepare Gen-set for regeneration (go to manual mode, turn on LBI GCB Disable,
LBI Force Protections Override, set Overspeed Limit SP)
CU action: turn off protections and change limit for overspeed
User action: close interlock (if interlock is available)
State: Regeneration conditions achieved
User action: activate force regeneration
Regeneration end:
State: lamps stop indicating, regeneration ended (engine now runs in Idle or Nominal speed)
User action: turn of force regeneration (if its not pulse)
User action: interlock open (if its available)
User action: Turn off LBI GCB Disable, LBI Force Protection Override, SP Speed Override Limit
User action: stop engine
Then user can do what he wants.
5.5.30 Alternate configuration

There are 3 sets of alternate configurations in a controller:
Configuration set 1 Configuration set 2 Configuration set 3

Nominal Power Split Phase 1 Nominal Power Split Phase 2 Nominal Power Split Phase 3
(page 538) (page 543) (page 548)
Nominal Power 1 (page 537) Nominal Power 2 (page 542) Nominal Power 3 (page 547)
Nominal RPM 1 (page 533) Nominal RPM 2 (page 538) Nominal RPM 3 (page 543)
Nominal Frequency 1 (page 534) Nominal Frequency 2 (page 539) Nominal Frequency 3 (page 544)
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page
534) 539) 544)
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page
534) 539) 544)
Nominal Current 1 (page 535) Nominal Current 2 (page 540) Nominal Current 3 (page 545)
Connection Type 1 (page 535) Connection type 2 (page 540) Connection type 3 (page 545)
ECU Speed Adjustment 1 (page ECU Speed Adjustment 2 (page ECU Speed Adjustment 3 (page
537) 542) 547)
Configuration sets can be changed via logical binary inputs ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 609) and ALTERNATE
CONFIG 3 (PAGE 609). Configuration set 1 is active when there is no input activated. In the case that the inputs
ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 609) and ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 609) are active at the same time,
configuration set 3 is taken in account.

ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 609) ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 609) Active configuration set
0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
1 1 3
IMPORTANT: Gen-set can not switch to the alternative setpoints when running.
5.5.31 USB host

USB host is a function for programming the controller from the USB Flash Drive. In order to get the latest
firmware and archive to USB flash drive following steps have to be followed:
Download and install latest .psi package from www.comap-control.com
Use InteliConfig -> Tools -> USB Flash Export -> Export Manager
There must be 4 files generated or copied on USB flash drive.
Note: M.N.P.B stands for number 0 – 9.
The following functions are supported:

Firmware upload (Access level 3 is required)
Configuration upload (Access level 3 is required)
Firmware and configuration upload (Access level 3 is required)
Configuration download (Access level 0 is satisfactory)
IMPORTANT: Do not unplug USB Flash Drive during programming!

Image 5.47 USB host flowchart
Terminology:
The Archive = the native file of InteliConfig, including the complete Configuration + History + Statistic +
Values (at time of download) + Alarm list.
Configuration = the part of Archive, in the terms of Configuration + Setpoints + PLC + IO definitions +
Languages (for more information see Configuration download on page 170).
New configuration = the configuration created in InteliConfig for the purpose of uploading it into the
controller using the USB memory stick. The new configuration is recognized due to its name. The name
must contain the specific string ="InteliLite4-Genset name-M.N.P.B.ail4".
Note: M.N.P.B stands for number 0 – 9.
Compatible firmware = the firmware version compatible with the configuration in the controller.
Abbreviations:
CU – control unit
FW – firmware
CFG – configuration

Firmware upload
Point 1 – controller detects that USB Flash Drive has been inserted.
If the communication via USB is running, the controller will not detect the USB flash drive.
On the other hand if the USB flash drive was detected, communication via USB B port is not possible.
Point 2 – controller is in OFF mode
All operations with USB memory key are possible only in OFF mode
Point 3 – Conditions for firmware upload with current configuration
The new firmware compatible with the version of the configuration in the controller has been detected
(and there is no new configuration file).
Detection is based on the name of firmware
More firmware can be stored on the USB Flash Drive. Controller automatically selects the compatible
firmware with the highest version.
Point 4 – Pop-up message
Do you want to update firmware?
Point 5 – Firmware upload
Current archive is downloaded to USB Flash Drive (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM).
New firmware is uploaded into the controller without the change of the configuration
History record "Firmware loaded" is made
Confirming file (.txt) on USB Flash Drive is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new FW" successful.
Confirmation pop-up message: "Controller programming successful"
Configuration upload
If the communication via USB B is running, the controller will not detect the USB memory key.
All operations with USB flash drive are possible only in OFF mode
Point 9 – conditions for new configuration upload
The new configuration compatible with the version of the firmware in the controller has been detected
(and there is no new firmware file).
Detection is based on name of configuration – required name: "InteliLite 4-Genset name-M.N.P.B.ail4
Note: M.N.P.B stands for number 0 – 9."
There can be only one configuration file

Do you want to update configuration?
Point 11 – Configuration upload
Current archive is download to USB flash drive (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM).
New configuration is uploaded into the controller without the change of the firmware
History record "Config loaded" is made

Confirming file (.txt) on USB flash drive is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new CFG" successful.
Firmware and configuration upload

Point 6 – conditions for new firmware and configuration upload
The new configuration has been detected. Also there is a firmware file compatible with detected new
configuration
Detection is based on name of configuration – required name: "InteliLite 4-Genset name-
M.N.P.B.ail4" and on name of firmware
There can be only one configuration file
More firmware can be stored on the USB flash drive. Controller automatically selects the compatible
firmware with the highest version.
Do you want to update firmware and configuration?
Point 8 – Configuration and firmware upload
New firmware is uploaded into the controller
New configuration is uploaded into the controller
History record "Firmware loaded" and "Config loaded" is made
Confirming file (.txt) on USB flash drive is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new FW" successful,
Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new CFG" successful.
Configuration download
Points 3, 6, 9 – conditions for configuration download
There is no firmware or configuration with required name
Do you want to download archive?

Point 11 – Configuration download
Confirmation pop-up message: "Archive successfully saved"
5.5.32 Firewall
The firewall function allows to restrict the access to the controller application services (ComAp/TCP server,
MODBUS/TCP server etc.) or to the specific computers or networks. Firewall can be activated on Ethernet port.
Example:
Adress: 192.168.1.0
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Port: 23
Any computer with IP address from the network range 192.168.1.0 – 192.168.1.255 can connect to
ComAp/TCP server (= connect to the controller with InteliConfig via Ethernet).
Example:
Adress: 192.168.1.100
Netmask: 255.255.255.255
Port: 502
Only the single computer with IP address 192.168.1.100 can connect to MODBUS/TCP server
IMPORTANT: When enabling the firewall, If the rules are not set up properly and the connection is
made remotely, loss of connection can happen.
5.5.33 E-Stop
Binary outputs for the control of some essential functions are internally wired as "safe", meaning that their
deactivation is directly bound with the dedicated Input E-STOP (not evaluated as the LBI in the controller).
These BO are fully configurable and are used e.g. for the Starter and Fuel control.
The emergency stop circuit must be secured.
The power supply of the associated binary outputs (BOUT1 and BOUT2) is supplied by the E-STOP input,
not by the + battery voltage.
Note: There is no difference in the way of configuration of all binary outputs. Binary outputs BO1 (Starter),
BO2 (Fuel Solenoid) are intended for these functions (not dedicated).
There is a measurement of E-STOP input voltage analogically and setting the binary value (representing
emergency stop input level) based on comparison of the measured voltage to two analog levels, which are
derived from the controller supply voltage (battery voltage) perceptually.

Image 5.48 SW principle of E-STOP
If the input voltage of E-stop is higher than high comparison level (ex. higher than 80% of the supply
voltage), then E-stop is not activated.
If the input voltage of E-stop is lower than low comparison level (ex. lower than 60% of the supply voltage),
then E-stop is activated.
If the input voltage of E-stop is located somewhere between low and high comparison levels (ex. between 60
and 80 %of the supply voltage, then E-stop binary value will remain in its previous state (meaning the E-Stop
binary value will not change).
Visualization on CU screen
1 – E-STOP has voltage – state is OK
0 – E-STOP has no voltage – protection is active
For more information about connection see E-Stop on page 53.
5.5.34 ECU Frequency selection

Value Ecu freq select is calculated from Nominal Frequency (page 231) setpoint. The sequence for
frequency change is executed automatically (engine must be in still condition) in the following steps:
1. Starting of the engine is blocked (state: Not Ready)
2. LBO: ECU Power relay is activated
3. Wait 5 s
4. LBO: Stop Pulse is set for 1 s (standard Stop Pulse duration)
5. Wait 3 s
6. Frequency selection is changed to a new value
7. Wait 2 s
8. LBO: Stop Pulse is set for 1 s (standard Stop Pulse duration)
9. Wait 2 s
10. LBO: ECU Power relay is deactivated
11. Return from start blocking state

5.5.35 User Buttons
The User button is a binary signal. Its value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device such as Modbus).
States of user buttons signals are visible in the Values group User Buttons. There are 16 user buttons
available.
Each setpoint has these options

Option Description
The LBO User Button X is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third party
COMMAND
device.
The LBO User Button X is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user button
MAN OFF
is still 0.
The LBO User Button X is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user button
is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching to
COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until command is
received.
Commands
Commands can be sent from third party device via Modbus or remote connection (WebSupervisor). Following
types are available:
Command Description
When a command ON is received, User Button is activated. Subsequent commands ON
ON/OFF when User Button is active have no effect. If a command OFF is received, User Button is
deactivated. Subsequent commands OFF when User Button is inactive have no effect.
When a command TOGGLE is received, User Button is activated. Next command
TOGGLE
TOGGLE when User Button is active deactivates User Button and so on.
When a command PULSE is received, User Button is activated for the set duration.
Pulse length is 200 ms (user can use this pulse in PLC to prolong it using e.g. block
Delay)
Consequent commands PULSE sent during duration of the pulse prolong the duration
accordingly.
When the setting of pulse duration is changed while the pulse is active, the current pulse
PULSE will have the original duration and the new setting is applied for the next pulse.
If the User Button is active (as a result of COMMAND ON or COMMAND TOGGLE) and
COMMAND PULSE comes, User Button remains active for the duration of the pulse and
then it deactivates.
While a pulse is active (duration of the pulse) and COMMAND ON, COMMAND OFF or
COMMAND TOGGLE comes, the pulse is canceled. Next state depends on the
canceling command

Note:
COMMAND ON – User Button remains active until COMMAND OFF or COMMAND TOGGLE comes
COMMAND OFF or COMMAND TOGGLE – User Button deactivates until COMMAND ON,
COMMAND TOGGLE or COMMAND PULSE come
User button MODBUS commands *)

User User User User User User User User
Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 Button 5 Button 6 Button 7 Button 8
00 0A 00 00 14 00 00 1E 00 00 28 00 00 32 00 00 3C 00 00 46 00 00 50 00
PULSE
00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47
00 0B 00 00 15 00 00 1F 00 00 29 00 00 33 00 00 3D 00 00 47 00 00 51 00
TOGGLE
00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47
00 0C 00 00 16 00 00 20 00 00 2A 00 00 34 00 00 3E 00 00 48 00 00 52 00
ON
00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47
00 0D 00 00 17 00 00 21 00 00 2B 00 00 35 00 00 3F 00 00 49 00 00 53 00
OFF
00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47
User User User User User User User User
Button 9 Button 10 Button 11 Button 12 Button 13 Button 14 Button 15 Button 16
00 5A 00 00 64 00 00 6E 00 00 78 00 00 82 00 00 8C 00 00 96 00 00 A0 00
PULSE
00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48
00 5B 00 00 65 00 00 6F 00 00 79 00 00 83 00 00 8D 00 00 97 00 00 A1 00
TOGGLE
00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48
00 5C 00 00 66 00 00 70 00 00 7A 00 00 84 00 00 8E 00 00 98 00 00 A2 00
ON
00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48
00 5D 00 00 67 00 00 71 00 00 7B 00 00 85 00 00 8F 00 00 99 00 00 A3 00
OFF
00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48
IMPORTANT: The first line in each table cell represents an Argument, the second line stands for
Command.
Note: Table provides data which has to be written into MODBUS registers 4207-4209 (count 3) using
function 16 for specific user button and command type.
MODBUS Register: 44208(4207), Function 16, Count 3
5.5.36 User setpoints

Controller allows user to create their own setpoints, as well as edit and delete created setpoints. The number
of setpoints created by the user is limited to 128. All setpoints created by user are located in a group selected
by a user. The Comm. object number (CO) can be found via InteliConfig (Tools tab → Generate Cfg image
(COM)). User setpoints can be used to manage User protections and PLC.

Add User setpoint
Delete selected User setpoint
Edit selected User setpoint
Image 5.49 Setting parameters of a user setpoint

Contents of the user setpoint
Max. 32 characters
Name Note: Does not consider duplicities (It is possible to have setpoints with the same
name, but it is not recommended.)
Can be chosen from a list or
Dimension
User can create their own with a limit of 32 characters.
Resolution Max. 4 decimal place
Range of the data type INT32 (restricted by resolution).
Low Limit Value is set as a constant (can not be set as setpoint).
Max. value cannot exceed High Limit.
Range of the data type INT32 (restricted by resolution).
High Limit Value is set as a constant (can not be set as setpoint).
Min. value cannot be lower than Low Limit.
Default value Must be in range between Low and High Limit (restricted by resolution).
Group in which setpoint will be shown.
Group
Position of a setpoint in a list.
Subgroup Subgroup in which setpoint will be shown.
6 back to Functions
5.6 User management and data access control

Accessing, monitoring or controlling the device via any communication interface requires a user to be
logged-in.
When a task (read data, write data , control) is to be performed the access level of the user who is
currently logged-in must be higher or equal to the access level required for the particular task.
User must have their user account defined by the administrator of the controller before the user can log-in
into the controller and perform monitoring, control or configuration tasks.
Note: For trusted interfaces there is an "implicit user"(see Implicit account on page 177) automatically
logged in always while no other explicit user is logged in.
5.6.1 Types of interfaces

The controller communication interfaces are split into two categories according to what kind of environment
the interface is exposed to.
Trusted
Trusted interfaces are operated locally inside a closed environment/ infrastructure where additional
measures against misuse or attack take place (e.g. physical access limitation). Due to the nature of
this interface less strict cybersecurity rules may be applied.
Trusted interfaces provide Implicit account (page 177) function which allows the performance of
certain operations without requiring an explicit user to log in.
Trusted interfaces are USB, RS232, RS485.

Untrusted
General-purpose interfaces, which may be exposed to public networks, such as the Internet, are
untrusted. The communication is running through networks which are not under control of the entity
who operates the controller. Thus, strict cybersecurity rules must apply for this type of interface.
Untrusted interface are Ethernet and cellular module.
5.6.2 User accounts

User account must be created in the controller by an administrator before the particular user can login to the
controller.
Note: User accounts must be created for each controller separately and manually. It is not possible to
transfer the accounts from one controller to another.
User account must have the following properties

Consists of 6-15 alphanumeric characters, must contain at least 1 letter. This
Username
is the main identifier of the particular user account.
Consists of 6-15 alphanumeric characters, must contain at least 1 letter and 1
Password digit. This is the password that is used together with user name to authenticate
(log-in).
Optional 4-digit identification string which can be used for simplified login at
User identifier (UID)
trusted interfaces (e.g. from InteliVision display when connected via Ethernet.
PIN 4-digit “password” to be used together with UID.
Access level Determines Access to controller data (page 185)
Implicit account
At trusted interfaces there is an implicit user automatically logged-in at any time if no other explicit user is
logged-in at the respective interface. This allows terminal devices (e.g. internal display) to show controller
values even without the need for a specific person to be logged-in.
The implicit account is fixedly defined in the firmware.
The implicit account has fixed access level 0, unless production mode is activated (see Production
mode on page 178).
Implicit user is logged in any time no other user is logged in at the respective interface.
User login
To login to the controller the username and password must be provided into the login form of the
application (InteliConfig (page 13), WebSupervisor (page 13).
Alternatively, at trusted interfaces, it is possible to login using UID and PIN instead of username and
password. This method of login is designed to simplify the login procedure at devices without alphanumeric
keyboard (e.g. InteliVision).
Note: The controller is featured with a protection against brute force attack to user account credentials. For
details see Account break protection on page 184.

Changing password and PIN
The password and/or PIN for currently logged user can be changed. The user must be logged with username
and password even if PIN has to be changed.
Production mode
Production mode is used to simplify working with the controller while manufacturing, putting into operation or
service works.
In production mode the Implicit account (page 177) has access level adjusted to administrator level.
Thus, in production mode at trusted interfaces (like USB) the operator is allowed to perform any operation
which normally requires administrator to log in without the need of logging in.
IMPORTANT: Production mode is intended only for the manufacturing and/or service purposes
while the controller is in the respective facility and must be turned off before the controller is put
into regular operation.
There is active alarm Wrn Production Mode (page 745) in the alarm list any time production mode is active.
To turn off the Production mode go to User management and uncheck the checkbox Production mode or go
to Production Mode display screen and select disable.
Factory default accounts

Each controller comes from the production with one factory default administrator account having following
credentials:
Username: "administrator"
Password: <serial number of the controller>
Example: 12345678
User ID: "0001"

User PIN: "0000"
When the controller is being configured for operation the desired user accounts including the administrator
account should be created and then the factory default account can be deleted.
IMPORTANT: Adjust the backup e-mail address before you delete the default administrator
account. This address is used as second authentication factor in password reset request and the
password reset action code will be sent to this and only this e-mail address.
Note: There must always remain at least one administrator account in the system. The controller will not
allow deleting last administrator account.
Wrn Default Password appears in Alarm list when the default administrator password is set and
communication module is plugged in the controller. The purpose of alarm is to inform that the controller might
be or is connected to an untrusted interface and cybersecurity rules are not fulfilled because there is default
administrator password.
Reset accounts to factory default

If credentials (username and/or password) for administrator account are lost, it is possible to reset all user
accounts to the factory default state. For more information see Resetting the administrator password on
page 186.
After reset procedure user accounts are in factory default state.

Wrn Default Password appears in Alarm list when the default administrator password is set and
communication module is plugged in the controller. The purpose of the alarm is to inform that the controller
might be or is connected to an untrusted interface and cybersecurity rules are not fulfilled because there is
default administrator password.
5.6.3 Managing accounts

User accounts can be managed from InteliConfig while an online connection to the controller is established. A
user with administrator level must be logged with username/password and is prompted to re-enter accounts
password before the user management dialog is opened.
IMPORTANT: The total available number of accounts in the controller is 5.
Adding an account
Click on the "+" button in the lower left corner of the user management window, then provide the account
properties as described in User accounts (page 177).
Note: Rules for the User accounts (page 177) credentials apply and some items are optional
Deleting an account
Select the account that has to be deleted and click on the "-" button in the lower left part of the user
management window.
Note: You can not delete your own administrator account unless there is another administrator account
present in the controller.

Changing account properties
Select the account that needs to be deleted and click on the "pencil" button in the lower left part of the user
management window. Then modify the desired property or properties. You can modify one or more properties
at once.
Note: It is not possible to change user name or UID. Instead of this create a new account with the required
changes and delete the original one.
Cloning accounts
Cloning feature allows user to clone user accounts together with controller firmware and configuration.
Note: If the archive where the save of the clone is made is configured with the plug-in module, it's firmware
can also be a part of the clone.
Save the clone

To prepare the clone you need to click on the Save Icon. The following window appears.
Image 5.50 Save the clone

Plug-in Module FW bookmark
If is required to clone firmware of connected plug-in modules, click to checkbox "Include Plug-in
Modules FW"
User Management bookmark
User has to create accounts in this section. These newly created accounts are stored in the clone
At least one user with administrator rights (level 3) must be defined. Recovery Email address has to
be set.
AirGateKey is not mandatory but recommended when the AirGate connection is used to access the
controller
Image 5.51 Create accounts
Package protection
Set up password for clone file
Create clone
To load the clone to the controller click on the Create Clone icon.

Image 5.52 Create clone
1. Select required clone and click on Next button

2. Following window appears
Image 5.53 Create clone
3. Select required connection type

4. Fill in the password in case the clone was saved by selected Package protection option
5. Click on Clone button

Manage clones
Click on the ImEx clone icon for managing clones. Following window appears.
Image 5.54 ImEx Clone
Exporting clone
It is possible to export clone from InteliConfig software into any location. To export the clone click on the
Export clone icon. Following window appears.
Image 5.55 Save as clone
1. Type required clone name into File name bar

2. Choose required folder
3. Click on Save button

Importing clone
It is possible to import clone from any location. For importing the clone click on the Import clone icon.
Following window appears.
Image 5.56 Open clone
1. Go to location where is required clone saved

2. Select the clone
3. Click on Open button
5.6.4 Account break protection

The controller protects the user accounts against a brute-force attack, i.e against breaking into the controller
by fast repeating attempts to login with credentials generated from the range of all possible combinations.
If the account break protection detects a possible attack and blocks an account or interface the alarm Wrn
Brute Force Protection Active (page 746) is activated. The alarm can be used to send an active message
(e.g. e-mail) to inform about that situation The exact behavior of the controller depends on the situation.
Password protection
1. If a user performs five consecutive attempts to login using username/password, providing correct
username but incorrect password, the respective user account is blocked for a time period of 1 minute.
The attempts count regardless of the interface from which it is performed.
2. During the blocking period it is not possible to login with the respective account (username) from any
interface even if the correct password is provided.
3. After the blocking period elapses, another attempt to login with the respective account (username) is
possible. If this attempt fails again the account is blocked again, now for period of 2 minutes.
4. The points repeats 1-3 times further, the duration of the blocking period is multiplied by 2 in each
consequential cycle. However, the maximal blocking time is 20 minutes, the blocking time is never higher.

PIN protection
If a user performs ten consecutive attempts to login using UID/PIN, providing correct UID but incorrect
PIN, the user account is permanently blocked for login using this UID/PIN. The user must login with
username/password and change the PIN to unblock this login method again.
Interface protection
If anyone performs twenty consecutive attempts to login via one particular interface and does not provide
either a valid username nor a valid uid the respective interface is blocked for 2 minutes.
During this period it is not possible to use that interface for any login. The blocking period is not progressive in
this case.
5.6.5 Access to controller data

Every request for reading data from the controller or writing data into it requires a user to be logged. This
user must have an access level higher or equal to the access level defined for the particular object
and operation.
There are 4 access levels available (level 0 to level 3). Level 3 is administrator level and users who have
this level have full control over the controller.
Reading data
The access level required for reading data from controller is fixedly adjusted to 0. That means reading of
data (except some system objects) is available for any user.
Writing data
The access level required to write (modify) application setpoints or invoke application commands is
configurable via InteliConfig.
Special situations
There are several operations that require administrator level:
Programming firmware
Programming configuration
Managing user accounts
5.6.6 Cybernetic security

The cybernetic security is formed by:
Protection against a brute-force attack to the password
Secure method to reset the password
A new technology of encryption of the remote communication
Note: Cybernetic security was designed according to ISA 62443, level 2.
Protection against the brute force attack

Protection against a brute force attack will take place when an invalid password is entered repeatedly.

If the invalid password is entered 5 times, the controller gets blocked from entering the password for a
predetermined amount of time.
Each further entering of the invalid password cause the consequent blocking time is to be increased.
If the invalid password is entered repeatedly the controller gets blocked for entering the password
permanently and the password must be reset to a default value as described below.
Note: Blocking of the controller for entering the password has no influence on controller / Gen-set operation
Note: Permanent blocking cannot occur accidentally, just by user mistake. It can be practically triggered only
by a focused activity.
Resetting the administrator password

If the administrator password is lost or controller is permanently locked due to brute-force attack
protection, proceed according to a procedure described below:
IMPORTANT: There is a backup e-mail address defined in the controller to which and only which
ComAp will send the "password reset action code". Please be sure, that you have adjusted this e-
mail address correctly. Use InteliConfig to adjust the backup e-mail address

Reset password procedure
1. Connect InteliConfig.
2. Get the password reset request code and send it via e-mail to [email protected]

3. Once you receive the reply from ComAp, copy the code from the e-mail (all characters inside the box
as indicated below)

4. Paste the code into the password reset window
Encryption of the communication

New technology CCS is used for an authentication and an encryption of the ComAp protocol via
Internet/ethernet/AirGate. This technology is based on strong and proven cryptographic algorithms and has
successfully passed penetration tests and cybersecurity audit.
Hardening the storage of a credentials

The user credentials (passwords and access code) have been moved to a hardened storage to prevent the
credentials to leak out of the hardware.
IMPORTANT: If a firmware rollback is inevitable, please keep in mind, when the firmware is first
time updated to the new firmware (which uses hardened storage) a seamless transfer of the
credentials into the hardened storage is performed. However, if the rollback to any previous
firmware (which does not use hardened storage) is performed the credentials are NOT transferred
back, so the previous firmware will not "see" any change of the credentials made through the
new firmware. Moreover, as the transfer of the credentials into the hardened storage is performed
only during very first update from an "old" to a "new" firmware, no change of the credentials
performed in the "old" firmware after the rollback will be visible in the "new" firmware after a next
update to the "new" firmware.
Web interface can be disabled

A setpoint has been added to disable the CM3-Ethernet built-in web interface.
IMPORTANT: As the web interface is using HTTP protocol it is recommended to disable the web
interface unless the controller is connected into a trusted secure network.

6 Communication
6.1 PC 190
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 196
6.1 PC
6.1.1 Direct communication 190
6.1.2 Remote communication 191
6.1.1 Direct communication

A RS232, USB, RS485 or ethernet interface can be used for direct cable connection to a PC.
Connection via RS232

A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS232 connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 60.
RS232 interface uses COM1 Mode (page 485) port of the controller. Use a cross-wired serial communication
cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND.
Note: Also USB-RS232 convertor can be used.
Image 6.1 Cross-wired RS232 cable is used
Image 6.2 Cross-wired RS232 cable and USB is used
Connection via RS485

Plug-in module CM-RS232-485 or on board RS485 connector can be used for communication via RS485
connection.

Connection via Onboard RS485
RS485 interface uses RS485 Mode (page 240) port of the controller.
Connection via Ethernet

A plug-in communication module CM3-Ethernet is necessary for Ethernet connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 60.
This connection type is used for communication with the controller from InteliConfig or any other PC tool. This
connection can be used regardless of whenever the AirGate is switched on or off. Five remote clients can be
connected at the same time (direct or airgate connection).
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the INTERNET connection type and just put the CM3-Ethernet
IP address into the Gen-set address box in the PC tool.
Image 6.3 Ethernet cable is used
Connection via USB

USB interface uses HID profile.
6.1.2 Remote communication

Ethernet LAN connection
Direct IP LAN connection is intended to be used if the CM3-Ethernet module is reachable from the client
computer by specifying the IP address at which the module can be contacted.
If direct IP connection is to be used within a local network the CM3-Ethernet must have static IP address in
the respective local network.
Note: If you have troubles with setting up static and public IP address for direct connection from Internet try
using AirGate connection instead.

Image 6.4 Ethernet LAN connection
Note: For information how to setup an AirGate connection, see AirGate connection on page 68.
Setting-up static IP address

There are two basic ways to get the static IP address.
First way is to switch the CM3-Ethernet to manual IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode
(page 513) to Manual. In that case all setpoints of IP settings (IP Address (page 514), Subnet Mask (page
514), Gateway IP (page 515), DNS IP Address 1 (page 516)) must be adjusted manually. If this method is
used several basic rules should be kept avoiding conflicts with the remaining network infrastructure:
The static IP used in the controller must be selected in accordance with the local network in which CM3-
Ethernet is connected.
The static IP used in the controller must be excluded from the pool of addresses which is assigned by
DHCP server, which is in charge of the respective local network.
The local infrastructure must generally allow using devices with manually assigned IP addresses.
There must not be any other device using the same static IP address. This can be tested from a computer
connected to the same network using "ping <required_ip_address>" command issued from the command
line. The IP address is not occupied if there is not any response to the ping command.
Note: The list above contains only basic rules. Other specific restrictions/rules may take place depending on
the local network security policy, technology used, topology etc.
The second way to get the static IP address is to switch the CM3-Ethernet to automatic IP address mode.
Adjust the setpointIP Address Mode (page 513) to AUTOMATIC. In that case all IP settings are assigned by
DHCP server. Then configure the DHCP server to assign always the same IP address (i.e. static IP address)
to the particular CM3-Ethernet according to its MAC address.
Internet connection
Public static IP
If public static IP connection is to be used from the Internet, the IP address, which is entered into the client
computer, must be static and public in scope of the Internet.
If CM3-Ethernet is connected to the Internet via a local Ethernet network then in the most cases port
forwarding must be created from the public IP address of the network gateway to the local IP address
of CM3-Ethernet at the port specified for ComAp protocol. Different port numbers can be used to
create multiple port forwarding rules in the same local network.

AirGate
This connection type is intended for remote connection from InteliConfig, or any other ComAp PC tool over
the Internet in situations, where obtaining fixed public IP address is not possible. Five remote clients can be
connected at the same time (direct or airgate connection).
This connection type is active if AirGate connection is enabled. Setpoint AirGate Address (page 518) must
contain AirGate server address. It can be entered in text form as well as numeric form. There is a public
AirGate server available at the address "global.airgate.link".
Once the controller is connected to the Internet and the AirGate server address is properly adjusted then the
controller registers automatically to the server and an identification string AirGate ID is given to a controller,
which is visible at the controller screen.
In order to connect to InteliConfig following information have to be filled out:
AirGate ID
AirGate server
Controller address
AirGate Key
AirGate Key.
SMS
Event SMS
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM2-4G-GPS communication module is able to send Event SMS
according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 528)
Note: First, the setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 505) must be adjusted to enable this function.

The following events can be received by mobile phone:
Engine Start/Stop
Manual Start/Stop
Remote Start/Stop
AMF Start/Stop (as Automatic Mains Failure Start/Stop)
Test Start/Stop Gen-set
Mains Fail
Mains Returned
Load on Mains
Load on Gen-set
Test On Load
Message structure:
Gen-set Name (hh:mm:ss dd.mm.yyyy)
hh:mm:ss Mains Fail
hh:mm:ss AMF Start
hh:mm:ss Load on Gen-set
hh:mm:ss Mains Returned
hh:mm:ss Load on Mains
hh:mm:ss AMF Stop
Alarm SMS
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM2-4G-GPS communication module is able to send Alarm SMS
according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 529)
Sd Message (page 529)
BOC Message (page 527)
Note: First, the setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 505) must be adjusted to enable this function.
Message structure:
Gen-set Name
AL=(Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm x)
Note: An asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and an exclamation mark means that alarm is active.
Emails
Event Email
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM3-Ethernet communication module is able to send an Event
Email according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 528)
Note: Setpoints Email Address 1 (page 525) and SMTP Sender Address (page 523) or SMTP Server
Address (page 523) must be adjusted to enable this function.

Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss
Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Events
-----------------------------------------------
hh:mm:ss Event 1
hh:mm:ss Event 2
hh:mm:ss Event 3
Alarm Email
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM3-Ethernet communication module is able to send Alarm
Emails according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 529)
Sd Message (page 529)
BOC Message (page 527)
Note: Setpoints Email Address 1 (page 525) and SMTP Sender Address (page 523) or SMTP Server
Address (page 523) must be adjusted to enable this function.

Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss
Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
History events
-----------------------------------------------
0 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 1
-1 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 2
-2 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 3
Note: An asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and an exclamation mark means that alarm is active.
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems

6.2.1 SNMP 196
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 199
6 back to Communication
6.2.1 SNMP
SNMP is an UDP-based client-server protocol used for providing data and events into a supervisory system
(building management system). The controller plays the role of a "SNMP Agent" while the supervisory system
plays the role of a "SNMP Manager".
CM3-Ethernet module is required for SNMP function
Supported versions – SNMP v1 and SNMP v2
The SNMP Agent function is to be enabled by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page 521) in the CM-Ethernet
setpoint group. The setpoints SNMP RD Community String (page 522) and SNMP WR Community String
(page 522) in the same group can be used to customize the "community strings" for the read and write
operations which function like "passwords". All requests sent from the SNMP Manager must contain a

community string which matches with the community string adjusted in the controller otherwise the controller
will refuse the operation.
MIB table
The "MIB table" (Management Information Base) is a table which gives to the Manager a description of all
objects provided by the Agent.
The MIB table is specific for each controller type and configuration
The MIB table is to be exported from the controller configuration using InteliConfig
Controllers with identical firmware and configuration also share identical MIB table, however if the
configuration and/or firmware is not identical the MIB table is different and must be exported separately for
each controller.
The root OID of the InteliLite 4 controller is 1.3.6.1.4.1.28634.30. Under this node can be found following sub-
nodes:
Notifications group (SMI v2 only) contains definitions of all notification-type objects that the Agent may
send to the Manager.
GroupRdFix contains read-only objects that exist in all controllers regardless of the firmware version/type
and configuration.
GroupRdCfg contains read-only objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupWrFix contains read-write objects that exist in all controllers regardless of the firmware version/type
and configuration.
GroupWrCfg contains read-write objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupW contains write-only objects.
NotificationData group contains objects that are accessible only as bindings of the notification messages.
SMI version
In InteliConfig the MIB table may be exported in two different formats – SMI v1 and SMI v2. The format which
shall be used for export depends on the SNMP Manager and the SMI version that it supports.
Typically, SMI v1 is used for SNMP v1 and vice versa, but it is not a rule. SMI v2 may also be used for SNMP
v1.
SNMP notifications
Except for the request-response communication model, in which the communication is controlled by the
Manager, there are also messages that the Agent sends without any requests. These messages are called
"Notifications" and inform the Manager about significant events which occurred in the Agent.
The controller can send notifications to two different SNMP Managers (two different IP addresses). The
addresses are to be adjusted in the CM-Ethernet setpoint group by the setpoints SNMP Traps IP Address 1
(page 521) and SNMP Traps IP Address 2 (page 522). If the Manager address is not adjusted the particular
notification channel is off. The controller will send the notifications in the format adjusted by the setpoint
SNMP Trap Format.
Each notification (kind of event) is identified by a unique identifier (Trap ID in SNMPv1 or Notification OID
in SNMPv2). This unique identifier gives the specific meaning to the notification message, e.g. Protection
1st level – Fuel Level – alarm activated.
All possible notifications and their identifiers are listed in the MIB table.

The notification message also contains controller name, serial number and textual description of the
event.
SMI version
In InteliConfig the MIB table may be exported in two different formats – SMI v1 and SMI v2. The format which
shall be used for export depends on the SNMP Manager and the SMI version that it supports. Typically, SMI
v1 is used for SNMP v1 and vice versa, but it is not a rule and SMI v2 may also be used for SNMP v1.
SNMP reserved objects
Name OID Access Data type Meaning

Writing: command argument
pfActionArgument groupWrFix.24550 read,write Gauge32 Reading: command return
value
pfActionCommand groupW.24551 write Integer32 Command code *)
Writing: changing controller
mode
pControllerMode groupWrCfg.8315 read, write Integer32
Reading: checking controller
mode
Note: *)
For list of commands, arguments and description of the procedure of invoking commands see the description
of the Modbus protocol.
Operational events
This events are used for SNMP traps. See the list below:
Start commands of Gen-set
Start button
AMF start
Remote start
Stop commands of Gen-set
Stop button
AMF stop
Remote stop
Breaker records
Load on Gen-set
Load on mains
Others
Test on load
Mains fail
Mains returned

6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP
MODBUS protocol is used for integration of the controller into a building management system or for remote
monitoring via 3rd party monitoring tools.
MODBUS-RTU can be used on serial interfaces (via on board RS485 connector or via CM-RS232-485
communication module). The MODBUS-RTU server must be activated by switching the setpoint COM1
Mode (page 485) or COM2 Mode (page 487) or RS485 Mode (page 240) into the Modbus position. The
serial speed for MODBUS-RTU communication is adjusted by the setpoint COM1 MODBUS
Communication Speed (page 486) or COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed (page 488) or RS485
Modbus Speed (page 241).
MODBUS/TCP can be used on the Ethernet interface (CM3-Ethernet module is required). Up to 3 clients
can be connected simultaneously (MODBUS connection). The MODBUS/TCP server must be activated
by the setpoint MODBUS Server (page 520).
MODBUS, MODBUS/TCP protocol can be used simultaneously with Web connection and direct Ethernet /
AirGate connection.
IMPORTANT: Do not use setpoints for regulation purposes. Avoid fast periodical re-writing of any
setpoint. Use remote control registers instead.
Note: Modbus-RTU serial communication mode is 8-N-1 – startbit 1, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stopbit.
Address space
The object address space is separated into several areas as described in the table below. The actual
mapping of specific controller data objects to specific Modbus addresses, which depends on configuration,
can be exported into a text file from the appropriate controller archive using InteliConfig. There are several
special registers with fixed meaning (reserved registers) which are listed in a separate table in this chapter.
MODBUS MODICON object

Meaning Access MODBUS function
address type
0000 .. Binary
Read only Discrete Inputs Read: 01, 02
0999 objects
1000 ..
Values Read only Input Registers Read: 03, 04
2999
3000 .. Read: 03, 04
Setpoints Read/Write Holding Registers
3999 Write: 06, 16
4200 .. Reserved Read/Write, depends on Input Registers Read: 03, 04
7167 registers each specific register Holding Registers Write: 06, 16

Configurable part of the map
The contents of the configurable part of the map is specified in the configuration table. It can be changed by
the customer as well as exported in a human-readable format using the configuration tool.
Discrete inputs
The discrete inputs are read-only objects located in the address range 0-999. The source ComAp objects for
discrete inputs can be:
Single bit of any value of any binary type.
Protection (e.g. 2nd-level protection of the state "xyz"). The input is high if the protection is active
regardless of if it is configured or not.
Input registers
The input registers are read-only numeric values located in the address range 1000-2999. The source
ComAp objects can be:
Any controller value of any data type. The mapping of the particular data type into registers is described in
Mapping data types to registers (page 201).
Holding registers
The holding registers are read-write numeric values located in the address range 3000-3999. The source
ComAp objects can be:
Any controller setpoint of a primitive data type. The mapping of the particular data type into registers is
described in Mapping data types to registers (page 201).
Default contents of the configurable part

The default map of Modbus objects contain following items. This map expects the PC tool does have the
function allowing the user to modify the map.
Object type Starting object address Controller object

Physical binary inputs CU + configured *) modules
Logical binary outputs
Discrete inputs 0000 Protections on binary inputs CU + configured *) modules
Protections on analog inputs CU + configured *) modules
All Built-in fixed protections
Input registers 1000 All configured *) visible values
Holding registers 3000 None
Note: *)
Present in the default configuration.
IMPORTANT: The default map of a particular firmware branch and application must not change
when a new version of the firmware is created. If new objects are added they must be added to
free positions so, that the previous content is not affected.
IMPORTANT: The default map of a particular firmware branch must not contain different values in
different applications at the same Modbus address. It means if a ComAp object does not make
sense in some application type the respective Modbus address must be left unassigned.

Mapping data types to registers
As there are multiple data types in the controller but only one data type in MODBUS (the register, which is 2
byte long), a mapping table is necessary to compose and decompose the MODBUS messages correctly.
Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB = sign extension
Integer8 1-byte signed integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = 0
Unsigned8 1-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = value, MSB
LSB = value, LSB
MSB = value, MSB
LSB = value, LSB
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB = 0
Binary8 8-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB = value, bits 8-15
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB1 = value, bits 24-31
LSB1 = value, bits 16-23
MSB2 = value, bits 8-15
LSB2 = value, bits 0-7
MSB = 0
Char 1-byte ASCII character 1
LSB = ASCII value of the character
MSB = 0
StrList Index into a list of strings 1
LSB = index into the list
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
ShortStr 8 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 15 ASCII characters.
…
LongStr Zero-terminated string of 16 MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character

Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 31 ASCII characters.
…
MSB1 = BCD (dd)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Date Date (dd-mm-yy) 2
MSB2 = BCD (yy)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = BCD (hh)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Time Time (hh-mm-ss) 2
MSB2 = BCD (ss)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = reserved for future use
LSB1 = reserved for future use
MSB2 = Alarm level *)
LSB2 = Alarm status **)
Alarm An item of the Alarmlist 27 MSB3 = alarm string ***)
LSB3 = alarm string
MSB4 = alarm string
LSB5 = alarm string
…
Note:
*) 1 .. level 1 (yellow), 2 .. level 2 (red), 3 .. sensor fail
**) Bit0 – alarm is active, Bit1 – alarm is confirmed
***) String encoding is UTF-8
Error codes (exception codes)

An exception code is returned by the controller (server) if the query sent from the client could not be
completed successfully.
The controller responds with the error codes in as follows:
01 – Illegal function is returned if an incompatible type of operation is applied for a specific object, e.g. if
function 03 is applied to a binary object.
02 – illegal address is returned if the client tries to perform an operation with an object address that is not
related to any existing object or that is located inside an object which is composed by multiple addresses
(registers).
04 – device error is returned in all other erroneous situations. More detailed specification of the problem
can be obtained by reading the registers 4205 – 4206.

Reserved registers
There are several registers with specific meanings. These registers are available in all controllers regardless
of the configuration.
Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4200 - 4201 2 read/write Time RTC Time in BCD code
4202 - 4203 2 read/write Date RTC Date in BCD code
Index of the language that is used for
4204 1 read/write Unsigned8 text data provided by MODBUS (e.g.
alarmlist messages).
Last application error. To be read after
the device returns the exception code
4205 - 4206 2 read Unsigned32
04. It contains specific information
about the error.
Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
Reading: command return value
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
4010 1 - - Not implemented
4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password
4212 - 4213 2 read Unsigned32 Communication status
4214 1 read Unsigned8 Number of items in the Alarmlist
4215 - 4241 27 read Alarm 1. record in alarm list

List of commands and arguments
"Commands" are used to invoke a specific action in the controller via the communication channel. The list of
available actions is in the table below. The general procedure of writing a command via Modbus is as follows:
1. Write the command argument into the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208). Use
function 16.
2. Write the command code into the register 44210 (register address 4209). Use function 6.
3. (Optional) Read the command return value from the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-
4208). Use function 3.
4. If the command was executed the return value is as listed in the table. If the command was accepted but
there was an error during execution the return value indicates the reason:
a. 0x00000001 – invalid argument
b. 0x00000002 – command refused (e.g. controller not in MAN, breaker cannot be closed in the specific
situation etc.)
Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start *) 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop *) 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE
Fault reset *) 0x01 0x08F70000 0x000008F8
Horn reset *) 0x01 0x04FB0000 0x000004FC
GCB toggle *) 0x02 0x11EE0000 0x000011EF
GCB on 0x02 0x11EF0000 0x000011F0
GCB off 0x02 0x11F00000 0x000011F1
MCB toggle *) 0x02 0x12ED0000 0x000012EE
MCB on 0x02 0x12EE0000 0x000012EF
MCB off 0x02 0x12EF0000 0x000012F0
Note: *)
This action is an equivalent of pressing the front panel button
Modbus Remote Start/Stop

There is possibility when the controller is in AUTO mode to activate functionality remote start/stop by writing
data FF00 into register 4700 applying function 5. The message Modbus Remote Start is written into history.
To deactivate Modbus remote start/stop write data 0000.

MODBUS examples
Modbus RTU examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from InteliConfig
Table: Values
Allowed Modbus functions: 03, 04
Register
Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
address
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O
Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 1D 00 01 15 3C
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 041Dhex = Number of registers CRC
1053dec
Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 F0 B8 00
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function 02hex = 2 bytes 00F0hex = CRC
read 240dec
We read a value 240 from register 01053. From the table of Modbus registers we get the dimension of read
value and "Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So the battery voltage is 24.0 V.

Reading Nominal power
Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register
address
Nominal
01227 9018 kW Integer 2 0 0 32767 Generator
Power

01 03 04 CC 00 01 45 05
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 04CChex = Number of registers CRC
1228dec

01 03 02 00 C8 B9 D2
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function 02hex = 2 bytes 00C8hex = CRC
read 200dec
Read nominal power is 200 kW.

Reading all binary inputs as Modbus register
Table: Values
Register
address
Binary Controller
01089 8235 Binary#2 2 0 - -
Inputs I/O

01 03 04 2C 00 01 44 F3
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 042Chex = Number of registers CRC
1068dec

01 03 02 00 12 38 49
Data
Controller Length of data
Modbus function 0012hex = CRC
address 02hex = 2 bytes read
00010010bin
Binary inputs is 00010010. This means Binary input 2 and binary input 5 are active.
Note: You can use Modbus function 4 instead of 3, the rest of the data remains the same (CRC differs).

Reading binary inputs as coil status.
Table: Binaries
Addresses Source Name of Bit Name
C.O.#
Modbus Addr. = Value Value Bit # Activated by protection Group
State #
Prot. Addr. = State Name of State (s):
00000 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 1 GCB Feedback Controller I/O
00001 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 2 MCB Feedback Controller I/O
00002 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 3 Emergency Stop Controller I/O
We will read state of MCB Feedback binary input.

01 01 00 01 00 01 AC 0A
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 0001hex = Number of registers CRC
0001dec

01 01 01 01 90 48
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
01hex = 1 byte read 01hex = active
The read data is 01. This means this binary input is active.
Note: You can use Modbus function 2 instead of 1, the rest of the data remains the same (CRC differs).

Nominal Power – writing
Table: Setpoints
Allowed Modbus functions: 03, 04, 06, 16
Register
address
Nominal Basic
03008 8276 kW Unsigned 2 0 1 5000
Power Settings

01 06 0B C0 00 64 8A 39
Data
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 0064hex = CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec
100dec

01 06 0B C0 00 00 8B D2
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec
Written setpoint nominal power is 100 kW.

CRC calculation
The check field allows the receiver to check the validity of the message. The check field value is the Cyclical
16 15 2
Redundancy Check (CRC) based on the polynomial x +x +x +1. CRC is counted from all message bytes
preceding the check field.
Online CRC calculator: http://www.lammertbies.nl/comm/info/crc-calculation.html Use CRC-16 (Modbus)
Write LSB first.
For writing nominal power 100 kW the CRC is calculated from this data: 01060BC00064hex

Modbus TCP examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Table: Values
Register
address
BatteryVoltag Controller
01053 8213 V Integer 2 1 0 400
e I/O

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 04 1D 00 01
Register
transaction protocol Length of
Controller Modbus address Number of
identifier identifier data bytes
address function 041Dhex = registers
(usually 0) (usually 0) following
1053dec

00 00 00 00 00 05 01 03 02 00 F0
Length of
transaction protocol Length of Data
Controller Modbus data
identifier identifier data bytes 00F0hex =
address function 02hex = 2
(usually 0) (usually 0) following 240dec
bytes read
We read a value of 240 from register 01053. From the table of Modbus registers we get the dimension of read
value and "Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So the battery voltage is 24.0 V.
6 back to Communication

7 Technical data
Power supply Current measurement
Power supply range 8-36 VDC Measurement inputs 3ph Gen current
Power consumption Measurement range 5A

3.5 W
(without modules) Max. allowed current 10 A
RTC battery Replaceable (3 V) Accuracy ±20 mA for 0-2 A; 1 % of value for 2-5 A
Fusing power 4 A w/o BOUT consumption Input impedance <0.1 Ω
E-Stop fusing 10 A
E-Stop
Max. Power Dissipation 9W
Dedicated terminal for safe E-Stop input.
Operating conditions Physical supply for binary outputs 1 & 2.
Protection degree (front Binary inputs

IP 65
panel)
Number 8
Operating temperature -20 ˚C to +70 ˚C
0-2 VDC close contact
Operating temperature Close/Open indication
-40 ˚C to +70 ˚C 6-36 VDC open contact
for Low Temp. version
Storage temperature -30 ˚C to +80 ˚C Binary outputs
95 % non-condensing Number 8
Operating humidity
(EN 60068-2-30) BO1,2=5 A (60 °C); BO1,2=4 A (70 °C),
Max. current
5-25 Hz, ± 1.6 mm BO3-8=0.5 A
Vibration
25-100 Hz, a = 4 g Switching to positive supply terminal
2
Shocks a = 500 m/s
Analog inputs
Surrounding air temperature rating 70 °C
Suitable for pollution degree 2 Number 4, switchable (R/U/I)
Range R = 0-2500 Ω; U = 0-10 V; I = 0-20 mA
D+
R: ±2 % from value ±5 Ω in range 0-250 Ω
Max. output current 250 mA R: ±4 % from value in range 250 Ω-2500 Ω
Accuracy
Charging fail threshold Adjustable U: 1 % from value ±100 mV
I: 1 % from value ±0.2 mA
Voltage measurement
Measurement inputs 3ph-n Gen voltage , 3ph-n Mains +5 V Power supply output
10-277 V AC / 10-480 V AC (EU) Max. current 45 mA
Measurement range 10-346 V AC / 10-600 V AC
Magnetic pickup
(US/Canada)
Linear measurement 350 V AC Ph-N 4 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 4 Hz to 1 kHz

Voltage input
and protection range 660 V AC Ph-Ph 6 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 1 to 5 kHz
range
1% 10 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 5 to 10 kHz
Accuracy
Frequency range 30-70 Hz (accuracy 0.1 Hz) Frequency input
4 Hz to 10 kHz
range
Input impedance 0.72 MΩ ph-ph , 0.36 MΩ ph-n
Frequency
Display measurement 0.2 % from measured value
tolerance
Type Build-in monochromatic 3.2"
Resolution 132 × 64 px 6 back to Table of contents

Communications
USB Device Non-isolated type B connector
USB Host Non-isolated type A connector
RS485 Isolated
Non-isolated, 250 / 50 kbps,
CAN 1
Terminator impedance 120 Ω

8 Appendix
8.1 Controller objects 212
8.2 Alarms 713
8.3 Modules 782
8.1 Controller objects

8.1.1 List of controller objects types
8.1.2 Setpoints 212
8.1.3 Values 548
8.1.4 Logical binary inputs 607
8.1.5 Logical binary outputs 637
8.1.6 Logical analog inputs 690
8.1.7 PLC 696
8.1.2 Setpoints
What setpoints are:
Setpoints are analog, binary or special data objects which are used for adjusting the controller to the specific
environment. Setpoints are organized into groups according to their meaning. Setpoints can be adjusted from
the controller front panel, PC, MODBUS, etc.
All setpoints can be protected by a password against unauthorized changes. Password protection can be
assigned to the setpoints during the configuration procedure.
IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoints repeatedly (e.g. power control from a PLC by repeated
writing of baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory, which
5
can be overwritten up to 10 times without risk of damage or data loss, but it may become
damaged, when the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded.
For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of setpoints (page 213).

List of setpoints
Group: Basic settings 222 Run Hours Source 237

Subgroup: Name 222 User Logging Record 237
Gen-Set Name 222 Mains Voltage Detection in MRS 238
Subgroup: Power settings 222 Subgroup: Phase Rotation 238
Nominal Power 222 Phase Rotation 238
Nominal Power Split Phase 223 Subgroup: HMI Settings 239
Subgroup: Current settings 223 Main Screen Line 1 239
Nominal Current 223 Main Screen Line 2 239
Gen CT Ratio Prim 224 Screen Filter 239
Gen CT Ratio Sec 224 Group: Communication Settings 240
CT Location 225 Subgroup: Controller Address 240
Subgroup: Voltage settings 225 Controller Address 240
Connection type 225 Subgroup: RS485 Settings 240
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 227 RS485 Mode 240
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 227 RS485 Communication Speed 241
Nominal Voltage 3Ph Low Y 228 RS485 Modbus Speed 241
Nominal Voltage 3Ph High Y 228 RS485 Modbus Mode 242
Nominal Voltage High Leg D 229 Group: Engine settings 242
Nominal Voltage SplitPhase 229 Subgroup: Starting 242
Nominal Voltage MonoPhase 230 Fuel Solenoid 242
Gen VT Ratio 230 Dual Starter Sequence 243
Mains VT Ratio 230 Cranking Attempts 243
Subgroup: Frequency settings 231 Maximum Cranking Time 244
Nominal Frequency 231 Cranking Fail Pause 244
Gear Teeth 231 Prestart Time 245
Nominal RPM 232 Starting RPM 245
Subgroup: Controller settings 232 Starting Oil Pressure 246
Controller Mode 232 Glow Plugs Time 246
Power On Mode 233 Idle RPM 247
Default Application Select 233 Subgroup: Choke 247
GCB Control Mode 233 Choke Function 247
Reset To Manual 234 Choke Time 248
Backlight Timeout 235 Choke Start Temp 249
Horn Timeout 235 Choke Increment 250
Fail Safe Binary State 236 Choke Voltage 251
Zero Power Mode 236 Choke Lead 252
Subgroup: Starting Timers 253

Fuel Solenoid Lead 253 Fuel Pump On 270
Idle Time 253 Fuel Pump Off 271
Minimal Stabilization Time 255 Transfer Wrn Delay 272
Maximal Stabilization Time 256 Subgroup: Battery Protections 272
Run Only Block Delay 257 Battery Undervoltage 272
Sd Ventilation Time 257 Battery Overvoltage 273
Subgroup: Stopping 258 Battery <> Voltage Delay 273
Cooling Speed 258 Battery Charger Fail Delay 273
Subgroup: Stopping Timers 258 Subgroup: Pulse Counters 274
Cooling Time 258 Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 274
Stop Time 258 Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 274
After Cooling Time 260 Subgroup: Ventilation 275
Subgroup: D+ Function 260 Ventilation Pulse Time 275
D+ Function 260 Subgroup: ECU Settings 275
D+ Threshold 262 ECU Speed Adjustment 275
D+ Delay 262 Manual ECU Activation Timeout 276
D+ Alarm Type 262 Group: Maintenance Timers 276
Subgroup: Engine Protections 263 Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 1 276
Overspeed Sd 263 Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours 276
Starting Overspeed Sd 263 Maintenance Timer 1 Interval 277
Starting Overspeed Time 264 Maintenance Timer 1 Protection 277
Starting Overspeed Protection 264 Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 2 278
Underspeed Sd 265 Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours 278
Oil Pressure Delay 265 Maintenance Timer 2 Interval 278
Oil Pressure Wrn 265 Maintenance Timer 2 Protection 279
Oil Pressure Sd 266 Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 3 279
Coolant Temp Delay 266 Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours 279
Coolant Temp Wrn 266 Maintenance Timer 3 Interval 280
Coolant Temp BOC 267 Maintenance Timer 3 Protection 280
Coolant Temp Low Delay 267 Group: Generator settings 281
Coolant Temp Low Wrn 267 Subgroup: Overload Protection 281
Fuel Level Delay 268 Overload BOC 281
Fuel Level Wrn 268 Overload Wrn 281
Fuel Level BOC 268 Overload Delay 282
Subgroup: Fuel Theft Protection 269 Subgroup: Current Protection 282
Fuel Tank Volume 269 Short Circuit BOC 282
Maximal Fuel Drop 269 Short Circuit BOC Delay 282
Maximal Fuel Drop Delay 269 IDMT Overcurrent Delay 283
Subgroup: Fuel Pump 270 Current Unbalance BOC 284

Current Unbalance BOC Delay 284 MCB Close Delay 297
Subgroup: Voltage Protection 285 Transfer Delay 297
Generator Overvoltage Sd 285 Subgroup: Mains Voltage Limits 299
Generator Overvoltage Wrn 285 Mains Overvoltage 299
Generator Undervoltage Wrn 286 Mains Overvoltage Hys 300
Generator Undervoltage BOC 286 Mains Undervoltage 301
Generator <> Voltage Delay 287 Mains Undervoltage Hys 302
Voltage Unbalance BOC 287 Mains Overvoltage Delay 303
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay 287 Mains Undervoltage Delay 303
Subgroup: Frequency Protection 288 Mains Voltage Unbalance 303
Generator Overfrequency BOC 288 Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay 304
Generator Overfrequency Wrn 288 Subgroup: Mains Frequency Limits 304
Generator Underfrequency Wrn 288 Mains Overfrequency 304
Generator Underfrequency BOC 289 Mains Overfrequency Hys 305
Generator <> Frequency Delay 289 Mains Underfrequency 306
Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection 290 Mains Underfrequency Hys 307
Reverse Power Level 290 Mains < > Frequency Delay 308
Reverse Power Delay 290 Subgroup: AMF Settings 308
Group: Protections 291 Return From Island 308
Subgroup: Overload Protection 291 MCB Logic 308
Overload Protection 291 MCB Opens On 310
Subgroup: Current Protection 291 Group: Dual operation 310
IDMT Overcurrent Protection 291 Subgroup: Dual Operation 310
Current Unbalance Protection 292 Running Hours Max Difference 310
Subgroup: Voltage Protection 292 Running Hours Base 311
Generator <> Voltage Protection 292 Swap Gen-sets 311
Voltage Unbalance Protection 293 Master Error Protection 312
Subgroup: Frequency Protection 293 Slave Error Protection 312
Generator Frequency Protection 293 Transfer Delay 312
Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection 294 Group: Load Management 315
Reverse Power Protection 294 Subgroup: Load Shedding 315
Subgroup: Speed Protection 294 Load Shedding Active 315
Underspeed Protection 294 Load Shedding Level 315
Subgroup: Phase Rotation Protection 295 Load Shedding Delay 316
Phase Rotation Protection 295 Subgroup: Load Reconnection Settings 316
Group: Mains Settings 296 Load Reconnection Level 316

Subgroup: AMF Timers 296 Load Reconnection Delay 317
Emergency Start Delay 296 Auto Load Reconnection 317
Mains Return Delay 296 Subgroup: Dummy Load 318

Dummy Load Active 318 Time Stamp Period 344
Dummy Load On 318 DST Switching Mode 345
Dummy Load On Delay 319 DST Period Rule 346
Dummy Load Off 319 Time Mode 346
Dummy Load Off Delay 319 Subgroup: Timer 1 347
Group: User Buttons 320 Timer 1 Function 347
Subgroup: User Buttons 320 Timer 1 Setup 348
User Button 1 320 Timer 1 First Occur. Date 348
User Button 2 321 Timer 1 First Occur. Time 349
User Button 3 322 Timer 1 Duration 349
User Button 4 323 Timer 1 Repetition 349
User Button 5 324 Timer 1 Repeated 350
User Button 6 325 Timer 1 Repeat Day 350
User Button 7 326 Timer 1 Day 351
User Button 8 327 Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week 351
User Button 9 328 Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month 351
User Button 10 329 Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month 352
User Button 11 330 Timer 1 Refresh Period 353
User Button 12 331 Timer 1 Weekends 354
User Button 13 332 Subgroup: Timer 2 355
User Button 14 333 Timer 2 Function 355
User Button 15 334 Timer 2 Setup 356
User Button 16 335 Timer 2 First Occur. Date 356
Group: Analog Switches 336 Timer 2 First Occur. Time 357
Subgroup: Analog Switches 1 336 Timer 2 Duration 357
AIN Switch01 On 336 Timer 2 Repetition 357
AIN Switch01 Off 337 Timer 2 Repeated 358
Subgroup: Analog Switches 2 338 Timer 2 Repeat Day 358
AIN Switch02 On 338 Timer 2 Day 359
AIN Switch02 Off 339 Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week 359
Subgroup: Analog Switches 3 340 Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month 359
AIN Switch03 On 340 Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month 360
AIN Switch03 Off 341 Timer 2 Refresh Period 361
Subgroup: Analog Switches 4 342 Timer 2 Weekends 362
AIN Switch04 On 342 Subgroup: Timer 3 363
AIN Switch04 Off 343 Timer 3 Function 363
Group: Scheduler 343 Timer 3 Setup 364
Subgroup: Time & Date 343 Timer 3 First Occur. Date 364
Time 343 Timer 3 First Occur. Time 365
Date 344

Timer 3 Duration 365 Timer 5 Weekends 386
Timer 3 Repetition 365 Subgroup: Timer 6 387
Timer 3 Repeated 366 Timer 6 Function 387
Timer 3 Repeat Day 366 Timer 6 Setup 388
Timer 3 Day 367 Timer 6 First Occur. Date 388
Timer 3 Repeated Day In Week 367 Timer 6 First Occur. Time 388
Timer 3 Repeat Day In Month 367 Timer 6 Duration 389
Timer 3 Repeat Week In Month 368 Timer 6 Repetition 389
Timer 3 Refresh Period 369 Timer 6 Repeated 390
Timer 3 Weekends 370 Timer 6 Repeat Day 390
Subgroup: Timer 4 371 Timer 6 Day 391
Timer 4 Function 371 Timer 6 Repeated Day In Week 391
Timer 4 Setup 372 Timer 6 Repeat Day In Month 391
Timer 4 First Occur. Date 372 Timer 6 Repeat Week In Month 392
Timer 4 First Occur. Time 373 Timer 6 Refresh Period 393
Timer 4 Weekends 378 Timer 7 Repeat Day 398
Subgroup: Timer 5 379 Timer 7 Day 399

Timer 8 Weekends 410 Timer 11 Day 430
Subgroup: Timer 9 411 Timer 11 Repeat Day 431
Timer 9 Day 414 Timer 12 Setup 436
Timer 9 Repeat Day 415 Timer 12 First Occur. Date 436
Timer 10 Day 422 Timer 13 Setup 444
Timer 10 Repeat Day 423 Timer 13 First Occur. Date 444

Timer 14 Repetition 453 Subgroup: Rental Timers 474
Timer 14 Repeated 454 Rental Timer 1 474
Timer 14 Day 454 Rental Timer 1 Wrn 476
Timer 14 Repeat Day 455 Rental Timer 2 476
Timer 14 Repeated Day In Week 455 Rental Timer 2 Wrn 478
Timer 14 Repeat Day In Month 456 Rental Timer BOC 478
Timer 14 Repeat Week In Month 456 Group: Geo-Fencing 479
Timer 14 Refresh Period 457 Subgroup: Geo Fencing 479
Timer 14 Weekends 458 Geo-Fencing 479
Subgroup: Timer 15 459 Subgroup: Position 479
Timer 15 Function 459 Home Latitude 479
Timer 15 Setup 460 Home Longitude 480
Timer 15 First Occur. Date 460 Subgroup: Fence 1 481
Timer 15 First Occur. Time 460 Fence 1 Protection 481
Timer 15 Duration 461 Fence 1 Radius 482
Timer 15 Repetition 461 Fence 1 Delay 482
Timer 15 Repeated 462 Subgroup: Fence 2 483
Timer 15 Day 462 Fence 2 Protection 483
Timer 15 Repeat Day 463 Fence 2 Radius 484
Timer 15 Repeated Day In Week 463 Fence 2 Delay 484
Timer 15 Repeat Day In Month 464 Group: Plug-In Modules 484
Timer 15 Repeat Week In Month 464 Subgroup: Slot A 484
Timer 15 Refresh Period 465 Slot A 484
Timer 15 Weekends 466 Subgroup: Slot B 485
Subgroup: Timer 16 467 Slot B 485
Timer 16 Function 467 Group: CM-RS232-485 485
Timer 16 Setup 468 Subgroup: COM1 Setting 485
Timer 16 First Occur. Date 468 COM1 Mode 485
Timer 16 First Occur. Time 468 COM1 Communication Speed 486

COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed 486

COM1 Modbus Mode 487 Event Message 503
Subgroup: COM2 Setting 487 Wrn Message 503
COM2 Mode 487 BOC Message 504
COM2 Communication Speed 487 Sd Message 504
COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed 488 Telephone Number 1 505
COM2 Modbus Mode 488 Telephone Number 2 505
Group: CM-4G-GPS 489 Telephone Number 3 506
Subgroup: Cellular Interface 489 Telephone Number 4 506
Internet Connection 489 Telephone Number 5 507
Network Mode 489 Telephone Number 6 507
Access Point Name 489 Telephone Number 7 508
Connection Check IP1 490 Telephone Number 8 508
Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings 493 Subgroup: GPS Settings 510
DNS Mode 493 GPS Tracking 510
DNS IP Address 1 493 Subgroup: RTC Synchronization 510
DNS IP Address 2 494 NTP Clock Sync 510
IP Firewall 494 NTP Server 511
Subgroup: AirGate Settings 495 GPS Clock Sync 511
AirGate Connection 495 Time Zone 512
AirGate Address 495 Group: CM-Ethernet 513
Airgate Port 496 Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings 513
Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings 496 IP Address Mode 513
Direct Connection 496 IP Address 514
Direct Connection Port 497 Subnet Mask 514
ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout 497 Gateway IP 515
Subgroup: E-mail Settings 498 DNS Mode 515
SMTP Server Address 498 DNS IP Address 1 516
SMTP Sender Address 498 DNS IP Address 2 516
SMTP User Name 499 IP Firewall 517
SMTP User Password 499 Subgroup: AirGate Settings 517
SMTP Encryption 500 AirGate Connection 517
Email Address 1 500 AirGate Address 518
Email Address 2 501 AirGate Port 518
Email Address 3 501 Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings 519
Email Address 4 502 Direct Connection 519
Subgroup: Message Settings 502 Direct Connection Port 519
E-mail/SMS Language 502 ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout 520

Subgroup: MODBUS Settings 520 Nominal Frequency 1 534
MODBUS Server 520 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 534
MODBUS Client Inactivity Timeout 520 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 534
Subgroup: SNMP Settings 521 Nominal Current 1 535
SNMP Agent 521 Connection Type 1 535
SNMP Trap Format 521 ECU Speed Adjustment 1 537
SNMP Traps IP Address 1 521 Nominal Power 1 537
SNMP Traps IP Address 2 522 Nominal Power Split Phase 1 538
SNMP RD Community String 522 Subgroup: Configuration 2 538
SNMP WR Community String 522 Nominal RPM 2 538
Subgroup: E-mail Settings 523 Nominal Frequency 2 539
SMTP Server Address 523 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 539
SMTP Sender Address 523 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 539
SMTP UserName 524 Nominal Current 2 540
SMTP User Password 524 Connection type 2 540
SMTP Encryption 525 ECU Speed Adjustment 2 542
Email Address 1 525 Nominal Power 2 542
Email Address 2 526 Nominal Power Split Phase 2 543
Email Address 3 526 Subgroup: Configuration 3 543
Email Address 4 527 Nominal RPM 3 543
Subgroup: Messages Settings 527 Nominal Frequency 3 544
BOC Message 527 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 544
E-mail/SMS Language 528 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 544
Event Message 528 Nominal Current 3 545
Sd Message 529 Connection type 3 545
Wrn Message 529 ECU Speed Adjustment 3 547
Subgroup: NTP Settings 530 Nominal Power 3 547
NTP Clock Synchronization 530 Nominal Power Split Phase 3 548
NTP Server 530 6 back to Controller objects
Time Zone 531
Group: EM-BIO8-EFCP 531
Subgroup: EFCP Settings 531
Earth Fault Current Protection 531
Earth Fault Delay 532
Earth Fault CT Input Range 532
Earth Fault CT Ratio 532
Group: Alternate Config 533
Subgroup: Configuration 1 533
Nominal RPM 1 533

Group: Basic settings
Subgroup: Name
Gen-Set Name
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value InteliLite4 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8637 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User defined name, used for the controller identification at remote phone or mobile connection. Gen-set
Name is maximally 15 characters long and can be entered using InteliConfig or from controller's
configuration menu.
Note: If the Gen-set Name is "TurboRunHours", the running hours will be counted faster – 1 minute in
real will represent 1 hour.
6 back to List of setpoints
Subgroup: Power settings
Nominal Power

Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 281) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 225) is adjusted to Monophase or
Splitphase or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as
3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Power 1 (page
537), Nominal Power 2 (page 542) and Nominal Power 3 (page 547).

Nominal Power Split Phase

Step 1 kW
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 225)
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload
BOC (page 281) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 225) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or Splitphase.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Power Split Phase
1 (page 538), Nominal Power Split Phase 2 (page 543) and Nominal Power Split Phase 3 (page
548).
Subgroup: Current settings
Nominal Current

Range [units] 1 .. 65 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 225).
Description
It is current limit for mains current protections and means maximal continuous mains current. Nominal
Current can be different from mains rated current value.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Current 1 (page
535), Nominal Current 2 (page 540) and Nominal Current 3 (page 545).

Gen CT Ratio Prim

Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [A]
Default value 500 A Alternative config NO
Step 1A
Description
Current transformers ratio of Gen-set.
Gen CT Ratio Sec

Range [units] - [/1A / /5A]
Default value /5A Alternative config NO
Step -
Description
Current transformers ratio of Gen-set.

CT Location

Range [units] Load / Gen-set / None [-]
Default value Gen-set Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Config level Advanced
Description
This setpoint adjusts position of current measurement.
Load Current CT's are physically placed on Load (typically between GCB and MCB).
Gen-set Current CT's are physically placed on Gen-set (typically before GCB).
None There are no current CT's.
When option None is selected, following objects are hidden/changed:

Current screen is hidden
Generator Power screen is hidden
Statistics screens – values Gen-set kWh, Gen-set kVArh, Mains kWh and Mains kWArh are hidden
Main screen – kW meter is replaced by generator voltage meter
Generator L1-N voltage is displayed for Monopahse, Splitphase L1L2, Splitphase L1L3 and
High Leg delta connection types
Generator L1-L2 voltage is displayed for 3ph3w and 3ph4w connection types
Group Load is hidden
Group Statistics – values Gen-set kWh, Gen-set kVArh, Mains kWh and Mains kWArh are hidden
Subgroup: Voltage settings
Connection type

Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High Leg D /
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N
1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
Split Phase
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
Autodetect
L1 >=100 V; L1 <=140 V
High Leg Delta L2 >=140 V
L3 >=100 V; L3 <=140 V
L1 <=160 V
3Ph Low Y L2 <=160 V
L3 <=160 V
L1 >160 V
3Ph High Y L2 >160 V
L3 >160 V
L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L3 L2 <= 20 V
L3 >=100 V

L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L2 L2 >= 100 V
L3 <= 20 V
L1 >=100 V
Mono Phase L2 <= 20 V
L3 <= 20 V
Voltage Autodetect shutdown
Nominal Voltage Ph-N

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Description
Nominal voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1
(page 534), Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page 539) and Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page 544).
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph

Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1
(page 534), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page 539) and Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page 544).

Nominal Voltage 3Ph Low Y

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Visible if one of the three Connection type (page 225) Setpoints is set to
Setpoint visibility
Autodetect.
Description
This setting is used as phase-neutral Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 227) by the voltage autodetect
function, if detected Connection type (page 225) is 3Ph Low Y (controller can not distinguish between
the 4 wire and 3 wire connection), detected phase-phase voltage is lower than 300 V in all three phases
and phase-neutral voltage is lower than or equal to 160 V in all three phases.
Nominal Voltage 3Ph High Y

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility
Autodetect.
Description
function, if detected Connection type (page 225) is 3Ph High Y, detected phase-phase voltage is higher
than or equal to 300 V in all three phases and phase-neutral voltage is higher than 160 V in all three
phases.

Nominal Voltage High Leg D

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility
Autodetect.
Description
function, if detected Connection type (page 225) is High Leg D. Set this setpoint to 120 V with high leg
delta system, which works with the high leg voltage 208 V (L2-N).
Nominal Voltage SplitPhase

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility
Autodetect.
Description
function, if detected Connection type (page 225) is SplPhL1L2 or SplPhL1L3.

Nominal Voltage MonoPhase

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility
Autodetect.
Description
function, if detected Connection type (page 225) is MonoPhase.
Gen VT Ratio

Range [units] 0.1 .. 500.0 [V/V]
Default value 1.0 V/V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V/V
Description
Generator voltage potential transformers ratio. If no VTs are used, adjust this setpoint to 1.
Mains VT Ratio

Range [units] 0.1 .. 500.0 [V/V]
Default value 1.0 V/V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V/V
Comm object 9580 Related applications AMF
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 233)
Description
Mains voltage potential transformers ratio. If no VTs are used, adjust the setpoint to 1.

Subgroup: Frequency settings
Nominal Frequency

Range [units] 30 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Frequency 1 (page
534), Nominal Frequency 2 (page 539) and Nominal Frequency 3 (page 544).
Gear Teeth

Range [units] FGen->RPM / 1 .. 500 [-]
Default value FGen->RPM Alternative config NO
Step 1
Description
Number of teeth on the engine flywheel where the pick-up is installed. Set to zero if no pick-up is used and
the Engine speed will be counted from the generator frequency.
Note: If no pickup is used, the D+ or W terminal should be used to prevent possible overcranking,
which can occur if at least 25% of nominal generator voltage is not present immediately after
exceeding firing speed.

Nominal RPM

Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM – revolutions per minute).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal RPM 1 (page 533),
Nominal RPM 2 (page 538) and Nominal RPM 3 (page 543).
Subgroup: Controller settings
Controller Mode

Range [units] OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST [-]
Default value OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint can be used for changing the Controller mode remotely, e.g. via Modbus. Use the mode
selector on the main screen for changing the mode from the front panel. Use mode selector in the control
window for changing the mode from InteliConfig.

Power On Mode

Range [units] Previous / OFF [-]
Default value Previous Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts controller mode after power on of controller.
Previous When controller is power on, controller is switched to last mode before power off.
OFF When controller is power on, controller is switched to OFF Mode.
Note: Remote modes – In case that some LBI remote mode is activated during power on of controller
than this LBI has higher priority than this setpoint – controller mode is forced into mode selected via
LBI. After deactivation of LBI, controller is switched into value selected via setpoint Power On Mode
Default Application Select

Range [units] AMF / MRS [-]
Default value AMF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint defines the controller application.
AMF Normal AMF operation

MRS When MRS mode is selected the controller will not perform AMF functions anymore.
MCB button will be inactive and also mains measurement and protections will be
disabled. The controller will keep TEST mode and the Gen-set in AUTO mode will be
able to start by REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 632) binary input.
GCB Control Mode

Range [units] Internal / External / No Button [-]
Default value Internal Alternative config YES

Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Only if Controller Mode (page 232) = GCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts control mode of GCB.
The breaker is controlled only from controller. Any unexpected change of GCB
FEEDBACK (PAGE 623) causes Sd GCB Fail (page 765) immediately.
Internal
Incorrect reaction of the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 623) on internal GCB Close/Open
command causes Sd GCB Fail (page 765)
Controller does not control the GCB at all. The GCB is controlled externally, when
the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 623) get changed, then the event "GCB Opened" or
"GCB Closed" is recorded to the history log.
Controller always accept the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 623) without of issuing any
External alarm.
When the Sd protection shuts down the engine, the GCB stays closed. The BOC
protection does not open the GCB, controller goes to cooling when the BOC
protection is tripped (GCB stays closed until opened externally).
IMPORTANT: Gen-set with closed GCB is not blocked against starting.
GCB button and LBI GCB button are deactivated.
When selected in AMF mode, there is active warning Wrn Wrong GCB
Control Mode (page 753)
No Button The behavior of the controller is the same as GCB Control Mode would be
switched to Internal
When selected in MRS mode and MAN mode the GCB is closed
automatically the same way as in Auto mode – no manual command needed.
Reset To Manual

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
If this function is enabled, the controller will switch automatically to MAN mode when there is a red alarm in
the alarm list and fault reset button is pressed. This is a safety function that prevents the Gen-set starting
again automatically in specific cases when fault reset button is pressed.

Backlight Timeout

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 255 [min]
Step 1 min
Description
The display backlight is switched off when this timer exceed. When setpoint is adjusted to disabled then
the display will be backlighted all the time.
Horn Timeout

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 600 s / Horn Reset [-]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Description
Setting of horn behavior.
Disabled Disabling the Horn sounding function
Timeout for HORN (PAGE 666) binary output. The HORN (PAGE 666) output is active
1 .. 600 [s]
when this timeout elapsed.
Horn reset LBO HORN (PAGE 666) is deactivated by Fault reset button or by Horn reset button.
Note: Horn timeout starts again from the beginning if a new alarm appears before previous Horn
timeout has elapsed.

Fail Safe Binary State

Range [units] Log0 / Log1 / Last valid state [-]
Default value Last valid state Alternative config NO
Step -
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of the controller when the received binary input values from CAN Extension
Module, EFCP Module and ECU modules are invalid due to the loss of communication with peripherals.
Log0 All invalid values are replaced by logical zero.

Log1 All invalid values are replaced by logical one.
Last Valid State All invalid values are replaced by the last valid state.
Zero Power Mode

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 360 [min]
Step 1 min
Description
The controller is switched to Zero Power Mode when there is no user interaction with the controller for the
preset time period. For the controller wake up press button Start or activate Binary Input 1. The controller
will not switch to Zero Power Mode if generator is running. In Zero Power Mode binary outputs go to high
impedance.
Note: Power consumption of controller in Zero Power Mode is 0 mA. Controller is internally
disconnected from power supply.
Note: While there is USB power present (USB cable plagued) the controller is able to turn off when
there is no user interaction but wake up is not possible. USB power has to be cut off (USB cable un-
plugged).

Run Hours Source

Range [units] AUTO / ECU / INTERNAL [-]
Default value AUTO Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint selects source of running hours.
AUTO If there is some ECU which send valid running hours, then this value is used.
Otherwise value from internal counter is used.
ECU Running hours are taken from ECU if ECU send valid data. It is not possible to set
and reset this value in statistics.
INTERNAL Running hours are taken from internal counter. It is possible to set and reset this
value in statistics.
Note: It is not necessary to restart controller when this setpoint is changed. Change of this setpoint is
applied immediately.
User Logging Record

Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoints enables / disables history records when any user is log in.
Every time user login/logout to the controller, there is a message: User with user index
Enabled
(n) logged in/out … written in the history.
Disabled Login/logout message is not written into history.

Mains Voltage Detection in MRS
Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Step [-]
Comm object 16070 Related applications MRS
Setpoint visibility Only in MRS application
Description
This setpoint enables/disables Wrn Mains Voltage Detected (page 753) alarm.
Normal behavior. Alarm Wrn Mains Voltage Detected (page 753) is active when
Enabled there is some voltage on Mains terminals in MRS Operation Mode and generator is
running.
Alarm Wrn Mains Voltage Detected (page 753) is not active when there is some
Disabled
voltage on Mains terminals in MRS Operation Mode and generator is running.
Subgroup: Phase Rotation
Phase Rotation

Range [units] Clockwise / Counterclockwise [-]
Default value Clockwise Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
This setpoint adjust the phase sequence of voltage terminals.
Note: This protection can be disabled by setpoint Phase Rotation Protection (page 295).

Subgroup: HMI Settings
Main Screen Line 1

Range [units] RPM / PF / Run Hours / ATT / AIN1 [-]
Default value PF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts line 1 on Main screen.
Main Screen Line 2

Range [units] RPM / PF / Run Hours / ATT / AIN1 [-]
Default value RPM Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts line 2 on Main screen.
Screen Filter

Range [units] Enable / Disabled [-]
Step [-]
Description
Every analog value showed on CU screen is filtered when setpoint is enabled.

Group: Communication Settings
Subgroup: Controller Address
Controller Address
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.4.0
Settings
Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Description
Controller identification number. It is possible to set controller address different from the default value (1)
so that more controllers can be interconnected (via RS485) and accessed e.g. from Modbus terminal.
Note: When opening connection to the controller it's address has to correspond with the setting in PC
tool.
Subgroup: RS485 Settings
RS485 Mode
Communication
Settings
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / Dual Master / Dual Slave [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Communication protocol switch for on-board RS485.
Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.
Dual Master Dual operation protocol – master function.
Dual Slave Dual operation protocol – slave function.

RS485 Communication Speed
Communication
Settings
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
If the direct mode is selected on on-board RS485, the direct communication speed of controller part of line
can be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.
Note: This speed is also used for communication during Dual Operation.
RS485 Modbus Speed
Communication
Settings
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Step [-]
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM1 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.

RS485 Modbus Mode
Communication
Settings
Range [units] 8N1 / 8N2 / 8E1 [-]
Default value 8N1 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts communication mode of Modbus-RTU.
Possible options
8N1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
8N2 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity
8E1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even parity
Group: Engine settings
Subgroup: Starting
Fuel Solenoid
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] Diesel / Gas [-]
Default value Diesel Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Determines behavior of the Binary output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658)
Diesel: Output is activated before binary output STARTER 1 (PAGE 682). Lead of output is
adjusted via setpoint Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 253). The output is deactivated if
Emergency Stop comes or Gen-set is stopped and in pause between repeated starts.
Gas: Output is activated together with binary output IGNITION (PAGE 667) if RPM is over the
30 RPM (fixed value). Output is deactivated after stop command or in pause between
repeated start.

Dual Starter Sequence

Range [units] Disabled / 1-2 / 11-22 / 111-222 [-]
Step -
Description
Setpoint is used to enable LBO STARTER 2 (PAGE 683) by choosing the predefined sequence.
Dual Starter Sequence options:
Disabled (Default)
1-2 – Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 683)
according to the order of option pattern 1-2.
11-22 – Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) then Starter 1 then
STARTER 2 (PAGE 683) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 683) according to the order of option pattern 11-22.
111-222 – Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) then Starter 1 then
Starter 1 then STARTER 2 (PAGE 683) then Starter 2 and then Starter 2 according to the order of
option pattern 111-222.
Cranking Attempts

Range [units] 1 .. 10 [-]
Step 1
Description
Maximal number of cranking attempts.

Maximum Cranking Time

Range [units] 1 .. 255 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Description
Maximum time limit of cranking time.
Cranking Fail Pause

DefaultFixed
8s Alternative config NO
value
Step 1s
Description
Pause between Cranking Attempts (page 243). PRESTART (PAGE 677) output is active in this pause until
Cranking Fail Pause elapses.

Prestart Time

Step 1s
Description
Time of closing of the PRESTART (PAGE 677) output prior to the engine start. Set to zero if you want to leave
the output PRESTART (PAGE 677) open.
Image 8.1 Prestart Time
Starting RPM

Range [units] 5 .. 50 [%]
Default value 25% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 232)
Description
This setpoint defines the "firing" speed level as percent value of the Nominal RPM (page 232). If this level
is exceeded the engine is considered as started.

Starting Oil Pressure

Range [units] Disabled / 0,1 .. 10,0 [bar]
Default value 4,5 bar Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 bar
Description
Oil pressure limit for starting. The controller will stop cranking (STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) goes OFF) if the oil
pressure rises above this limit.
Option Disabled – when this option is selected, Oil Pressure value (value from CU analog Oil Pressure,
value from ECU analog Oil pressure and state of binary input Oil Pressure) is not used for disengagement
of starter and for engine running evaluation.
IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.
Glow Plugs Time

Range [units] 0.0 .. Prestart Time (page 245) [s]
Default value 0.1 s Alternative config NO
Step 1.0 s
Description
This setpoint defines the time before starting when logical binary output GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 664) will be
active.

Idle RPM

Range [units] 100 .. 4000 [RPM]
Default value 900 RPM Alternative config NO
Step 1 RPM
Description
This setpoint adjusts idle speed of engine.
Subgroup: Choke
Choke Function

Range [units] Disabled /Fixed Time / Temp Based [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 647) is configured.
Description
This setpoint defines choke function behavior.
Disabled Choke function is disabled and logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE 647) is
activated under no circumstances.
Fixed Time Choke time is fixedly defined by Choke Time (page 248) setpoint.
Temp Based Choke time is calculated using actual engine (coolant) temperature. Setpoints
Choke Start Temp (page 249) and Choke Increment (page 250) are taken
into consideration.

Choke Time

Step 1s
Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 647) is configured and setpoint Choke Function
Setpoint visibility
(page 247) = Fixed Time.
Description
Defines time logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE 647) is activated for when fixed time is used. When
setpoint Choke Function (page 247) is set to Temp Based value, Choke Time value have no effect.
Note: If setpoint Choke Lead (page 252) is set to nonzero value, total time the CHOKE output is
activated still matches value set by Choke Time setpoint. This mean Choke Timeshould be longer than
Choke Leadto ensure expected Choke behavior.

Choke Start Temp

Range [units] -20,0 .. 80,0 [°C]
Default value 0,0 °C Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 °C
Setpoint visibility
(page 247) = Temp Based.
Description
This setpoint adjust the base temperature for Choke function. When temperature will be higher than this
setpoint, Choke Time will be always 0. When temperature will be lower than this setpoint, Choke Time will
be calculated by curve adjusted via setpoint Choke Increment (page 250). When setpoint Choke
Function (page 247) is set to Fixed Time value, setpoint Choke Start Temp has no effect.

Choke Increment

Range [units] 0,00 .. 20,00 [s/°C]
Default value 0,00 s/°C Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 s/°C
Setpoint visibility
(page 247) = Temp Based.
Description
This setpoint adjust the maximal time of activation of binary output CHOKE (PAGE 647). Calculated time
depends on engine (coolant) temperature. Setpoint adjust curve which is used for calculating actual
Choke Time. When setpoint Choke Function (page 247) is set to Fixed Time value, setpoint Choke
Increment has no effect.
Note: If setpoint Choke Lead (page 252) is set to nonzero value, total time the CHOKE output is
activated still matches calculated value (based on actual temperature and setpoints Choke Increment
and Choke Start Temp (page 249)) This mean that adjusted parameters should ensure that
calculated Choke Time will be longer than Choke Leadto ensure expected Choke behavior.

Choke Voltage

Range [units] Disabled / 1–100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint adjust threshold level for deactivation of CHOKE (PAGE 647) binary output. When generator
voltage is higher than this level, then logical binary output CHOKE is deactivated. In multiphase system it is
sufficient to deactivate CHOKE LBO when at least one voltage crosses this threshold. In case setpoint
Choke Voltage is set to Disabled value, no voltage is taken into account and CHOKE LBO isn't deactivated
on the voltage basis.

Choke Lead

Range [units] 0 .. Prestart Time [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjust the lead of logical binary output CHOKE. CHOKE (PAGE 647) is activated before logical
binary output STARTER 1 (PAGE 682).
Note: In case Choke Lead is longer than 8 s (cranking fail pause), Choke Lead will be limited to 8 s
(cranking fail pause time). This limitation is applied only for cranking fail pause, Choke Lead in Prestart
stays unchanged.

Subgroup: Starting Timers
Fuel Solenoid Lead

Range [units] 0,0 .. 25,0 [s]
Default value 0,5 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay between FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) and STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) logical binary outputs.FUEL
SOLENOID (PAGE 658) is active before STARTER 1 (PAGE 682). Lead time is adjusted via this setpoint.
Image 8.2 Fuel Solenoid Lead
Note: LBO PRESTART (PAGE 677) goes to logical zero when Fuel Solenoid Lead goes to logical one.
Note: This setpoint is used only for diesel Fuel Solenoid (page 242).
Idle Time

Step 1s
Description
Idle Time delay starts when RPM exceeds Starting RPM (page 245). Start fail is detected when during
Idle state RPM decreases below 2 RPM.
The output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 667) remains inactive during the idle period. Binary output Idle/Nominal

opens during Cooling period again. This output can be used for switching the governor between idle and
nominal speed.
Note: When controller is in the MAN mode, it is possible to finish the Idle Time count down by pushing
the Start button.
Image 8.3 Idle Time 1
Image 8.4 Idle Time 2

Minimal Stabilization Time

Range [units] 1 .. Maximal Stabilization Time (page 256) [s]
Step 1s
Description
When the Gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the controller will wait for a period
adjusted by this setpoint before closing GCB, even if the generator voltage and frequency are already in
limits.
Note: When starting the engine, setpoint should be set >300 s.
Image 8.5 Minimal Stabilization Time

Maximal Stabilization Time

Range [units] Minimal Stabilization Time (page 255) .. 3600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
When the Gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the generator voltage and frequency
must get within limits within this period of time, otherwise an appropriate shutdown alarm (generator
voltage and/or frequency) is issued.
Note: When starting the engine, setpoint should be set >300 s.
Image 8.6 Maximal Stabilization Time

Run Only Block Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 5.0 s Alternative config YES
Step 0.1 s
Description
During the start of the Gen-set, some engine protections have to be blocked (e.g. Oil pressure). The
protections are unblocked after the Protect Hold Off. The time starts after reaching Starting RPM.
The protection blocking is based on the operating state of the engine automat. Once the engine automat
reaches the state "Running" the protection with this blocking condition gets unblocked after delay Run
Only Block Delay.
Sd Ventilation Time

Step 1s
Description
In case Fuel Solenoid (page 242) is set to GAS, the Sd Ventilation Time adjusts the time of the starter to
be switched on for engine pre-ventilation in the case of a first start attempt after shutdown or controller
switch-on.

Subgroup: Stopping
Cooling Speed

Range [units] Idle / Nominal [-]
Default value Nominal Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Selects the function of the binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 667) during engine cooling state.
Idle Cooling is executed at Idle speed and generator protections are switched off.
Nominal Cooling is executed at Nominal speed and generator protections are active.
Note: When ECU is connected the predefined value 900 RPM for Idle speed is requested.
Note: Binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 667) must be configured and connected to speed governor.
Engine Idle speed must be adjusted on speed governor.
Subgroup: Stopping Timers
Cooling Time

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
Runtime of the unloaded Gen-set to cool the engine before stop.
Stop Time

Step 1s

Description
Under normal conditions the engine must certainly stop within this period after the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
658) has been de-energized and the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 684) energized. The Stop Solenoid output is
deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off.
Image 8.7 Stop Time 1
Image 8.8 Stop Time 2

After Cooling Time

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
Runtime of engine after cooling pump. Binary output COOLING PUMP (PAGE 647) is active when the engine
starts deactivates after timer set in this setpoint elapses (timer starts counting down as soon as engine
switches to stop phase).
Subgroup: D+ Function
D+ Function

Range [units] Enabled / ChargeFail / Disabled [-]
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of D+ terminal.
Enabled The D+ terminal is used for both functions – “running engine” detection and
charge fail detection.
ChargeFail The D+ terminal is used for charge fail detection only
Disabled The D+ terminal is not used.

Image 8.9 D+ Function 1
Image 8.10 D+ Function 2
Note: Delay of this function is adjusted via D+ Delay (page 262) setpoint, threshold of this function is
adjusted via D+ Level setpoint.

D+ Threshold

Range [units] 0..100 [%]
Default value 80 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Setpoint visibility Only if setpoint D+ Function (page 260) is not set to Disabled value.
Description
This setpoint adjusts threshold level for D+ Function (page 260).
D+ Delay

Range [units] 1..255 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjusts delay for D+ Function (page 260). This delay is used for:
Alarm Wrn Charging Alternator Fail (page 736).
For engine running condition – disengagement of starter
D+ Alarm Type

Range [units] No Protec/Wrn/Sd [-]
Default value Wrn Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts type of alarm Wrn Charging Alternator Fail (page 736).

Subgroup: Engine Protections
Overspeed Sd

Range [units] Underspeed Sd (page 265)50 .. 200 [%]
Description
Threshold for over speed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.
Starting Overspeed Sd

Range [units] 100 ..200 [%]
Step 1%
Description
The rise up threshold for overspeed protection. The time for which this level is accepted is defined as
Starting Overspeed Time (page 264). This period starts to be counted once the RPM exceeds the value
Starting RPM (page 245). The threshold Overspeed Sd (page 263) starts to be valid once this period
elapsed.
The type of reaction of the overspeed protection within the Starting Overspeed Time (page 264) is
defined by the setpoint Starting Overspeed Protection (page 264), so it is either considered as Sd
Overspeed or unsuccessful start attempt. Then the next start attempt is enabled once the engine was
stopped. History record Starting Overspeed should be written in this case.

Image 8.11 Staring speed overshoot › Ovespeed Sd
Image 8.12 Staring speed overshoot ‹ Ovespeed Sd
Starting Overspeed Time
Setpoint group Engine protection Related FW 1.4.0

Step 1s
Description
Time when Starting Overspeed Sd (page 263) level is used for overspeed protection. This time starts
countdown when starting RPM are reached.
Starting Overspeed Protection

Range [units] OverSpd Sd / NextStartAt [-]
Default value OverSpd Sd Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint allows user to chose which kind of protection will be triggered if speed limit is reached during
Starting Overspeed Time (page 264).

Sd overspeed option will result in controller shutting down the engine and displaying Sd Starting
Overspeed alarm and NextStartAt option will result in controller stopping the engine and trying to start
again. The number of attempts is defined by Cranking Attempts (page 243).
Underspeed Sd

Range [units] 0 .. Overspeed Sd (page 263) [%]
Description
Threshold for underspeed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.
Oil Pressure Delay
Setpoint group User Setpoints Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 3600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Wrn Oil Pressure (page 753)/Sd Oil Pressure (page 770) user protection.
Oil Pressure Wrn

Range [units] 0.0 .. 10.0 [bar]
Default value 2.0 bar Alternative config YES
Step 0.1 bar
Description
Threshold for Wrn Oil Pressure (page 753) user protection.

Oil Pressure Sd

Range [units] 0.0 .. 10.0 [bar]
Default value 1.0 bar Alternative config YES
Step 0.1 bar
Description
Threshold for Sd Oil Pressure (page 770) user protection.
Coolant Temp Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 3600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Wrn Coolant Temp (page 736)/BOC Coolant Temp (page 770) user protection.
Coolant Temp Wrn

Range [units] -16 .. 120 [°C]
Default value 80 °C Alternative config YES
Step 1 °C
Description
Threshold for Wrn Coolant Temp (page 736) user protection.

Coolant Temp BOC

Range [units] -16 .. 120 [°C]
Step 1 °C
Description
Threshold for BOC Coolant Temp (page 770) user protection.
Coolant Temp Low Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 3600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Wrn Coolant Temp Low (page 736) user protection.
Coolant Temp Low Wrn

Range [units] -16 .. 120 [°C]
Step 1 °C
Description
Threshold for Wrn Coolant Temp Low (page 736) user protection.

Fuel Level Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 3600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Wrn Fuel Level (page 736)/BOC Coolant Temp (page 770) user protection.
Fuel Level Wrn

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 20 % Alternative config YES
Step 1%
Description
Threshold for Wrn Fuel Level (page 736) user protection.
Fuel Level BOC

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Threshold for BOC Coolant Temp (page 770) user protection.

Subgroup: Fuel Theft Protection
Fuel Tank Volume

Range [units] 0 .. 10 000 [l]
Default value 200 l Alternative config NO
Step 1l
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 694) is or ECU is configured
Description
Define a capacity of Gen-set fuel tank.
Maximal Fuel Drop

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 50 [%/h]
Default value 25 %/h Alternative config NO
Step 1%/h
Description
Setpoint indicates the maximum allowable drop of fuel in fuel tank per running hour. When the engine is
not running the maximal allowed fuel drop-off is preset to 5% of total tank volume per hour.
Maximal Fuel Drop Delay

Step s
Description
When the value of fuel drop per hour is higher than Maximal Fuel Drop (page 269) this delay starts count
down. After count down of this delay alarm Wrn Fuel Theft (page 754) is activated.

Subgroup: Fuel Pump
Fuel Pump On

Range [units] 0 .. Fuel Pump Off (page 271) [%]
Step 1%
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 658) on.
Image 8.13 Fuel Pump On
IMPORTANT: When binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 621) is configured then binary
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 658) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Fuel Pump On and
Fuel Pump Off (page 271) are not evaluated!
Note: Value from analog input has higher priority than ECU.

Fuel Pump Off

Range [units] Fuel Pump On (page 270) .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 658) off.
Image 8.14 Fuel Pump Off
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 658) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Fuel Pump On (page
270) and Fuel Pump Off are not evaluated!
Note: Value from analog input has higher priority than ECU.

Transfer Wrn Delay

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 600 [s]
Step 1s
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 658) is configured
Description
If the controller does not see the fuel increase during fuel transfer within this time alarm AL Fuel Transfer
Failed (page 736) will be displayed and the FUEL PUMP (PAGE 658) will be turned off. Alarm AL Fuel
Transfer Failed (page 736) will be displayed but this alarm becomes immediately inactive and it will be
possible to delete this message by the Fault reset button. If the fault is deleted the controller will initiate the
transfer again.
Subgroup: Battery Protections
Battery Undervoltage

Range [units] 8.0 V .. Battery Overvoltage (page 273) [V]
Default value 18.0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V
Description
Warning threshold for low battery voltage.

Battery Overvoltage

Range [units] Battery Undervoltage (page 272) .. 40.0 [V]
Default value 36.0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V
Description
Warning threshold for high battery voltage.
Battery <> Voltage Delay

DefaultFixed
5s Alternative config NO
value
Step 1s
Description
Delay for Battery Undervoltage (page 272) and Battery Overvoltage (page 273) protection.
Battery Charger Fail Delay

Range [units] 0 .. 15 [min]
Default value 5 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Setpoint visibility Conditioned with LBI BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 614)
Description
Delay for LBI BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 614).

Subgroup: Pulse Counters
Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1

Range [units] 0 ... 65 000 [-]
Step 1
Setpoint visibility Only if LBI PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 628) is configured
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate of increasing of the Pulse Counter 1 function. The module counts pulses at
the input PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 628) and if the input pulses counter reaches value given by this
setpoint, the counter value Pulse Counter 1 (page 583) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is
reset to 0. Both counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2

Range [units] 0 ... 65 000 [-]
Step 1
Setpoint visibility Only if LBI PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 629) is configured
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate of increasing of the Pulse Counter 2 function. The module counts pulses at
the input PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 629) and if the input pulses counter reaches value given by this
setpoint, the counter value Pulse Counter 2 (page 583) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is
reset to 0. Both counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.

Subgroup: Ventilation
Ventilation Pulse Time

Range [units] 0–3600 [s]
Step 1s
Only when logical binary output VENTILATION ON PULSE (PAGE 689) or VENTILATION
Setpoint visibility
OFF PULSE (PAGE 689) is configured.
Description
This setpoint defines duration of pulse generated on logical binary outputs VENTILATION ON PULSE (PAGE
689) or VENTILATION OFF PULSE (PAGE 689) at the moment when logical binary output VENTILATION (PAGE
689) is activated or deactivated respectively.
Subgroup: ECU Settings
ECU Speed Adjustment

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50 %. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.

Manual ECU Activation Timeout

Step 1 min
Description
The setpoint allows user to set length of ECU manual activation in OFF mode. LBO ECU Power Relay is
activated by Start button. This LBO is active until Stop button is pressed, or until timeout elapses or until
mode is changed.
Group: Maintenance Timers
Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 1
Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
Setpoint group Maintenance Timers Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] 0 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Step 1h
Description
Maintenance timer counts down when engine is running. If it reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counts down to negative values. When the value 10 000 (Disabled) is set, the Maintenance function is
disabled and the counter value disappears from controllers statistics.
Reset of the timer can be done by adjusting this setpoint again.

Maintenance Timer 1 Interval

Range [units] 1 .. 36 [month] / Disabled
Step 1 month
Description
Maintenance timer counts down all the time, setting is done in months, but actual Maintenance Timer 1
Interval (page 579) value is displayed and counted in days. If it reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the
timer still counts down to negative values. When the value 37 (Disabled) is set, then the maintenance
function is disabled and counter does not count and the counter value disappears from controllers
statistics.
Reset of the timer can be done by adjusting this setpoint again. Setting of the setpoint does not change
when the reset is done, only the Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 579) value changes to reflect reset
of the maintenance timer.
Maintenance Timer 1 Protection

Range [units] Warning / BOC [-]
Default value Warning Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Type of the maintenance alarm of both Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page 276) and Maintenance
Timer 1 Interval (page 277).


Step 1h
Description

Step 1 month
Description
statistics.


Step [-]
Description

Step 1h
Description


Step 1 month
Description
statistics.

Step [-]
Description

Group: Generator settings
Subgroup: Overload Protection
Overload BOC
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] Overload Wrn (page 281) .. 200 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 222)
Description
Threshold level for overload of generator (in % of Nominal power) protection. Protection is BOC (Breaker
Open and Gen-set Cooldown).
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.
Overload Wrn

Range [units] 0 .. Overload BOC (page 281) [%]
Description
Threshold level for overload of generator (in % of Nominal Power (page 222)) protection. This is only
warning.

Overload Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for protections Overload BOC (page 281) and Overload Wrn (page 281).
Subgroup: Current Protection
Short Circuit BOC

Range [units] 100 .. 500 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 223)
Description
Protection occurs when generator current reaches this preset threshold. Type of the protection is BOC.
Short Circuit BOC Delay

Range [units] 0.00 .. 10.00 [s]
Step 0.01 s
Description
Delay for Short Circuit BOC (page 282) protection.

IDMT Overcurrent Delay

Range [units] 1.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
IDMT curve shape selection. IDMT is "very inverse" over current protection. Reaction time is not constant
but depends on over current level according to the following formula:
Note: Reaction time is limited to 3600 s = 60 minutes. IDMT protection is not active for Reaction time
values longer than 60 minutes.
Igen is maximal value of all measured phases of generator current.

Table 8.1 EXAMPLE of Reaction time for different over current levels
Overcurrent
Overcurrent IDMT Delay
≤ 100 % 101 % 110 %
0.2 s No action 20 s 2s
Reaction time 2s No action 200 s 20 s
20 s No action 2000 s 200 s
Image 8.15 IDMT Overcurrent Delay


Current Unbalance BOC

Range [units] 1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Current (page 223)
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 223)
Description
Threshold for generator current asymmetry (unbalance).
Protection is BOC (Breaker Open and Gen-set Cooldown).
Current Unbalance BOC Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Current Unbalance BOC (page 284) protection.

Subgroup: Voltage Protection
Generator Overvoltage Sd

Range [units] Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 285) .. 200 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 227) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 227)
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is
used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.
Generator Overvoltage Wrn

Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 286) .. Generator Overvoltage Sd (page
Range [units]
285) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is
used.

Generator Undervoltage Wrn

Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 286) .. Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page
Range [units]
285) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is
used.
Generator Undervoltage BOC

Range [units] 0 .. Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 286) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is
used.

Generator <> Voltage Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 285), Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 285), Generator
Undervoltage BOC (page 286) and Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 286) protection.
Voltage Unbalance BOC

1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 227) or Nominal Voltage Ph-N
Range [units]
(page 227)
Step 1%
Description
Threshold for generator voltage unbalance alarm.
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 287) protection.

Subgroup: Frequency Protection
Generator Overfrequency BOC

Range [units] Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 288) .. 200,0 [%]
Default value 110,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 231)
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.
Generator Overfrequency Wrn

Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 288) .. Generator Overfrequency BOC
Range [units]
(page 288) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.
Generator Underfrequency Wrn

Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 289) .. Generator Overfrequency Wrn
Range [units]
(page 288) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.

Generator Underfrequency BOC

Range [units] 0,0 .. Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 288) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.
Generator <> Frequency Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 288), Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 288),
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 288) and Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 289)
protection.

Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection
Reverse Power Level

Range [units] 0 .. 50 [%]
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Reverse Power Protection (page 294)
Description
Level for generator Reverse Power Protection (page 294).
Reverse Power Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Reverse Power Protection (page 294)
Description
Delay for generator Reverse Power Protection (page 294).

Group: Protections
Subgroup: Overload Protection
Overload Protection

Range [units] Enabled/Disabled/ExtDisable [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Overload protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Overload

Enabled:
BOC (page 281), Overload Wrn (page 281) and Overload Delay (page 282).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 628)
Subgroup: Current Protection
IDMT Overcurrent Protection

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable[-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator IDMT Overcurrent protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoint IDMT

Enabled:
Overcurrent Delay (page 283).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 628).

Current Unbalance Protection

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable[-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Current Unbalance protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Current

Enabled:
Unbalance BOC (page 284) and Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 284).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 628).
Subgroup: Voltage Protection
Generator <> Voltage Protection

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Generator <> Voltage protection. GCB closing is blocked, if
the protection is disabled!
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Generator

Overvoltage Sd (page 285), Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 285),
Enabled:
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 286), Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page
286) and Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 287).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 628)
GCB closing is disabled, if the parameter is set to Disabled. It is blocked as well, if the parameter is set to
ExtDisable and LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 628) is active.

Voltage Unbalance Protection

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Voltage Unbalance protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Voltage

Enabled:
Unbalance BOC (page 287) and Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 287).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 628).
Subgroup: Frequency Protection
Generator Frequency Protection

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of Generator Frequency protection. GCB closing is blocked, if the
protection is disabled!.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Generator

Overfrequency BOC (page 288), Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 288),
Enabled:
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 289), Generator Underfrequency Wrn
(page 288), and Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 289).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 628)
GCB closing is disabled, if the parameter is set to Disabled. It is blocked as well, if the parameter is set to
ExtDisable and LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 628) is active.

Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection
Reverse Power Protection

Step [-]
Description
The protection of the generator against the reverse (negative) active power. Protection gets active when
the level of active power [kW] gets under limit given by setpoint Reverse Power Level (page 290) for time
longer than the value of setpoint Reverse Power Delay (page 290).
This setpoint adjusts behavior of generator Reverse power protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Reverse

Enabled:
Power Level (page 290), Reverse Power Delay (page 290)
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 628).
Subgroup: Speed Protection
Underspeed Protection

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Underspeed protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoint Underspeed

Enabled:
Sd (page 265).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 628)

Subgroup: Phase Rotation Protection
Phase Rotation Protection

Range [units] Enabled/Disabled/ExtDisable [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Phase Rotation protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoint Phase

Enabled:
Rotation (page 238).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 628)

Group: Mains Settings
Subgroup: AMF Timers
Emergency Start Delay
Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] 0 .. 6 000 [s]
Step 1s
Description
Delay after the mains failure to the start command of the Gen-set.
Image 8.16 Emergency Start Delay
Mains Return Delay

Range [units] 1 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjust the delay, how long mains has to be returned after mains fail to start load transfer to
mains.

MCB Close Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay after mains returns to MCB closing, if the Gen-set is not running (e.g. is in start-up procedure).
Transfer Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Transition Delay between power sources.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is used in 2 functions:
Delay after GCB opening to MCB closing
Delay used in dual operation function
Delay after GCB opening to MCB closing during the return procedure. Delay after MCB opening to GCB
closing if the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 310) is set to GENRUN.
The time charts bellow show recommended setting of Transfer Delay setpoint.
If the Transfer Delay setpoint is set shorter than the time required for opening of the circuit breaker, the
controller closes GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 660) output straight away (100 ms) after the MCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 626) input deactivates.

Image 8.17 Transfer Delay 1
If some delay between MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 626) deactivation and closing of GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE
660) output is required, then the Transfer Delay must be set to sum of "MCB opening" + "Delay" time.
Delay used in dual operation function. This delay is used when load from first Gen-set is transferred to
second Gen-set. Delay starts to countdown when GCB of first Gen-set is open. When this delay
countdown, GCB of second Gen-set is closed. This delay is important for correct function of external
interlock.
This delay is also used in dual operation function. This delay is used when load from first Gen-set is
transferred to second Gen-set. Delay starts to countdown when GCB of first Gen-set is open. When this
delay countdown, GCB of second Gen-set is closed. This delay is important for correct function of external
interlock.

Subgroup: Mains Voltage Limits
Mains Overvoltage

Range [units] Mains Undervoltage (page 301) .. 150 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 227)
Description
Threshold for Mains overvoltage. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.

Mains Overvoltage Hys

Range [units] 100 .. Mains Overvoltage (page 299) [%]
Step 1%
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains overvoltage protection.
Image 8.19 Mains Overvoltage Hys

Mains Undervoltage

Range [units] 50 .. Mains Overvoltage (page 299) [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 227)
Description
Threshold for Mains undervoltage. All three phases are checked. Minimum voltage out of three phases is
used.

Mains Undervoltage Hys

Range [units] Mains Undervoltage (page 301) .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains undervoltage protection.
Image 8.20 Mains Undervoltage Hys

Mains Overvoltage Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Mains Overvoltage (page 299) protection.
Mains Undervoltage Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Mains Undervoltage (page 301) protection.
Mains Voltage Unbalance

1 .. 150 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 227) or Nominal Voltage Ph-N
Range [units]
(page 227)
Step 1%
Description
Threshold for Mains voltage unbalance.

Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 303) protection.
Subgroup: Mains Frequency Limits
Mains Overfrequency

Range [units] Mains Underfrequency (page 306) .. 150 [%]
Default value 102.0 % Alternative config NO
Step 1.0 % of Nominal Frequency (page 231)
Description
Threshold for Mains overfrequency.

Mains Overfrequency Hys

Range [units] 100 .. Mains Overfrequency (page 304) [%]
Step 0.1 %
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains overfrequency protection.
Image 8.21 Mains Overfrequency Hys

Mains Underfrequency

Range [units] 50 .. Mains Overfrequency (page 304) [%]
Step 1.0 % of Nominal Frequency (page 231)
Description
Threshold for Mains underfrequency.

Mains Underfrequency Hys

Range [units] Mains Underfrequency (page 306) .. 100 [%]
Step 0.1 %
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains underfrequency protection.
Image 8.22 Mains Underfrequency Hys

Mains < > Frequency Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Mains Underfrequency (page 306) and Mains Overfrequency (page 304) protection.
Subgroup: AMF Settings
Return From Island

Range [units] Manual / Auto [-]
DefaultFixed
Auto Alternative config NO
value
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint adjust the behavior of closing MCB when the mains returns.
Controller remains in AUT mode and the manual return to Mains is done via
MCB button. ALI Manual Restore (page 745) message is displayed in
alarmlist to notify operator – it will disappear automatically after MCB close
Manual button is pushed.
Note: Select MANUAL in case you need to manually control the moment
when the load is transferred back to the mains.
MCB is closed automatically after the timer Mains Return Delay (page 296)
Auto
elapses.
MCB Logic

Range [units] Close On / Close Off [-]
Default value Close Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]

Description
The setpoint influences the behavior of the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671).
Close On When the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671) is active – MCB should be closed.
Close Off When the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671) is active – MCB should be opened.
Image 8.23 MCB Logic 1
Image 8.24 MCB Logic 2

MCB Opens On

Range [units] Mains Fail / Gen Run [-]
Default value Gen Run Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint adjust the behavior of opening MCB in AUTO mode when there is mains fail.
Mains The command to open the MCB is given immediately after mains fail condition is
Fail evaluated. If the mains will return into parameters after MCB was opened and before
GCB is closed, timer MCB Close Delay (page 297) is applied before MCB closing.
Gen Run MCB will be opened when engine will be running and it will be possible to transfer load
from Mains to Gen-set (after stabilization phase).
Note: This option should be used for MCBs using 230V control and not equipped
with the undervoltage coil.
Group: Dual operation
Subgroup: Dual Operation
Running Hours Max Difference
Setpoint group Dual operation Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] 0,1 .. 1000,0 [h]
Default value 10 h Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 h
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
485) and COM2 Mode (page 487) + conditioned by settings of onboard RS485
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximal allowed difference of dual operation running hours between Master and
Slave. When difference is higher, swap of load between controllers is done.

Running Hours Base

Range [units] -10 000.0 .. 20 000.0 [h]
Default value 0h Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 h
Setpoint visibility
485) and COM2 Mode (page 487)
Description
This setpoint modifies the running hours of controller used in dual operation function. Negative value is
decrement from running hours, positive value is increment to running hours.
Example:
Master controller has 1000 h.
Slave controller has 100 h.
Adjust setpoint of slave controller to 900 h to have both controllers on "0" running hours in dual
operation.
Swap Gen-sets

Default value Enabled h Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint enables or disables swapping of gen-sets on load in dual operation.
Enabled Master and Slave are swapped based on their actual running hours.
Master and Slave are not swapped. Controller with lower running hours starts and
Disabled then runs until mains returns or until controller shutdown – then second controller
starts.

Master Error Protection

Range [units] Monitoring / AL Indic / Wrn [-]
Default value AL Indic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint adjust the type of protection for Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail (page 734) alarm.
Slave Error Protection

Range [units] Monitoring / AL Indic / Wrn [-]
Default value AL Indic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint adjust the type of protection for Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail (page 735) alarm.
Transfer Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Transition Delay between power sources.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is used in 2 functions:
Delay after GCB opening to MCB closing
Delay used in dual operation function

Delay after GCB opening to MCB closing during the return procedure. Delay after MCB opening to GCB
closing if the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 310) is set to GENRUN.
The time charts bellow show recommended setting of Transfer Delay setpoint.
If the Transfer Delay setpoint is set shorter than the time required for opening of the circuit breaker, the
controller closes GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 660) output straight away (100 ms) after the MCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 626) input deactivates.
If some delay between MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 626) deactivation and closing of GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE
660) output is required, then the Transfer Delay must be set to sum of "MCB opening" + "Delay" time.
Delay used in dual operation function. This delay is used when load from first Gen-set is transferred to
second Gen-set. Delay starts to countdown when GCB of first Gen-set is open. When this delay
countdown, GCB of second Gen-set is closed. This delay is important for correct function of external
interlock.

This delay is also used in dual operation function. This delay is used when load from first Gen-set is
transferred to second Gen-set. Delay starts to countdown when GCB of first Gen-set is open. When this
delay countdown, GCB of second Gen-set is closed. This delay is important for correct function of external
interlock.

Group: Load Management
Subgroup: Load Shedding
Load Shedding Active
Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] Disabled / Gen only [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used for adjustment when the load shedding function is active.
Disabled The Load shedding function is disabled. All the outputs are open.
Gen only The function is active when Breaker State (page 585) = IsOper.
Load shedding outputs are activated / deactivated one by one in island
operation
All Loadshedding outputs are tripped once the Gen-set comes into the
island operation from "NO LOAD" operation (MCB and GCB were opened ->
Gen-set started and GCB closed).
Load Shedding Level

Range [units] Load Reconnection Level .. 200 [%] of Nominal Power (page 222)
Step 1%
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 315) is enabled
Description
This setpoint is used to activates the next Load shedding stage.When Gen-set load exceeds this level for
more than Load Shedding Delay (page 316) time.

Load Shedding Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the next Load shedding stage. When Gen-set load exceeds Load
Shedding Level (page 315) for more than this delay's time, the controller proceeds to the next Load
shedding stage – the next binary output Load Shedding Stage 1-5 is active.
Subgroup: Load Reconnection Settings
Load Reconnection Level

Range [units] 0 .. Load Shedding Level (page 315) [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint is used to proceed to the lower load shedding stage when the Gen-set load drops below this
level for more than Load Reconnection Delay (page 317).

Load Reconnection Delay

Step 1s
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the lower Load shedding stage. When Gen-set load drops under Load
Reconnection Level (page 316) for more than this delay time, the binary output for higher stage is
opened. Automatic load reconnection works only when Auto Load Reconnection (page 317) = Enabled.
Auto Load Reconnection

Step [-]
Description
Switch between manual and automatic reconnection of shedded load..
Rising edge on binary input MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE 625) resets
controller to the lower stage, but only if the load is under the Load Reconnection
Disabled
Level (page 316). Load Reconnection Delay (page 317) is not taken into account in
this case.
Load reconnection is automatic depend on setpoints Load Reconnection Level
Enabled (page 316) and Load Reconnection Delay (page 317). Binary input MANUAL LOAD
RECONNECTION (PAGE 625) has no function.

Subgroup: Dummy Load
Dummy Load Active

Range [units] GenOnly / Disable [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables / disables Dummy Load function.
IMPORTANT: If Gen Only option is chosen, no dummy load will be activated when in
parallel with mains.
Dummy Load On

Range [units] 0.0 .. Dummy Load Off (page 319) [%]
Step 0.1 %
Setpoint visibility If Dummy Load Active (page 318) is not set to disabled
Description
This setpoint determines power level which when not matched will trigger Dummy Load Function to
activate additional power bank level (by activating additional Dummy Load Stage LBOs).

Dummy Load On Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 15 s Alternative config YES
Step 0.1 s
Description
This setpoint determines delay after which additional Dummy Load Stage will be activated.
Dummy Load Off

Range [units] Dummy Load On (page 318) .. 200.0 [%]
Step 0.1 %
Description
This setpoint determines power level which when exceeded will trigger Dummy Load Function to
remove/activate power bank stages (by deactivating additional Dummy Load Level LBOs).
Dummy Load Off Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600. [s]
Default value 15 s Alternative config YES
Step 0.1 s
Description
This setpoint determines delay after which additional Dummy Load Stage will be deactivated.

Group: User Buttons
Subgroup: User Buttons
User Button 1
Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).
Option Description
The LBO User Button 1 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 1 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

User Button 2

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 3

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 4

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 5

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 6

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 7

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 8

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 9

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 10

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 11

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 12

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 13

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 14

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 15

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

User Button 16

Step -
Description
Option Description
COMMAND
party device.
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
button is still 1.

Group: Analog Switches
Subgroup: Analog Switches 1
AIN Switch01 On
Setpoint group Analog Switches Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
an analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 640) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 640) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 692) analog input.
Image 8.27 General analog input 1 switch

AIN Switch01 Off

Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 640) off. The value is measured from

AIN Switch02 On

Description

AIN Switch02 Off

Description

AIN Switch03 On

Description

AIN Switch03 Off

Description

AIN Switch04 On

Description

AIN Switch04 Off

Description
Group: Scheduler
Subgroup: Time & Date
Time
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] HH:MM:SS [-]
Default value 00:00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Real time clock adjustment.
Note: RTC has backup battery.

Date

Range [units] DD/MM/YYYY [-]
Default value 1.1.2015 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Actual date adjustment.
Time Stamp Period

Step 1 min
Description
Time interval for periodic history records.
Note: History record is made only when engine is running.

DST Switching Mode

Range [units] - [AUTO / MANUAL / DISABLED]
Default value AUTO Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Switches the mode of Daylight Saving Time (DST).
Activation, deactivation of the DST, and changing of the RTC Time value
AUTO accordingly is performed automatically by the controller. The user always sees
valid local time without any action from his side.
Activation, and deactivation of the DST is performed manually by the user via the
setpoint Time Mode (page 346). Changing of the RTC Time value accordingly is
MANUAL
then performed automatically by the controller. So the user does not need to
readjust the RTC time, he only needs to select the proper Time Mode (page 346).
Time Mode (page 346) is fixedly set to STD and the function does not perform any
DISABLED
changes of RTC time.

DST Period Rule

AUSTRALIA, CHILE, EUROPE, MEXICO, NEW ZEALAND, PARAGUAY,
Range [units]
US/CANADA [-]
Default value AUSTRALIA Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Only if DST Switching Mode (page 345) = AUTO
Description
Selection of the rule that will be applied for the calculation of the Daylight Saving Time (DST) validity
period.
DST Period Rule DST Validity period

EUROPE 01:00 GMT last Sunday in March – 01:00 GMT last Sunday in October.
nd st
US/CANADA 02:00 local time 2 Sunday in March – 03:00 local time 1 Sunday in November.
st
MEXICO 02:00 local time 1 Sunday in April – 03:00 local time last Sunday in October.
st st
AUSTRALIA 02:00 local time 1 Sunday in October – 03:00 local time 1 Sunday in April.
st
NEW ZEALAND 02:00 local time last Sunday in September – 03:00 local time 1 Sunday in April.
st st
CHILE 00:00 local time 1 Sunday in September – 00:00 local time 1 Sunday in April.
st th
PARAGUAY 00:00 local time 1 Sunday in October – 00:00 local time 4 Sunday in March.
Time Mode

Range [units] - [STD / DST]
Default value STD Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Only if DST Switching Mode (page 345) = MANUAL
Description
In manual DST Switching Mode (page 345) this input is used to adjust the actual time mode. In any other
DST Switching Mode (page 345) this input is not taken into account.

Subgroup: Timer 1
Timer 1 Function

Disable / Manual On / No Func / TEST / Test OnLd / MFail Blk / Rem Start/Stop / Auto
Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
It is possible to choose from following timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 1 (PAGE 653) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require
controller running in AUTO mode.
Timer 1 has higher priority over Timer 2. So if Timer 1 Function (page 347) is configured for OFF mode
and Timer 2 Function (page 355) is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in
OFF mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already
running.
Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 631) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 632) binary input.
TEST When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the binary input REMOTE TEST (PAGE 633).
TEST OnLd When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REM TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 629) binary input.
MFail Blk When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 624) binary input.

Timer 1 Setup

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 350)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 347)
Description
Date of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 347).

Timer 1 First Occur. Time

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 347).
Timer 1 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 1 Function (page 347) duration time.
Timer 1 Repetition

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 1 Function (page 347).
Off Timer 1 Function (page 347) will not be activated.

Once Timer 1 Function (page 347) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 1 Function (page 347) will be repeatedly activated.

Timer 1 Repeated

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 1 Function (page 347).
Daily Timer 1 Function (page 347) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 1 Function (page 347) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 1 Function (page 347) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen
days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 1 Function (page 347) is repeated in adjusted period.
Timer 1 Repeat Day

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 1 Function (page 347).
Chose one day in month when Timer 1 Function (page 347) will
Repeated Day
be activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 1 Function (page 347) will
Repeated Day In Week
be activated.

Timer 1 Day

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.
Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 1 Function (page 347) will be activated.

Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 1 Function (page 347) will be activated.

Timer 1 Refresh Period

Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
Refresh period of Timer 1 Function (page 347). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 1 Repeated (page 350).
Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 347),
the Timer 1 Function (page 347) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 347),
the Timer 1 Function (page 347) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 1 Day (page 351).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 347),
Monthly
the Timer 1 Function (page 347) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 351) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 1 Day (page 351) and Timer 1
Repeat Week In Month (page 352).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page
347), the Timer 1 Function (page 347) will be activated.

Timer 1 Weekends

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of Timer 1 Function (page 347) on weekends.
Timer 1 Function (page 347) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 1
Including
Function (page 347) can be active.
Timer 1 Function (page 347) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 1
Skip
Function (page 347) isn’t active.
Timer 1 Function (page 347) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 1
Function (page 347) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

Subgroup: Timer 2
Timer 2 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value No Func Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Note: It is possible to choose from following Timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 2 (PAGE
653) is always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions
require controller running in AUTO mode.
OFF mode.
running.


Timer 2 Setup

Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 2 Function (page 355).


Step [-]
Description
Timer 2 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 2 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 2 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Monthly Timer 2 Function (page 355) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Timer 2 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Chose one day in month when Timer 2 Function (page 355) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 2 Function (page 355) will be
activated.

Timer 2 Day

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description


Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 2 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 3
Timer 3 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description
It is possible to choose from following Timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 3 (PAGE 653) is
OFF mode.
running.


Timer 3 Setup

Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
Timer 3 Duration (page 365) Timer 3 Repeat Week In Month (page 368)
Timer 3 Repeated (page 366) Timer 3 Refresh Period (page 369)
Timer 3 Repeat Day (page 366) Timer 3 Weekends (page 370)

Step [-]
Description


Step [-]
Description
Timer 3 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 3 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 3 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 3 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
activated.
activated.

Timer 3 Day

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description


Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 3 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 4
Timer 4 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description
It is possible to choose from following Timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 4 (PAGE 653) is
OFF mode.
running.


Timer 4 Setup

Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description


Step [-]
Description
Timer 4 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 4 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 4 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 4 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
activated.
activated.

Timer 4 Day

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description


Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 4 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 5
Timer 5 Function

Disable / Manual On / No Func / TEST / Test OnLd / MFail Blk/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto
Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 5. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 5 Setup (page 380).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 5 (PAGE 654) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.
IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.


Timer 5 Setup

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 5 Function (page 379) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 5. See Exercise timers (page 141) for step by step manual.

Step [-]
Description
Date of first occurrence of Timer 5 Function (page 379).

Step [-]
Description

Timer 5 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 5 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 5 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 5 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
activated.
activated.

Timer 5 Day

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description


Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 5 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 6
Timer 6 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description


Timer 6 Setup

Step N/A [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Timer 6 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 6 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 6 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 6 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
activated.
activated.

Timer 6 Day

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description


Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 6 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 7
Timer 7 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description


Timer 7 Setup

Step N/A [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Timer 7 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 7 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 7 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 7 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
activated.
activated.

Timer 7 Day

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description


Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 7 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 8
Timer 8 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description


Timer 8 Setup

Step N/A [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Timer 8 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 8 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 8 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 8 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
activated.
activated.

Timer 8 Day

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description


Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 8 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 9
Timer 9 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description


Timer 9 Setup

Step N/A [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Timer 9 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 9 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 9 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 9 Day

Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Day (page 414)
Description

Timer 9 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
activated.
activated.

Step [-]
Description


Step [-]
Description

Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 9 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 10
Timer 10 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description


Timer 10 Setup

Step N/A [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 10. See Exercise timers (page 141) for step by step
manual.

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Timer 10 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 10 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 10 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 10 Day

Step [-]
Description

Timer 10 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
be activated.
be activated.

Step [-]
Description


Step [-]
Description

Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 10 Function (page
419), the Timer 10 Function (page 419) will be activated in selected days
will be activated.
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 10 Function (page
Monthly
419), the Timer 10 Function (page 419) will be activated in selected day of
month adjusted by Timer 10 Repeat Day In Month (page 424) or in
selected days of week of month adjusted by Timer 10 Day (page 422) and
Timer 10 Repeat Week In Month (page 424).
will be activated.
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 10 Function
(page 419), the Timer 10 Function (page 419) will be activated.

Timer 10 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Timer 10 Function (page 419) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer
10 Function (page 419) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 11
Timer 11 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description


Timer 11 Setup

Step N/A [-]
Description
manual.

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Timer 11 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 11 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 11 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 11 Day

Step [-]
Description

Timer 11 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
be activated.
be activated.

Step [-]
Description


Step [-]
Description

Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 11 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 12
Timer 12 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description


Timer 12 Setup

Step N/A [-]
Description
manual.

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Timer 12 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 12 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 12 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 12 Day

Step [-]
Description

Timer 12 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
be activated.
be activated.

Step [-]
Description


Step [-]
Description

Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 12 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 13
Timer 13 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description


Timer 13 Setup

Step N/A [-]
Description
manual.

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Timer 13 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 13 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 13 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 13 Day

Step [-]
Description

Timer 13 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
be activated.
be activated.

Step [-]
Description


Step [-]
Description

Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 13 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 14
Timer 14 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description


Timer 14 Setup

Step N/A [-]
Description
manual.

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Timer 14 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 14 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 14 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 14 Day

Step [-]
Description

Timer 14 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
be activated.
be activated.

Step [-]
Description


Step [-]
Description

Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 14 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 15
Timer 15 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description


Timer 15 Setup

Step N/A [-]
Description
manual.

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Timer 15 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 15 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 15 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 15 Day

Step [-]
Description

Timer 15 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
be activated.
be activated.

Step [-]
Description


Step [-]
Description

Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 15 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone

Subgroup: Timer 16
Timer 16 Function

Range [units]
Run / Mode OFF [-]
Step [-]
Description


Timer 16 Setup

Step N/A [-]
Description
manual.

Step [-]
Description

Step [-]
Description

Timer 16 Duration

Step [-]
Description
Timer 16 Repetition

Step [-]
Description


Timer 16 Repeated

Step [-]
Description

Timer 16 Day

Step [-]
Description

Timer 16 Repeat Day

Step [-]
Description
Repeated Day
be activated.
be activated.

Step [-]
Description


Step [-]
Description

Step 1 week
Description


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
will be activated.
will be activated.
Weekly
will be activated.
Monthly
will be activated.

Timer 16 Weekends

Step [-]
Description
Including
Skip
Postpone
Subgroup: Rental Timers
Rental Timer 1

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 8 760 [h]
Step 1h
Description
Another engine start is not allowed when this timer elapsed. This timer is based on engine running hours.
The alarm AHI Rental Timer 1 Elapsed (page 749) will be recorded in alarm list.
IMPORTANT: To reset Rental Timer 1 (page 474) we have to set up Rental Timer 1 (page
474) again. It means go to setpoint group Scheduler and to the setpoint Rental Timer 1
(page 474). Then press enter button , change the value if it is necessary and press enter
button again.
When the Rental Timer 1 (page 474) elapsed during engine run the Gen-set will not stop immediately.
The adjustable Rental Timer BOC (page 478) timer will start in this moment. The engine will be cooled
and stopped when the Rental Timer BOC (page 478) time elapsed.

Image 8.35 Rental Timer 1
The Running Hours Overrun counter will start increment when the engine is continue running after the
Rental Timer 1 (page 474) elapsed.
Note: There is no priority between Rental Timer 1 and Rental Timer 2. The sooner timer will activated
the Rental Timer BOC (page 478) protection.

Rental Timer 1 Wrn

Range [units] Disabled / 1.. Rental Timer 1 (page 474) [h]
Step 1h
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Rental Timer 1 (page 474)
Description
Alarm Wrn Rental Timer 1 (page 746) comes up after xx running hours from adjusting the Rental Timer
1 (page 474). Hours are adjusted by this setpoint.
Image 8.36 Rental Timer 1 Wrn
Rental Timer 2

Step 1 day
Description
Another engine start is not allowed when this timer elapsed. This timer is based on date. At the midnight of
the last day the alarm AHI Rental Timer 2 Elapsed (page 750) will be recorded in alarm list.

IMPORTANT: To reset Rental Timer 2 (page 476) we have to set up Rental Timer 2 (page
476) again. It means go to setpoint group Scheduler and to the setpoint Rental Timer 2
(page 476). Then press enter button , change the value if it is necessary and press enter
button again.
IMPORTANT: To disable Rental Timer 2 (page 476) set date to 01/01/2015.
When the Rental Timer 2 (page 476) elapsed during engine run the Gen-set will not stop immediately.
The adjustable Rental Timer BOC (page 478) timer will start in this moment. The engine will be cooled
and stopped when the Rental Timer BOC (page 478) time elapsed.
Image 8.37 Rental Timer 2
The Running Hours Overrun counter will start increment when the engine is continue running after the
Note: There is no priority between Rental Timer 1 and Rental Timer 2. The sooner timer will activated
the Rental Timer BOC (page 478) protection.

Rental Timer 2 Wrn

Range [units] Disabled / 01/01/2015 .. Rental Timer 2 (page 476) [DD/MM/YYYY]
Step 1 day
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Rental Timer 2 (page 476)
Description
Alarm Wrn Rental Timer 2 (page 746) comes up xx days before the Rental Timer 2 (page 476). Days
are adjusted by this setpoint.
Image 8.38 Rental Timer 2 Wrn
Rental Timer BOC

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 210 [h]
Default value 24 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Conditioned by the setpoints Rental Timer 1 (page 474) and Rental Timer 2 (page
Setpoint visibility
476)
Description
This timer will start after Rental Timer 1 (page 474) or Rental Timer 2 (page 476) elapsed in case that
the engine is still running. When this timer elapsed the engine is cooled and stopped.

Group: Geo-Fencing
Subgroup: Geo Fencing
Geo-Fencing
Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled / LBI Enable [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables geo-fencing function.
Fence 1 Protection (page 481) and Fence 2 Protection (page 483) are
Disabled
disabled.
Enabled
enabled.
LBI Enable enabled only when logical binary input .GEO-FENCING ENABLE (PAGE 624) is
active.
Subgroup: Position
Home Latitude

Range [units] -90,0000..90,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Description
This setpoint adjust latitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions on
north hemisphere have positive value, position on south hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Longitude (page 480) are used for counting Fence 1 Radius (page
482) and Fence 2 Radius (page 484).
Note: This value can be also obtained automatically via logical binary input GEO HOME POSITION
(PAGE 623). In case of activation of this binary input for at least 2 seconds, setpoint will be adjusted
automatically from actual coordinates from GPS signal.

Home Longitude

Range [units] -180,0000..180,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Description
This setpoint adjust longitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions
on east hemisphere have positive value, position on west hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Latitude (page 479) are used for counting Fence 1 Radius (page 482)
and Fence 2 Radius (page 484).
Note: This value can be also obtained automatically via logical binary input GEO HOME POSITION
(PAGE 623). In case of activation of this binary input for at least 2 seconds, setpoint will be adjusted
automatically from actual coordinates from GPS signal.

Subgroup: Fence 1
Fence 1 Protection

Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 1 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence 1 Radius
(page 482). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 1 Delay (page 482).
Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence 1 Radius (page
482).
Wrn Position of Gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
position of the Gen-set is out of Fence 1 Radius (page 482).
Sd Position of Gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
BOC Position of Gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Protection is activated when position of the Gen-set is out of Fence 1 Radius
(page 482).
Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 1 Delay (page 482).

Fence 1 Radius

Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Description
Radius for circle area 1. When the Gen-set leaves this area, Fence 1 Protection (page 481) is activated
after Fence 1 Delay (page 482).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position – setpoints Home Longitude (page
480) and Home Latitude (page 479).
Fence 1 Delay

Step 1s
Description
Delay for Fence 1 Protection (page 481).

Subgroup: Fence 2
Fence 2 Protection

Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 2 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence 2 Radius
(page 484). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 2 Delay (page 484).
Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence 2 Radius (page
484).
Wrn Position of Gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
Sd Position of Gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
BOC Position of Gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Protection is activated when position of the Gen-set is out of Fence 2 Radius
(page 484).
Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 2 Delay (page 484).

Fence 2 Radius

Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Description
Radius for circle area 2. When the Gen-set leaves this area, Fence 2 Protection (page 483) is activated
after Fence 2 Delay (page 484).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position - setpoints Home Longitude (page
480) and Home Latitude (page 479).
Fence 2 Delay

Step 1s
Description
Delay for Fence 2 Protection (page 483).
Group: Plug-In Modules
Subgroup: Slot A
Slot A
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]

Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot A.
Subgroup: Slot B
Slot B
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.4.0

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot B.
Group: CM-RS232-485
Subgroup: COM1 Setting
COM1 Mode
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.4.0

Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Step [-]
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM1 channel.

DualSlave Dual operation protocol – slave function
DualMaster Dual operation protocol – master function

COM1 Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
485)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM1 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line
COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
485)
Description
here.

COM1 Modbus Mode

Range [units] 8N1 / 8N2 / 8E1 [-]
Step [-]
Description
Possible options
Subgroup: COM2 Setting
COM2 Mode

Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Step [-]
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM2 channel.

DualSlave Dual operation protocol – slave function
DualMaster Dual operation protocol – master function
COM2 Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]

Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
487)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM2 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line
COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
487)
Description
here.
COM2 Modbus Mode

Range [units] 8N1 / 8N2 / 8E1 [-]
Step [-]
Description
Possible options

Group: CM-4G-GPS
Subgroup: Cellular Interface
Internet Connection
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.4.0

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjust the communication mode of module.
Network Mode

Range [units] 2G / 3G / 4G / Automatic [-]
Default value Automatic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts preferred connection type of CM2-4G-GPS module.
Access Point Name

Default value internet Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 489)
Description
APN (Access Point Name) of the network, provided by GSM operator.

Connection Check IP1

Range [units] [-]
Default value "empty" Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
IP address of reliable server in the internet.
To provide maximal reliability of wireless cellular connection the module is equipped with function that
periodically checks the data connection over the cellular network is working.
This function is based on periodical sending of ICMP messages (known as "ping") to reliable servers in the
internet and checking of their responses. If there is not any response received from any of the servers (at
least one setpoint Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 is filled with IP address) for certain time period, the
cellular connection is considered as non-working and the module will close and reestablish the
connection.
If all three servers are not defined (setpoints Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 have empty addresses) then
the cellular connection check is disabled


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
connection.


Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
connection.

Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings
DNS Mode

Range [units] Automatic / Manual [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables to enter DNS server addresses manually, even with the Internet Connection (page
489) set to Automatic.
Automatic DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server are used
DNS IP Address 1 (page 493) and DNS IP Address 2 (page 494) can be
adjusted manually. Use this option to resolve e.g. internet access policy related
Manual
issue, if local DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server
do not work
DNS IP Address 1

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 8.8.8.8 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 1 is adjusted.
If DNS Mode (page 493) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which
is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If DNS Mode (page 493) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is assigned
by the DHCP server.

DNS IP Address 2

Step [-]
Description
If DNS Mode (page 493) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which is
needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If DNS Mode (page 493) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is assigned
by the DHCP server.
IP Firewall

Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoints enables to switch on the built-in Firewall functionality.
DISABLED The firewall function is switched off

The firewall function is switched on, use InteliConfig to setup the firewall rules
ENABLED
(configuration card Others – Firewall)

Subgroup: AirGate Settings
AirGate Connection

Range [units] Disabled/ Enabled [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint enable or disable AirGate connection via CM2-4G-GPS.
DISABLED: Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required. AirGate is not used.
ENABLED This mode uses the "AirGate" service. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used.
The AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint AirGate Address (page
518).
IMPORTANT: When this setpoint is changed the controller has to be restarted to apply
changes.
AirGate Address
CM-4G-GPS; CM-
Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value global.airgate.link Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free
AirGate server provided by ComAp at global.airgate.link.

Airgate Port

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Step 1
Setpoint visibility
Description
This port is used for TCP communication with the AirGate server.
Note: Use port 54440 for standard ComAp AirGate service.
Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings
Direct Connection

Step [-]
Description
Use this to enable/disable direct connection of a ComAp client (e.g. InteliConfig) to the IP address of the
controller.
Note: For Direct connection the controller IP address must be reachable from the client IP address.

Direct Connection Port

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Step [-]
Description
This port is used to listen for an incoming TCP connection if Direct Connection is ENABLED.
ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout
CM-Ethernet
CM-4G-GPS
Step 1s
Description
Connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a client (e.g. InteliConfig) does not communicate for this
time. This timeout applies to both direct and AirGate connection.

Subgroup: E-mail Settings
SMTP Server Address

Default value global.airgate.link:9925 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet
provider or IT manager for this information.
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "global.airgate.link" may
be used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with
new public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.
SMTP Sender Address

Step [-]
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.
IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

SMTP User Name

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.
SMTP User Password

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server

SMTP Encryption

Range [units] None / SSL-TLS / STARTTLS [-]
Default value None Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
Encryption settings of SMTP communication.
NONE E-SMTP protocol without encryption is used.

Communication is started without encryption and then is switched to TLS
STARTTLS
encryption.
TLS Communication runs in TLS encryption.
Email Address 1
CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.4.0
Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.

Email Address 2
CM-4G-GPS
Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 3
CM-4G-GPS
Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Email Address 4
CM-4G-GPS
Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Subgroup: Message Settings
E-mail/SMS Language
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] Depends on CU languages [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

Event Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
Wrn Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.

BOC Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
Sd Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Message.

Telephone Number 1

Step [-]
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.
Telephone Number 2

Step [-]
Description

Telephone Number 3

Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 4

Step [-]
Description

Telephone Number 5

Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 6

Step [-]
Description

Telephone Number 7

Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 8

Step [-]
Description

Telephone Number 9

Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 10

Step [-]
Description

Subgroup: GPS Settings
GPS Tracking

Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
If GPS tracking is enabled the module sends position/speed data to the controller with period 10 s.
Subgroup: RTC Synchronization
NTP Clock Sync

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable controller time synchronization with exact time from an NTP server.
The period of synchronization is 1 hour or when the cotnroller is reset or when the setpoint is reset
(Enabled->Disabled->Enabled).

NTP Server

Range [units] [-]
Default value pool.ntp.org Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
NTP server address.
GPS Clock Sync

Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable synchronization of the controller's time with the exact time from
GPS.
The module sends UTC timestamp to the controller after reset/power on and then in period of 60 minutes.

Time Zone
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information
about sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

Group: CM-Ethernet
Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings
IP Address Mode

Range [units] MANUAL / AUTOMATIC / DISABLED [-]
Default value AUTOMATIC Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the ethernet connection is adjusted.
MANUAL The Ethernet connection is fixed by means of the setpoints IP Addr, NetMask,
GateIP, DNS IP Address.
This method should be used for a classic Ethernet or internet connection. When
this type of connection opens, the controller is specified by its IP address. This
means that it would be inconvenient if the IP address were not fixed (static).
AUTOMATIC The Ethernet connection setting is obtained automatically from the DHCP
server. The obtained settings are then copied to the related setpoints. If the
process of obtaining the settings from the DHCP server is not successful, the
value 000.000.000.000 is copied to the setpoint IP address and the module
continues to try to obtain the settings.
DISABLED The Ethernet terminal is disabled.

IP Address

Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 513)
Description
The setpoint is used to set the address when you are in static mode .
If IP Address Mode (page 513) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the ethernet
interface of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 513) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The IP address is assigned by
the DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 513) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.
Note: Only valid IP address can be inserted.
Subnet Mask

Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 513)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Subnet Mask is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 513) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 513) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by
the DHCP server.

Gateway IP

Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 513)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Gateway IP is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 513) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 513) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by
the DHCP server.
A gateway is a device which connects the respective segment with the other segments and/or Internet.
DNS Mode

Range [units] Automatic / Manual [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables to enter DNS server addresses manually, even with the IP Address Mode (page
513) set to Automatic.
Automatic DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server are used
DNS IP Address 1 (page 516) and DNS IP Address 2 (page 516) can be
adjusted manually. Use this option to resolve e.g. internet access policy related
Manual
issue, if local DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server
do not work

DNS IP Address 1

Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 1 is adjusted .
If IP Address Mode (page 513) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server
(DNS), which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP
addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 513) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.
DNS IP Address 2

Step [-]
Description
If IP Address Mode (page 513) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server
(DNS), which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP
addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 513) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.

IP Firewall

Step [-]
Description
This setpoints enables to switch on the built-in Firewall functionality.
DISABLED The firewall function is switched off

The firewall function is switched on, use InteliConfig to setup the firewall rules
ENABLED
(configuration card Others – Firewall)
Subgroup: AirGate Settings
AirGate Connection

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint selects the AirGate connection mode.
DISABLED: This is a standard mode in which the controller listens to the incoming traffic and
answers the TCP/IP queries addressed to it. This mode requires the controller to
be accessible from the remote device (PC), i.e. it must be accessible at a public
and static IP address if you want to connect to it from the internet.
ENABLED This mode enables the AirGate service. The AirGate server address is adjusted by
the setpoint AirGate Address (page 518). Also the standard TCP/IP is enabled.

AirGate Address
CM-4G-GPS; CM-
Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value global.airgate.link Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free
AirGate server provided by ComAp at global.airgate.link.
AirGate Port

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Step 1
Description
This port is used for TCP data communication with the AirGate server.
Note: Use port 21, 23 or 6127 for standard ComAp AirGate service.

Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings
Direct Connection

Step [-]
Description
Use this to enable/disable direct connection of a ComAp client (e.g. InteliConfig) to the IP address of the
controller.
Note: For Direct connection the controller IP address must be reachable from the client IP address.
Direct Connection Port

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Step [-]
Description
This port is used to listen for an incoming TCP connection if Direct Connection is ENABLED.

ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout
CM-Ethernet
CM-4G-GPS
Step 1s
Description
Connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a client (e.g. InteliConfig) does not communicate for this
time. This timeout applies to both direct and AirGate connection.
Subgroup: MODBUS Settings
MODBUS Server

Step [-]
Description
Enable or disable Modbus communication via ethernet interface.
MODBUS Client Inactivity Timeout
Setpoint group Ethernet Related FW 1.4.0

Step 1s
Description
Modbus connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a Modbus client does not communicate for this
time.

Subgroup: SNMP Settings
SNMP Agent

Step [-]
Description
Enable or disable SNMP Agent.
SNMP Trap Format

Range [units] v1Trap / v2Notif / v2Inform [-]
Default value v1Trap Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts type of SNMP traps.
SNMP Traps IP Address 1

Step [-]
Description
IP address 1 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.

SNMP Traps IP Address 2

Step [-]
Description
IP address 2 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.
SNMP RD Community String

Default value public Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page
Setpoint visibility
521)
Description
SNMP Community String only for reading.
SNMP WR Community String

Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value private Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page
Setpoint visibility
521)
Description
SNMP Community String for writing and reading.

Subgroup: E-mail Settings
SMTP Server Address

Default value global.airgate.link:9925 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet
provider or IT manager for this information.
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "global.airgate.link" may
be used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with
new public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.
SMTP Sender Address

Step [-]
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.
IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

SMTP UserName

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
SMTP User Password

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server

SMTP Encryption

Range [units] None / SSL-TLS / STARTTLS [-]
Default value None Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
Encryption settings of SMTP communication.
NONE E-SMTP protocol without encryption is used.

Communication is started without encryption and then is switched to TLS
STARTTLS
encryption.
TLS Communication runs in TLS encryption.
Email Address 1
CM-4G-GPS
Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Email Address 2
CM-4G-GPS
Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 3
CM-4G-GPS
Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Email Address 4
CM-4G-GPS
Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Subgroup: Messages Settings
BOC Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.

E-mail/SMS Language
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] Depends on CU languages [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
Event Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.

Sd Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Message.
Wrn Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.

Subgroup: NTP Settings
NTP Clock Synchronization

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable controller time synchronization with exact time from an NTP server.
NTP Server

Range [units] [-]
Default value pool.ntp.org Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
NTP server address.

Time Zone
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information
about sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.
Group: EM-BIO8-EFCP
Subgroup: EFCP Settings
Earth Fault Current Protection
Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.4.0

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint can block or allow Earth fault Current protection.
DISABLED Earth fault current protection is blocked.

ENABLED Earth fault current protection is allowed. Behavior of Earth fault current protection
is set by these setpoints: Earth Fault CT Input Range (page 532), Earth Fault
CT Ratio (page 532), Earth Fault Delay (page 532) and Earth Fault Sd (page
533).

Earth Fault Delay

Range [units] 0.03 .. 5.00 [s]
Step 0.01 s
Description
Delay for Earth Fault Current protection.
Earth Fault CT Input Range

Range [units] 1 [A] / 5 [A]
Default value 5A Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
There are 2 physical inputs for Earth Fault Current Protection (page 531). Value of this setpoint has to
be set on value of physical input which is presently in use.
Earth Fault CT Ratio

Range [units] 1 .. 2000 [1/(1or5) A]
Default value 500 1/(1or5)A Alternative config NO
Step 1 A/ 1A; 1 A/5 A
Description
Earth Fault current transformer ratio.
Note: Type of units depends on setpoint Earth Fault CT Input Range (page 532) which have to be
set before this setpoint.

Earth Fault Sd
Range [units] 0.03 .. 200.00 [A]
Default value 0.30 A Alternative config NO
Step 0.01 [A]
Description
Limit value for Earth Fault Current protection.
Group: Alternate Config
Subgroup: Configuration 1
Nominal RPM 1
Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.4.0

Step 1 RPM
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM revolutions per minute).
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

Nominal Frequency 1

Step 1 Hz
Description
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1

Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to neutral).
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1

Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 535).
Description

Nominal Current 1

Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current.
Nominal Current can be different from generator rated current value.
Connection Type 1

Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Step [-]
Description
Connection type:

Split Phase
Split Phase
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye

Split Phase Delta
Autodetect
L1 >=100 V; L1 <=140 V
L3 >=100 V; L3 <=140 V
L1 <=160 V
L3 <=160 V
L1 >160 V
L3 >160 V
L1 >=100 V
L3 >=100 V
L1 >=100 V
L3 <= 20 V
L1 >=100 V
L3 <= 20 V

ECU Speed Adjustment 1

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
Nominal Power 1

Step 1 kW
Description
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 225) is adjusted to Monophase or
SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3 or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect
detects connection type as 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Nominal Power Split Phase 1

Step 1 kW
Description
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 225) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3.
Nominal RPM 2

Step 1 RPM
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 609) is active.

Nominal Frequency 2

Step 1 Hz
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 540).
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Step 1V
Description

Nominal Current 2

Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
Connection type 2

Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Step [-]
Description
Connection type:

Split Phase
Split Phase
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye

Split Phase Delta
Autodetect
L1 >=100 V; L1 <=140 V
L3 >=100 V; L3 <=140 V
L1 <=160 V
L3 <=160 V
L1 >160 V
L3 >160 V
L1 >=100 V
L3 >=100 V
L1 >=100 V
L3 <= 20 V
L1 >=100 V
L3 <= 20 V


Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Nominal Power 2

Step 1 kW
Description
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 2 (page 540) is adjusted to Monophase
or SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3 or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect


Step 1 kW
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 540)
Description
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 2 (page 540) is adjusted to Autodetect
and Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3.
Nominal RPM 3

Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Step 1 RPM
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).

Nominal Frequency 3

Step 1 Hz
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description

Nominal Current 3

Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
Connection type 3

Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Step [-]
Description
Connection type:

Split Phase
Split Phase
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye

Split Phase Delta
Autodetect
L1 >=100 V; L1 <=140 V
L3 >=100 V; L3 <=140 V
L1 <=160 V
L3 <=160 V
L1 >160 V
L3 >160 V
L1 >=100 V
L3 >=100 V
L1 >=100 V
L3 <= 20 V
L1 >=100 V
L3 <= 20 V


Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Nominal Power 3

Step 1 kW
Description
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 3 (page 545) is adjusted to Monophase
or SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3 or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect


Step 1 kW
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 3 (page 545)
Description
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 3 (page 545) is adjusted to Autodetect
and Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3.
8.1.3 Values
What values are:
Values (or quantities) are analog or binary data objects, measured or computed by the controller, that are
intended for reading from the controller screen, PC, MODBUS, etc. Values are organized into groups
according to their meaning.
For a full list of values go to the chapter List of values (page 549).
Invalid flag
If valid data is not available for a particular value, the invalid flag is set to it. This situation may be due to the
following:
The value is not being evaluated in the scope of the current application and configuration.
Sensor failure has been detected on an analog input.
The configured ECU or extension module does not provide the particular value.
The communication with the ECU or extension module is interrupted.
A value containing the invalid flag is displayed as "####" in InteliConfig and on the controller screen. If such a
value is read out via MODBUS, it will contain the data 32768 in the case of signed values and 65535 in the
case of unsigned values.

List of values
Group: Engine 552 Speed Request 561 Load Character L3 568

RPM 552 Requested RPM 561 Load Current L1 569
ECU Frequency Select 552 DPF Soot Load 561 Load Load Current L2 569
ECU AIN 1 552 DPF Ash Load 562 Load Current L3 569
ECU AIN 2 553 DEF Level 562 Group: Mains 569
ECU AIN 3 553 Group: Generator 562 Mains Frequency 569
ECU AIN 4 553 Earth Fault Current 562 Mains Voltage L1-N 569
ECU AIN 5 553 Generator Frequency 562 Mains Voltage L2-N 570
ECU AIN 6 554 Generator Voltage L1-L2 562 Mains Voltage L3-N 570
ECU AIN 7 554 Generator Voltage L1-N 563 Mains Voltage L1-L2 570
ECU AIN 8 554 Generator Voltage L2-L3 563 Mains Voltage L2-L3 570
ECU AIN 9 554 Generator Voltage L2-N 563 Mains Voltage L3-L1 570
ECU AIN 10 555 Generator Voltage L3-L1 563 Group: User Buttons 571
ECU AIN 11 555 Generator Voltage L3-N 563 User Button 1 571
ECU AIN 12 555 Nominal Current 564 User Button 2 571
ECU AIN 13 555 Nominal Power 564 User Button 3 571
ECU AIN 14 556 Nominal Voltage 564 User Button 4 571
ECU AIN 15 556 Group: Load 564 User Button 5 572
ECU AIN 16 556 Load P 564 User Button 6 572
ECU AIN 17 556 Load P L1 565 User Button 7 572
ECU AIN 20 557 Load Q 565 User Button 10 573
ECU AIN 21 557 Load Q L1 565 User Button 11 573
ECU AIN 24 558 Load S 566 User Button 14 574
ECU AIN 25 558 Load S L1 566 User Button 15 574
ECU AIN 26 559 Load S L2 566 User Button 16 574
ECU AIN 27 559 Load S L3 567 Group: Dual operation 575
ECU AIN 28 559 Load Power Factor 567 Master Running Hours 575
ECU AIN 29 559 Load Power Factor L1 567 Running Hours To Swap 575
ECU AIN 30 560 Load Power Factor L2 567 Slave Running Hours 575
ECU AIN 31 560 Load Power Factor L3 567 Group: Controller I/O 575
ECU AIN 32 560 Load Character 568 Battery Volts 575
ECU-AIN-EXT-1 560 Load Character L1 568 D+ 576
ECU-AIN-EXT-2 561 Load Character L2 568 Analog Input 1 576

Analog Input 2 576 Controller Mode 584 GPS Status 593
Analog Input 3 576 Application 584 Latitude 593
Analog Input 4 576 Breaker State 585 Longitude 594
Binary Inputs 577 Connection Type 585 Active Satellites 594
E-Stop 577 Engine State 585 Speed 594
Binary Outputs 577 FW Branch 585 HomePosDist 594
Group: Statistics 577 FW Version 585 AirGate Status 595
Genset kWh 577 HW Version 586 AirGate ID 595
Genset kVArh 578 ID String 586 AirGate Servicing Node 595
Conditioned Running Load Shedding Status 586 Current IP Address 596
Hours 1 578 SPI Module A 586 Primary DNS 596
Conditioned Running SPI Module B 586 Secondary DNS 596
Hours 2 578
Timer Text 587 Modem Status 596
Mains kWh 578
Timer Value 587 Modem FW Version 598
Mains kVArh 579
Group: Log Bout 587 Group: CM-Ethernet 598
Maintenance Timer 1
Log Bout 1 587 ETH Interface Status 598
RunHours 579
Log Bout 2 587 Current IP Address 598
Maintenance Timer 1
Log Bout 3 587 Current Subnet Mask 598
Interval 579
Log Bout 4 588 Current Gateway 599
Maintenance Timer 2
RunHours 579 Log Bout 5 588 Primary DNS 599
Maintenance Timer 2 Log Bout 6 588 Secondary DNS 599

Interval 580 Log Bout 7 588 AirGate ID 599
Maintenance Timer 3 Log Bout 8 588 AirGate Servicing Node 599
RunHours 580 Log Bout 9 589 AirGate Status 600
Maintenance Timer 3 Group: Fixed Protection Last Email Results 601
Interval 580 States 589 MAC Address 601
Rental 1 580 Fixed Protections States 1 589 Ethernet PHY Mode 602
Rental 2 581 Fixed Protections States 2 589
Group: Date/Time 602
Num E-Stops 581 Fixed Protections States 3 589 Date 602
Shutdowns 581 Fixed Protections States 4 590 Time 602
Total Fuel Consumption 582 Fixed Protections States 5 590 Time Mode 602
Time Till Empty 1 582 Group: User Protection Group: Plug-In I/O 603
Time Till Empty 2 582 States 590 EM BIO A 603
Time Till Empty 3 583 User Protections States 1 590
EM BIO B 603
Num Starts 583 Group: CM-4G-GPS 590
Group: PLC 603
Pulse Counter 1 583 Signal Strength 590
PLC-BOUT 1 603
Pulse Counter 2 583 Network Status 591
PLC-BOUT 2 603
Running Hours 584 Last Email Result 592
PLC-BOUT 3 604
Network Name 593
Group: Info 584 PLC-BOUT 4 604
Active Application 584 Network Mode 593
PLC-BOUT 5 604

PLC-BOUT 6 604
PLC-BOUT 7 604
PLC Resource 1 605
PLC Resource 2 605
PLC Resource 3 605
PLC Resource 4 605
PLC Resource 5 605
PLC Resource 6 606
PLC Resource 7 606
PLC Resource 8 606
6 back to Controller
objects

Group: Engine
RPM
Value group Engine Related FW 1.4.0

Units RPM
Description
This value contains the current engine speed. The value is obtained from one of the following sources:
ECU, if an ECU is configured
Pickup input
Generator frequency
6 back to List of values
ECU Frequency Select

Units -
Description
Shows selected frequency of ECU. The value is calculated from setpoint Nominal Frequency (page 231)
If is Nominal Frequency (page 231) in range from 45 Hz to 54 Hz, is considered as 50 Hz
application. The value is set to 0.
If is Nominal Frequency (page 231) in range from 55 Hz to 65 Hz, is considered as 60 Hz
application. The value is set to 1.
ECU AIN 1

Units Depends on ECU value
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake
temperature[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

ECU AIN 2

Description
ECU AIN 3

Description
ECU AIN 4

Description
ECU AIN 5

Description

ECU AIN 6

Description
ECU AIN 7

Description
ECU AIN 8

Description
ECU AIN 9

Description

ECU AIN 10

Description
ECU AIN 11

Description
ECU AIN 12

Description
ECU AIN 13

Description

ECU AIN 14

Description
ECU AIN 15

Description
ECU AIN 16

Description
ECU AIN 17

Description

ECU AIN 18

Description
ECU AIN 19

Description
ECU AIN 20

Description
ECU AIN 21

Description

ECU AIN 22

Description
ECU AIN 23

Description
ECU AIN 24

Description
ECU AIN 25

Description

ECU AIN 26

Description
ECU AIN 27

Description
ECU AIN 28

Description
ECU AIN 29

Description

ECU AIN 30

Description
ECU AIN 31

Description
ECU AIN 32

Description
ECU-AIN-EXT-1

Description

ECU-AIN-EXT-2

Description
Speed Request

Units %
Description
This value contains the speed control signal expressed in %.
Speed request Requested speed Accelerator pedal position

0% 1350 RPM 0%
50% 1500 RPM 50%
100% 1650 RPM 100%
Note: Accelerator pedal position will be 0 if the engine is not running or loaded.
Requested RPM

Units RPM
Description
This value contains the speed which is currently requested by the controller from the attached ECU.
This value is used for digital interfacing (via a communication bus) with ECUs that require the requested
speed directly in RPM.
DPF Soot Load

Units %
Description
Indicates the soot load percentage of diesel particulate filter (DPF).

DPF Ash Load

Units %
Description
Indicates the ash load percentage of diesel particulate filter (DPF).
DEF Level

Units %
Description
The level of diesel exhaust fluid tank.
Group: Generator
Earth Fault Current
Value group Generator Related FW 1.4.0

Units A
Description
Measured value of fault for evaluation of earth fault protection.
Generator Frequency

Units Hz
Description
Frequency of generator.
Generator Voltage L1-L2

Units V
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.

Generator Voltage L1-N

Units V
Description
Generator voltage on phase 1.

Units V
Description

Units V
Description

Units V
Description

Units V
Description

Nominal Current

Units A
Description
Generator nominal current.
Calculation of value Nominal Current in Autodetect:
For Connection Type: SplPhL1L2 and SplPhL1L3 power factor 1 is used in the formula of
calculation of value Nominal Current.
For the other types: High Leg Delta, 3Ph Low Y, 3Ph High Y, Mono Phase power factor 0.8 is used.
Note: Visible only when Connection type (page 225) = Autodetect.
Nominal Power

Units V
Description
Generator nominal power.
Nominal Voltage

Units V
Description
Generator nominal voltage.
Group: Load
Load P
Value group Load Related FW 1.4.0

Units kW
Description
Load active power.

Load P L1

Units kW
Description
Load active power in phase L1.
Load P L2

Units kW
Description
Load P L3

Units kW
Description
Load Q

Units kVAr
Description
Load reactive power.
Load Q L1

Units kVAr
Description
Load reactive power in phase L1.

Load Q L2

Units kVAr
Description
Load Q L3

Units kVAr
Description
Load S

Units kVA
Description
Load apparent power.
Load S L1

Units kVA
Description
Load apparent power L1.
Load S L2

Units kVA
Description

Load S L3

Units kVA
Description
Load Power Factor
Load Load Related FW 1.4.0

Units [-]
Description
Load power factor.
Load Power Factor L1

Units [-]
Description
Load power factor on phase L1.

Units [-]
Description

Units [-]
Description

Load Character

Units [-]
Description
Character of the load. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive load (power factor =
1).
Load Character L1

Units [-]
Description
Character of the load on phase L1. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive load
(power factor = 1).
Load Character L2

Units [-]
Description
(power factor = 1).
Load Character L3

Units [-]
Description
(power factor = 1).

Load Current L1

Units A
Description
Current phase L1 of Load.
Load Load Current L2

Units A
Description
Load Current L3

Units A
Description
Group: Mains
Mains Frequency
Value group Mains Related FW 1.4.0

Units Hz
Description
Frequency of Mains.
Mains Voltage L1-N

Units V
Description
Mains voltage on phase 1.

Mains Voltage L2-N

Units V
Description
Mains Voltage L3-N

Units V
Description
Mains Voltage L1-L2

Units V
Description
Mains phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.
Mains Voltage L2-L3

Units V
Description
Mains Voltage L3-L1

Units V
Description

Group: User Buttons
User Button 1
Value group User Buttons Related FW 1.4.0

Units [-]
Description
State of User Button 1.
Note: For more information see User Buttons on page 173.
User Button 2

Units [-]
Description
User Button 3

Units [-]
Description
User Button 4

Units [-]
Description

User Button 5

Units [-]
Description
User Button 6

Units [-]
Description
User Button 7

Units [-]
Description
User Button 8

Units [-]
Description

User Button 9

Units [-]
Description
User Button 10

Units [-]
Description
User Button 11

Units [-]
Description
User Button 12

Units [-]
Description

User Button 13

Units [-]
Description
User Button 14

Units [-]
Description
User Button 15

Units [-]
Description
User Button 16

Units [-]
Description

Group: Dual operation
Master Running Hours
Value group Dual operation Related FW 1.4.0

Units
Description
This is actual value of running hours of Master controller used in dual operation function (Running Hours
(page 584) + Running Hours Base (page 311)).
Running Hours To Swap

Units
Description
This value shows how long it will take until the swap between gen-sets will be made.
Slave Running Hours

Units
Description
This is actual value of running hours of Slave controller used in dual operation function (Running Hours
(page 584) + Running Hours Base (page 311)).
Group: Controller I/O
Battery Volts
Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.4.0

Units V
Description
Controller supply voltage.

D+

Units V
Description
D+ terminal voltage.
Analog Input 1

Units Configurable
Description
This is the value of the analog input 1 of the controller.
Analog Input 2

Units Configurable
Description
Analog Input 3

Units Configurable
Description
Analog Input 4

Units Configurable
Description

Binary Inputs

Units [-]
Description
State of the binary inputs of the controller.
E-Stop

Units %
Description
Shows number of E-STOP input – the same principle of visualization like binary inputs.
Principle of value (principle of normally close binary input):
1 – E-STOP has voltage – state is OK
0 – E-STOP has no voltage – protection is active
Binary Outputs

Units [-]
Description
State of the binary outputs of the controller.
Group: Statistics
Genset kWh
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.4.0

Units kWh
Description
Counter of Gen-set active power.

Genset kVArh

Units kVArh
Description
Counter of Gen-set reactive power.
Conditioned Running Hours 1

Units [h]
Description
This value contains counted hours of running the engine while LBI CONDITIONED RUNNING HOURS 1 (PAGE
614) is active.
Note: The engine has to be also running although it is not required to be excited.

Units [h]
Description
This value contains counted hours of running the engine while LBI CONDITIONED RUNNING HOURS 2 (PAGE
614) is active.
Note: The engine has to be also running although it is not required to be excited.
Mains kWh

Units kWh
Description
Counter of mains active power .

Mains kVArh

Units kVArh
Description
Counter of mains reactive power.

Units hours
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 1.
Statistic value for Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page 276).

Units days
Description
Statistic value for Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 277).

Units hours
Description


Units days
Description

Units hours
Description

Units days
Description
Rental 1

Units hours
Description
Remaining hours of Rental Timer 1 (page 474).

Rental 2

Units days
Description
Remaining days of Rental Timer 2 (page 476).
Num E-Stops

Units [-]
Description
Emergency stop alarms counter.
Note: This value counts only in case that Gen-set was stopped due to E-Stop or Emergency Stop.
Shutdowns

Units [-]
Description
Shutdown alarms counter. This counter counts all occurrences of a shutdown alarm, not only real
shutdowns of the Gen-set, i.e. the counter is increased by 2 if two shutdown alarms appear
simultaneously.

Total Fuel Consumption

Units L
Description
Value containing total amount of consumed fuel by engine. The controller automatically updates this value
every 30 s. The controller can calculate it in three ways:
Direct reading from ECU
Calculation based on actual fuel consumption reading from ECU
Calculation from fuel level drop in tank (using Fuel Level Analog Input + Fuel Tank Volume (page
269) setpoint)
Note: The accuracy of Total Fuel Consumption depends on the precision of ECU values or precision
of Fuel Tank Volume (page 269) and fuel level sensor.
Time Till Empty 1

Units days
Description
Assessment in days when the fuel tank will be empty.
Note: This value is based on setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 269) and value from ECU Fuel Rate.
For correct calculation of this value is necessary to have configured ECU which send Fuel Rate value,
otherwise this value can’t be calculated.
Time Till Empty 2

Units hours
Description
Assessment in hours when the fuel tank will be empty.

Time Till Empty 3

Units minutes
Description
Assessment in minutes when the fuel tank will be empty.
Num Starts

Units [-]
Description
Engine start commands counter. The counter is increased by 1 even if the particular start command will
take more than one attempt.
Pulse Counter 1

Units -
Description
This is the value of PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 628) function.
Note: Maximum value is 1000000.
Pulse Counter 2

Units -
Description
This is the value of PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 629) function.
Note: Maximum value is 1000000.

Running Hours

Units hours
Description
Engine operation hours counter. The engine hours are incremented in the controller while the engine is
running.
Note: If an ECU is configured and it provides engine hours value, the value is taken from the ECU.
Group: Info
Active Application
Value group Info Related FW 1.4.0

Units [-]
Description
This Value mirrors the active application in the controller.
Example: AMF or MRS.
Controller Mode

Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual controller mode.
Application

Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual application in controller.
Example: AMF25, AMF20, AMF9, AMF8 or MRS16.

Breaker State

Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual "breaker state" message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.
Connection Type

Units [-]
Description
The text of this value represents the connection type which is adjusted in setpoint Connection type (page
225).
Engine State

Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual "engine state" message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.
FW Branch

Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual branch of firmware in controller.
FW Version

Units [-]
Description
Major and minor firmware version number.

HW Version

Units [-]
Comm object Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Major and minor hardware version number.
ID String

Units [-]
Description
Name of controller which is used in InteliConfig in command bar.
Load Shedding Status

Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual "load shedding stage". The Value can get the values of the range 0 to 5, where 0
means no load shedding stage is active and 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 means that the corresponding load shedding
stage is active.
SPI Module A

Units [-]
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot A.
SPI Module B

Units [-]
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot B.

Timer Text

Units [-]
Description
The value contains the "Current process timer" text which is shown on the main screen of the controller.
Timer Value

Units [HH:MM:SS]
Description
The value contains the "Current process timer" value which is shown on the main screen of the controller.
Group: Log Bout
Log Bout 1
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.4.0

Units [-]
Description
State of binary outputs.
Log Bout 2

Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 3

Units [-]
Description

Log Bout 4

Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 5

Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 6

Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 7

Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 8

Units [-]
Description

Log Bout 9

Units [-]
Description
Group: Fixed Protection States
Fixed Protections States 1
Fixed Protection
Value group Related FW 1.4.0
States
Units [-]
Description
Values of LBO Fixed Protections State.
Fixed Protection
States
Units [-]
Description
Fixed Protection
States
Units [-]
Description

Fixed Protection
States
Units [-]
Description
Fixed Protection
States
Units [-]
Description
Group: User Protection States
User Protections States 1
Value group User Protection States Related FW 1.4.0

Units [-]
Description
Values of LBO User Protections State.
Group: CM-4G-GPS
Signal Strength
Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.4.0

Units %
Description
This value contains information about relative strength of the cellular signal received by the CM2-4G-GPS
module. It is a relative value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting cases.

Network Status

Units [-]
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the GSM modem.
Code Description
Not availab Not available
Available Available
Attached Attached

Last Email Result

Units [-]
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.
Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
4 Maximum length of data can’t be read.
5 No appeal to send command.
6 Command can’t be send.
7 Command can’t be send.
8 HELO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
18 SMTP server refused the data of email.
19 SMTP server refused the data of email.
20 QUIT command was refused.
21 Lost of connection.
23 Error during closing the connection.
24 No answer from server.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
28 Error of encoding.
29 There was no attempt to send email.

Network Name

Units [-]
Description
The name of operator which to SIM card is connected.
Note: If roaming service is used then prefix "R" is added before the name of operator.
Network Mode

Units [-]
Description
The type of data connection.
GPS Status

Units [-]
Description
Value describing the GPS signal.
Code Description
Undefined GPS signal is not available. Check antenna connection.
Searching Looking up for signal from available satellites.
Fixed GPS signal available.
Latitude

Units [-]
Description
Actual GPS latitude. Positions on north hemisphere have positive value, position on south hemisphere
have negative value.

Longitude

Units [-]
Description
Actual GPS longitude. Positions on east hemisphere have positive value, position on west hemisphere
have negative value.
Active Satellites

Units [-]
Description
Number of available satellites for GPS location.
Speed

Units [-]
Description
Actual speed of the controller calculated from the GPS coordinates.
HomePosDist

Units km
Description
Actual distance from home position. Home position is adjusted via setpoints Home Latitude (page 479)
and Home Longitude (page 480) or by binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE 623).

AirGate Status

Units [-]
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.
AirGate Status
Code Description
Not defined Setpoint AirGate Connection is Disabled
Wait to connect Waiting to connect
Resolving Resolving
Connecting Connecting
Creat sec chan Creating secure channel
Registering Registering
Conn inoperable Connected, inoperable
Conn operable Connected, operable
Susp AGkeyEmpty AirGate is not set in the controller
AirGate ID

Units [-]
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.
AirGate Servicing Node

Units [-]
Description
IP address of AirGate 2 node to which the module is currently attached.

Current IP Address
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.4.0

Units [-]
Description
Current IP address of the controller.
Primary DNS
CM-Ethernet
CM-4G-GPS
Units [-]
Description
Current domain name server.
Secondary DNS

Units [-]
Description
Backup domain name server.
Modem Status

Units [-]
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the modem.
Modem Status
Code Description
OK Module successfully initialized and connected to the cellular network
E01 Unsuccessful restore to the factory settings
E02 Modem configuration error
SIM not inserted or locked by PIN.
E SIM Use another device (e.g. mobile phone) to disable the option for
SIM to be locked by PIN

It is not possible to set manually chosen network mode
E04
2G/3G/4G/Automatic
It is not possible to register into cellular network. Possible reasons:
E registration No signal (no coverage, broken or unconnected antenna)
Manually chosen network mode 2G/3G/4G is not available
It is not possible to set PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context for defined
APN (Access Point Name). Possible reasons:
E context
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (format)
Wrong PDP context number
It is not possible to connect to cellular network (ATD*99***context)
E connect Possible reasons:
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (wrong text)
E09 It is not possible to get signal strength
E10 It is not possible to get operator name
E11 Loss of registration into cellular network was detected
E12 Data error
E13 Data error
E14 Modem was restarted
It is not possible to send SMS. Possible reasons:
E SMS send Wrong number
SIM doesn’t support SMS
E18 Modem hardware configuration error
E conn lost Loss of connection with cellular network
Restart-config Modem was restarted due to the change of controller setpoint
Restart-app Modem was restarted due to the performed cellular connection check

Modem FW Version

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Step 1
Setpoint visibility
Description
This value shows FW version of modem on CM2-4G-GPS plug-in card.
Group: CM-Ethernet
ETH Interface Status

Units [-]
Description
Current status of ethernet communication.
Current IP Address

Units [-]
Description
Current IP address of the controller.
Current Subnet Mask

Units [-]
Description
Current subnet mask.

Current Gateway

Units [-]
Description
Current gateway address.
Primary DNS
CM-Ethernet
CM-4G-GPS
Units [-]
Description
Current domain name server.
Secondary DNS

Units [-]
Description
Backup domain name server.
AirGate ID

Units [-]
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.
AirGate Servicing Node

Units [-]
Description
IP address of AirGate 2 node to which the module is currently attached.

AirGate Status

Units [-]
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.
Code Description
Resolving Resolving

Last Email Results

Units [-]
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.
Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
8 HELO command was refused.
9 EHLO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
20 QUIT command was refused.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
27 Email address can’t be read.
30 SMTP server address translation error (from DNS server).
31 Error reading email content data (24327).
MAC Address

Units [-]
Description
Current MAC address of the controller ethernet interface.

Ethernet PHY Mode

Units [-]
Description
Ethernet interface mode:
10- HD 10 Mbit Half-Duplex

10- FD 10 Mbit Full-Duplex
100- HD 100 Mbit Half-Duplex
10- FD 100 Mbit Full-Duplex
Group: Date/Time
Date
Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.4.0

Units DD.MM.YYYY
Description
Shows setup date.
Time

Units HH:MM:SS
Description
Shows setup time.
Time Mode

Units HH:MM:SS
Description
Indicates actual time mode.
STD – Standard zone time (e.g GMT+1 for Prague).
DST – Daylight Saving Time = STD+1 (e.g. GMT+2 for Prague).

Group: Plug-In I/O
EM BIO A
Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 1.4.0

Units [-]
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot A.
EM BIO B
Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 1.4.0

Units [-]
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot B.
Group: PLC
PLC-BOUT 1
Value group PLC Related FW 1.4.0

Units [-]
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.
PLC-BOUT 2

Units [-]
Description

PLC-BOUT 3

Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 4

Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 5

Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 6

Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 7

Units [-]
Description

PLC Resource 1

Units [-]
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).
PLC Resource 2

Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 3

Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 4

Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 5

Units [-]
Description

PLC Resource 6

Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 7

Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 8

Units [-]
Description

8.1.4 Logical binary inputs
What Logical binary inputs are:
Logical binary inputs are inputs for binary values and functions.
Alphabetical groups of Logical binary inputs

LBI: A 609
LBI: B 614
LBI: C 614
LBI: D 615
LBI: E 616
LBI: F 620
LBI: G 622
LBI: H 624
LBI: I 624
LBI: M 624
LBI: N 626
LBI: O 627
LBI: P 627
LBI: R 629
LBI: S 633
LBI: T 636
For a full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary inputs alphabetically (page 608).

Logical binary inputs alphabetically
Access Lock 609 Dual Swap Gen-sets 615 Prestart Bypass 627
Alternate Config 2 609 Dual Top Priority 616 Protection Force Disable 628
Alternate Config 3 609 ECU Key Switch 617 Pulse Counter 1 628
AMF Start Block 609 ECU Red Lamp Blink 617 Pulse Counter 2 629
Application AMF 610 ECU Red Lamp Fast Rem TEST On Load 629
Application MRS 610 Blink 617 Remote AUTO 630
ATT DEF Level Lamp ECU Red Lamp Solid 617 Remote Ctrl Lock 630
Blink 610 ECU Speed Down 617 Remote MAN 630
ATT DEF Level Lamp ECU Speed Up 618 Remote OFF 631
Fast Blink 610 ECU Wait To Start Blink 618 Remote Start/Stop 632
ATT DEF Level Lamp ECU Wait To Start Fast Remote TEST 633
Solid 610 Blink 618
Sd Override 633
ATT DPF Lamp Blink 611 ECU Wait To Start Solid 618
Start Blocking 633
ATT DPF Lamp Fast Blink611 ECU Yellow Lamp Blink 618
Start Button 634
ATT DPF Lamp Solid 611 ECU Yellow Lamp Fast
Starter 1 Disabled 634
ATT Force Regen 611 Blink 619
Starter 2 Disabled 634
ATT HEST Lamp Blink 611 ECU Yellow Lamp Solid 619
Starter Priority 634
ATT HEST Lamp Fast Emergency MAN 619
Stop Button 634
Blink 612 Emergency Stop 619
Switch To AUT 635
ATT HEST Lamp Solid 612 External Mains Fail Relay 620
Switch To MAN 635
ATT Inhibit Regen 612 Fault Reset Button 620
Switch To OFF 636
ATT Inhibited Lamp Blink 612 Force Idle 621
Total Emergency Stop 636
ATT Inhibited Lamp Fast Fuel Pump On/Off 621
Blink 612
GCB Button 622 6 back to Controller
ATT Inhibited Lamp Solid 613 objects
GCB Disable 622
ATT Interlock 613
GCB Feedback 623
ATT SCR Error Lamp
Geo Home Position 623
Blink 613
Geo-Fencing Enable 624
ATT SCR Error Lamp
Horn Reset Button 624
Fast Blink 613
Idle Speed 624
ATT SCR Error Lamp
Solid 613 Mains Fail Block 624
Battery Charger 614 Manual Load

Reconnection 625
Conditioned Running
Hours 1 614 MCB Button 625
Conditioned Running MCB Disable 625

Hours 2 614 MCB Feedback 626
Choke Inhibit 614 Neutral Position 626
Dark Mode* 615 Oil Pressure 627

LBI: A
Access Lock
Related FW 1.4.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1
Description
When this input is active, no setpoints can be adjusted from controller's front panel and controller mode
(OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) cannot be changed. The front panel buttons can not be used as well.
Note: Access Lock does not protect setpoints and mode changing from InteliConfig. To avoid
unqualified changes the selected setpoints have to be password protected.
Also the buttons Fault Reset and Horn Reset are not blocked at all and buttons Start and
Stop in MAN mode are not blocked.
6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Alternate Config 2
Comm object 859
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the second set (setpoints with number 2).

Alternate Config 3
Comm object 860
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the third set (setpoints with number 3).

AMF Start Block
Related FW 1.4.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 211
Description
This binary input can allow or block the AMF start. In case of running Gen-set in AUTO mode Gen-set
goes to cooling procedure and stops.

Application AMF
Comm object 1008
Description
LBI is used to select AMF mode. It has higher priority than the setpoint Default Application Select (page
233).

Application MRS
Comm object 1009
Description
LBI is used to select MRS mode. It has higher priority than the setpoint Default Application Select (page
233).

ATT DEF Level Lamp Blink
Comm object 1076
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp (page 732) in alarmlist and DEF
Level Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

ATT DEF Level Lamp Fast Blink
Comm object 1077
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp (page 732) in alarmlist and ATT
DEF Level Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

ATT DEF Level Lamp Solid
Comm object 1075
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp (page 732) in alarmlist and ATT
DEF Level Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

ATT DPF Lamp Blink
Comm object 1067
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DPF Lamp (page 732) in alarmlist and ECU Filter
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

ATT DPF Lamp Fast Blink
Comm object 1068
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DPF Lamp (page 732) in alarmlist and ATT Filter
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

ATT DPF Lamp Solid
Comm object 1066
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DPF Lamp (page 732) in alarmlist and ATT DPF
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

ATT Force Regen
Comm object 680
Description
Aftertreatment Regeneration Force Switch
User manually activates regeneration function
Push-button control – function activated by pulse (signals longer than 5 seconds will be carried as
long as the input is active)

ATT HEST Lamp Blink
Comm object 1070
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT HEST Lamp (page 732) in alarmlist and ECU
HEST Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

ATT HEST Lamp Fast Blink
Comm object 1071
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT HEST Lamp (page 732) in alarmlist and ATT
HEST Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

ATT HEST Lamp Solid
Comm object 1069
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT HEST Lamp (page 732) in alarmlist and ATT
HEST Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

ATT Inhibit Regen
Comm object 679
Description
Aftertreatment Regeneration Inhibit Switch
User blocks automatic regeneration function
2 state switch control – function activated by still signal

ATT Inhibited Lamp Blink
Comm object 1079
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp (page 733) in alarmlist and
Inhibited Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

ATT Inhibited Lamp Fast Blink
Comm object 1080
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp (page 733) in alarmlist and
Inhibited Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

ATT Inhibited Lamp Solid
Comm object 1078
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp (page 733) in alarmlist and ATT
Inhibited Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

ATT Interlock
Comm object 956
Description
ATT Regeneration Interlock
User manually allows the regeneration (not same as Regen Force)
2-state switch control – function activated by still signal
Interlock activates Regeneration State after set of conditions is met, only after that the signal is
activated

ATT SCR Error Lamp Blink
Comm object 1073
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT SCR Error Lamp (page 732) in alarmlist and SCR
Error Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

ATT SCR Error Lamp Fast Blink
Comm object 1074
Description
Error Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

ATT SCR Error Lamp Solid
Comm object 1072
Description
Error Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

LBI: B
Battery Charger
Comm object 623
Description
When binary input is active and its delay Battery Charger Fail Delay (page 273) is out of time then alarm
Wrn Battery Charger Fail (page 745) is activated.
LBI: C
Comm object 1094
Description
This LBI enables incrementation of statistic value CONDITIONED RUNNING HOURS 1 (PAGE 578).

Comm object 1095
Description
This LBI enables incrementation of statistic value CONDITIONED RUNNING HOURS 2 (PAGE 578).

Choke Inhibit
Comm object 946
Description
Logical binary input CHOKE INHIBIT prevent Choke functionality when logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE
647) is activated. If CHOKE INHIBIT is activated when CHOKE LBO is active, CHOKE LBO is deactivated
immediately and vice versa if LBI CHOKE INHIBIT is deactivated and LBO CHOKE should be active then is
activated.

LBI: D
Dark Mode*
Comm object 930
Description
This binary input activates function of dark mode. This LBI switches off all LEDs and ICD.
On the HMI Display->Administration->Settings->Backlight Control=LBI Dark Mode has to be set.

Dual Swap Gen-sets
Comm object 947
Description
This LBI enables or disables swapping of gen-sets on load in dual operation. This LBI has higher priority
then setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 311). This LBI is accepted only in Master controller.

Dual Top Priority
Comm object 954
Description
This LBI defines, which gen-set has higher priority in dual operation mode. If this LBI is active on one gen-
set, this gen-set is used in dual operation function (running hours values are not used to decide, which
gen-set should start).
Setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 311) or LBI DUAL SWAP GEN-SETS (PAGE 615) has higher priority than
this LBI.
Example: Engine 1 is running. LBI Top Priority is activated on engine 2. If swapping of gen-sets is
disabled, nothing happens. If swapping of gen-sets is enabled, engine 2 is started and engine 1 is
stopped.
Note: If this LBI is active on both gen-sets, the behavior is not changed. Decision is based on running
hours values.
LBI: E
ECU Communication Fail Block
Comm object 141
Description
Activation of this binary input blocks all protections (including user protections) for every single configured
ECU.
ECU Communication Fail Block 1

Comm object 1020
Description
Activation of this binary input blocks all protections (including user protections) for ECU configured in ECU
slot 1. Alarm Wrn ECU 1 Comm Fail (page 730) is deactivated while this LBI is active.
ECU Communication Fail Block 2

Comm object 1021
Description
Activation of this binary input blocks all protections (including user protections) for ECU configured in ECU
slot 2. Alarm Wrn ECU 2 Comm Fail (page 730) is deactivated while this LBI is active.

ECU Key Switch
Comm object 951
Description
This binary input is used to switch on ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 651), when engine start is not requested.
It is intended to enable engine values reading, when engine doesn't run.
When this binary input is active, binary output ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 651) is active too.
When this binary input is inactive, function of ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 651) is not affected.

ECU Red Lamp Blink
Comm object 1061
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Red Lamp (page 731) in alarmlist and ECU Red
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

ECU Red Lamp Fast Blink
Comm object 1062
Description
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

ECU Red Lamp Solid
Comm object 1060
Description
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

ECU Speed Down
Comm object 164
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 275) by binary inputs. When
the LBI is activated the setpoint is decreased by 2 %.

ECU Speed Up
Comm object 165
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 275) by binary inputs. When
the LBI is activated the setpoint is increase by 2%.

ECU Wait To Start Blink
Comm object 1064
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Wait To Start (page 732) in alarmlist and ECU
Wait To Start Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

ECU Wait To Start Fast Blink
Comm object 1065
Description
Wait To Start Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

ECU Wait To Start Solid
Comm object 1063
Description
Wait to Start Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

ECU Yellow Lamp Blink
Comm object 1058
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Yellow Lamp (page 731) in alarmlist and ECU
Yellow Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

ECU Yellow Lamp Fast Blink
Comm object 1059
Description
Yellow Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

ECU Yellow Lamp Solid
Comm object 1057
Description
Yellow Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

Emergency MAN
Comm object 45
Description
This input is designed to allow the Gen-set system or breakers to be controlled externally, not by the
controller. This feature can be useful in case of some failure, which disables the Gen-set or breakers to be
controlled by the controller, but the Gen-set itself is operational.
The controller behaves in the following way:
Shows the text EmergMan in the engine status on the main screen.
Stops all functions regarding the Gen-set or breaker control, deactivates all outputs related to it.
Stop Fail alarm is not being evaluated and stop solenoid is not activated if nonzero speed is
detected.
When the input is deactivated, the controller takes control according to the situation in the moment
of deactivation, i.e. the Gen-set remains running loaded if it was running and GCB was closed in the
moment the input was deactivated.

Emergency Stop
Comm object 40
Description
The shutdown procedure will start immediately when this input is activated.
Note: In case of controller hardware or software fail, safe stop of the engine doesn’t have to be
ensured. To back-up the Emergency Stop function it is recommended to connect separate circuit for
disconnection of Fuel Solenoid and Starter signals.
For more detail see chapter Recommended wiring.

External Mains Fail Relay
Comm object 197
Description
Binary input for external mains fail indication.
When the LBI: External Mains Fail Relay is active:
Controller accepts that MCB was opened by an external mains fail relay, it means that it does not
try to close MCB
It behaves like in case of a standard mains failure, which is evaluated from the mains voltages
measurement (the front panel mains icon is red, LBO: AL MAINS FAIL (PAGE 644) is active, Gen-set
is started when controller is in the AUT mode etc.)
Controller displays alarm ALI External Mains Fail (page 717)
When the LBI: External Mains Fail Relay is deactivated:
Controller automatically closes MCB, if it is in the OFF/AUT mode and mains is healthy
It behaves like in case of a standard mains return (if healthy mains voltage is detected)
Alarm ALI External Mains Fail (page 717) automatically disappears
Note: This input can by used for Mains fail simulation
LBI: F
Fault Reset Button
Comm object 191
Description
Binary input has the same function as Fault Reset button on the InteliLite 4 front panel.

Force Idle
Comm object 604
Description
This logical binary input can force engine to idle speed in MAN or AUTO mode.
Note: This binary input has no influence on engine cooling speed.
IMPORTANT: GCB has to be open
Activation of LBI:
Following procedure is executed:
Alarm AHI Manual Idle (page 717) is activated
LBO IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 667) is switched to idle state and value Requested RPM (page 561)
goes to Idle RPM (page 247) value
Underfrequency protection and undervoltage protection are not evaluated
Controller is in Manual Idle state until deactivation of this LBI
Deactivation of LBI
Controller goes to MinStab state
AHI Manual Idle (page 717) is not present in alarm list
LBO IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 667) is switched to nominal state and valueRequested RPM (page 561)
goes to nominal value
Controller goes to Running state

Fuel Pump On/Off
Comm object 694
Description
This binary input is used for manual control of binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 658). The output is
deactivated automatically as soon as fuel level reaches 100 %.
Note: This binary input is basically designed for ON and OFF switch (switch with arrestment in these
positions) because controller reacts to rising and falling edge of signal in this input.
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 658) is control by this binary input.
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 694) for proper
function of this binary input.

LBI: G
GCB Button
Comm object 193
Description
Binary input has the same function as the GCB button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in
MAN mode only.

GCB Disable
Comm object 62
Description
When this LBI is active, it is not possible to close GCB – LBO GCB Close/Open, GCB ON Coil cannot be
activated by panel GCB close button, or close command or by auto command.

GCB Feedback
Comm object 63
Description
Use this input for indication whether the generator circuit breaker is open or closed.
Image 8.39 GCB Feedback 1
Image 8.40 GCB Feedback 2
Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Geo Home Position
Comm object 219
Description
This binary input can be used to adjust home position of gen-set. In case that binary input is active,
setpoints Home Latitude (page 479) and Home Longitude (page 480) are adjusted automatically from
actual coordinates from GPS signal.
Note: Input has to be activated for at least 2 seconds.

Geo-Fencing Enable
Comm object 218
Description
This binary input enables or disables Fence 1 Protection (page 481) and Fence 2 Protection (page
483) if Group: Geo-Fencing (page 479) is adjusted to value "LBI Enable".
LBI: H
Horn Reset Button
Comm object 192
Description
Binary input has the same function as Horn reset button on the InteliLite 4 front panel.
LBI: I
Idle Speed
Comm object 624
Description
This binary input changes cooling speed from nominal to idle.
LBI: M
Mains Fail Block
Comm object 622
Description
If the input is active, the automatic start of the Gen-set at Mains failure is blocked. In case of running Gen-
set in AUTO mode, timer Mains Return Delay (page 296) is started and when it elapses GCB is opened,
Gen-set goes to cooling procedure and stops. When GCB is opened after Transfer Delay (page 312) the
MCB is closed.
Note: This input simulates healthy Mains.

Manual Load Reconnection
Comm object 60
Description
This input is used for manual reconnection of the last disconnected part of the load, if the load has dropped
below the setpoint Load Reconnection Level (page 316). This works only if automatic reconnection is
disabled, i.e. the setpoint Auto Load Reconnection (page 317) = Disabled.

MCB Button
Comm object 194
Description
This binary input has the same function as MCB button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in
MAN mode only.

MCB Disable
Comm object 124
Description
When this LBI is active, it is not possible to close MCB – LBO MCB Close/Open, MCB ON Coil cannot be
activated by panel MCB close button, or close command or by auto command.

MCB Feedback
Comm object 65
Description
Use this input for indication whether the mains circuit breaker is open or closed.
Image 8.41 MCB Feedback 1
Image 8.42 MCB Feedback 2
LBI: N
Neutral Position
Comm object 1090
Description
In MAN mode this input switches a three position ATS switch to its neutral position – it activates the binary
outputs NEUTRAL CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 676) and NEUTRAL ON COIL (PAGE 677). MCB and GCB are
switched to off.

LBI: O
Oil Pressure
Comm object 43
Description
Binary input for Oil Pressure indication.
IMPORTANT: This binary input is also used for evaluating engine running condition.
Example: Normally close connection – when LBI is active then oil pressure is OK and is higher than
starting oil pressure.
Note: In case that you want to use binary input Oil Pressure just for protection please create new
binary input with User protection.
LBI: P
Prestart Bypass
Comm object 42
Description
While this LBI is active, Gen-set skips prestart phase.

Protection Force Disable
Comm object 16
Description
Activation of this LBI disables selected protections.
Proper history record is written to the history log.
Protection Force Disable active
Protection Force Disable inactive
Note: Some of the fixed protections has possibility to turn off. These protections has dedicated
setpoints located in setpoint group Protections. Setpoints have options: Enabled, Disabled (protection
is turned off), ExtDisabled (protection is turned off by LBI).

Pulse Counter 1
Comm object 87
Description
This is the input of the Pulse Counter 1 function. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 (page 274) the
counter value Pulse Counter 1 (page 583) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
Note: Recommended length of the pulse is 500 ms.

Pulse Counter 2
Comm object 88
Description
This is the input of the Pulse Counter 2 function. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 (page 274) the
counter value Pulse Counter 2 (page 583) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
Note: Recommended length of the pulse is 500 ms.
LBI: R
Rem TEST On Load
Comm object 61
Description
Closing of the GCB in MRS or transferring of the load from the mains to Gen-set in AMF.
Application TEST Remote TEST On Load

Active: Gen-set is put to TEST mode. On the top of it the GCB is
Gen-set started
closed. The same behavior like the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE
and running until
MRS 632).
the TEST mode
Inactive: Gen-set comes back to the original mode and behaves
deactivated.
accordingly to this mode and other conditions.
Active: Gen-set is put to TEST mode. On the top of it the load is
Gen-set started transferred to the Gen-set.
and running until Inactive: Gen-set comes back to the original mode and behaves
AMF
the TEST mode accordingly to this mode and other conditions. (the load can be
deactivated. transferred back to the mains (OFF, AUTO) or stay on the Gen-
set (MAN).

Remote AUTO
Comm object 620
Description
The controller is switched to the AUTO mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
binary input is active. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
This binary input has the lowest priority from Remote OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST binary inputs
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

Remote Ctrl Lock
Comm object 4
Description
If the input is active, the controller will not accept any actions regarding the system control – e.g. writing of
commands and setpoint changes via remote communication interfaces.

Remote MAN
Comm object 618
Description
The controller is switched to the MAN mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
Remote TEST
Remote MAN

Remote OFF
Comm object 617
Description
The controller is switched to the OFF mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
Remote TEST
Remote MAN

Remote Start/Stop
Comm object 38
Description
Use this input to start and stop the Gen-set in AUTO and TEST mode.
Note: If the binary input Remote Start/Stop is active and engine is running and mains failure occurs,
the MCB breaker opens, after Transfer Delay (page 312) the GCB breaker is closed. Once the mains
is OK, the Mains Return Delay (page 296) elapses and the GCB breaker is opened. Then after
Transfer Delay (page 312) is MCB breaker closed. Gen-set remains running as long as binary input
Rem Start/Stop is active. For more details see timing diagram below.
Image 8.43 Remote Start/Stop
Taken action in AMF application (AUTO Mode)

Start the Gen-set and stay running with opened GCB if Mains OK.
Active Go to Island if Mains fails (due to AMF function).
If Mains is not OK the AMF function starts the Gen-set to Island anyway.
Stop the Gen-set if Mains is OK
Inactive
If Mains not OK the Gen-set stays running due to AMF function anyway.
Taken action in MRS application (AUTO Mode)

Starts the Gen-set – No delay
Active
Close GCB
Open GCB
Inactive
Stop the Gen-set – No delay

Remote TEST
Comm object 621
Description
The controller is switched to the TEST mode (there are fourthree modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when
this binary input is active. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
LBI: S
Sd Override
Comm object 44
Description
If this input is active, all alarms except Emergency Stop and Overspeed are suppressed. The suppressed
alarms will be displayed in the alarm list, but they will not take effect regarding the Gen-set control.
Note: Sd Override (page 633) is indicated in the alarm list if Sd Override mode is active to inform the
operator that the engine is not protected.
IMPORTANT: MISUSE OF THIS INPUT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE GEN-SET!
Note: User protection Sd Override is not blocked

Start Blocking
Comm object 68
Description
Start of the Gen-set is blocked if this binary input gets active before Start command is issued. While start is
blocked, alarm ALI Start Blocking is active.
Activation of this LBI while Gen-set is already running (or is about to be started) has no effect.
When LBI is active before Start command, the LBO READY (PAGE 679) is not active.

Start Button
Comm object 189
Description
Binary input has the same function as Start Button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
mode only.

Starter 1 Disabled
Comm object 1011
Description
When Gen-set has two starters available this LBI is used to disable starter 1.

Starter 2 Disabled
Comm object 1012
Description
When Gen-set has two starters available this LBI is used to disable starter 2.

Starter Priority
Comm object 1010
Description
By activating this LBI, STARTER 2 (PAGE 683) has higher priority in dual starter operation.

Stop Button
Comm object 190
Description
Binary input has the same function as Stop Button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
Mode only.

Switch To AUT
Comm object 1112
Description
When the first rising edge appears on the binary input, the MODE is changed to AUTO. Falling edge has
no effect and controller stays in AUTO MODE.
There is no blocking between these "Switch To" LBIs.
Example: CU is in OFF mode. LBI Switch To AUTO is activated – CU goes to AUTO Mode (LBI
stays active). Then LBI SWITCH TO MAN (PAGE 635) is activated – CU goes to MAN Mode (at this
moment, LBIs Switch To OFF and Switch To AUTO are active – CU reacts only on rising edges).
When more rising edges from "Switch To" LBIs are detected at the same time, mode is selected according
to priorities in the table below.
"GO to" control priority

Highest OFF
MAN
Lowest AUTO

Switch To MAN
Comm object 1111
Description
When the first rising edge appears on the binary input, the MODE is changed to MAN. Falling edge has no
effect and controller stays in MAN MODE.
Example: CU is in OFF mode. LBI Switch To MAN is activated – CU goes to MAN Mode (LBI stays
active). Then LBI SWITCH TO AUT (PAGE 635) is activated – CU goes to AUTO Mode (at this
moment, LBIs Switch To MAN and Switch To AUTO are active – CU reacts only on rising edges).

Highest OFF
MAN
Lowest AUTO

Switch To OFF
Comm object 1110
Description
When the first rising edge appears on the binary input, the MODE is changed to OFF. Falling edge has no
effect and controller stays in OFF MODE.
Example: CU is in MAN mode. LBI Switch To OFF is activated – CU goes to OFF Mode (LBI stays
active). Then LBI SWITCH TO AUT (PAGE 635) is activated – CU goes to AUTO Mode (at this
moment, LBIs Switch To OFF and Switch To AUTO are active – CU reacts only on rising edges).

Highest OFF
MAN
Lowest AUTO
LBI: T
Total Emergency Stop
Comm object 995
Description
This binary input is used for stopping the engine and opening all breakers.
Activation of Total Emergency Stop leads to:
Alarm Total Emergency Stop is activated and history record TOTAL EMERGENCY STOP is
created
Controller will open MCB and GCB
Controller will keep MCB and GCB open as long as alarm is present in alarm list
Engine is stopped

8.1.5 Logical binary outputs
What Logical binary outputs are:
Logical binary outputs are outputs for binary values and functions.
Alphabetical groups of Logical binary outputs

LBO: A 640
LBO: C 647
LBO: D 648
LBO: E 649
LBO: F 657
LBO: G 660
LBO: H 666
LBO: I 667
LBO: L 669
LBO: M 670
LBO: N 676
LBO: P 677
LBO: R 679
LBO: S 681
LBO: U 686
LBO: V 689
For a full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 638).

Logical binary outputs alphabetically
AIN Switch01 640 Dummy Load Stage 1 648 Ignition 667

AIN Switch02 640 Dummy Load Stage 2 649 Ignition On 668
AIN Switch03 641 Dummy Load Stage 3 649 Initialized 669
AIN Switch04 641 Dummy Load Stage 4 649 Load Shedding Stage 1 669
Air Valves 642 Dummy Load Stage 5 649 Load Shedding Stage 2 669
AL Common BOC 642 ECU Comm OK 650 Load Shedding Stage 3 669
AL Common Sd 642 ECU Comm Error 650 Load Shedding Stage 4 670
AL Common Wrn 643 ECU Power Relay 651 Load Shedding Stage 5 670
AL Gen Freq Wrn 643 ECU Red Lamp 651 Mains Healthy 670
AL Gen Frequency 643 ECU Run Stop 652 Manual Ready 671
AL Gen Voltage 643 ECU Wait To Start 652 MCB Button Echo 671
AL Gen Voltage Wrn 643 ECU Yellow Lamp 652 MCB Button State 671
AL Mains Fail 644 Electrical Alarm 652 MCB Close/Open 671
AL Mains Frequency 644 Exercise Timer 1 653 MCB OFF Coil 673
AL Mains Voltage 644 Exercise Timer 2 653 MCB ON Coil 674
AL Maintenance 1 644 Exercise Timer 3 653 MCB UV Coil 675
AL Maintenance 2 644 Exercise Timer 4 653 Mode AUTO 676
AL Maintenance 3 645 FltRes Button Echo 657 Mode MAN 676
AL Gen Overcurrent 645 FltRes Button State 657 Mode OFF 676
Alarm 645 Frequency Select 658 Mode TEST 676
ATT DEF Level Lamp 645 Fuel Pump 658 Neutral Close/Open 676
ATT DPF Lamp 645 Fuel Solenoid 658 Neutral ON Coil 677
ATT HEST Lamp 646 GCB Button Echo 660 Not In AUTO 677
ATT Inhibited Lamp 646 GCB Button State 660 Not Used 677
ATT Interlock Status 646 GCB Close/Open 660 Peripheral Module Comm
ATT SCR Error Lamp 646 GCB OFF Coil 661 Fail 677
ATT Regen ACK Lamp 646 GCB ON Coil 662 Prestart 677
ATT PCD Lamp 647 GCB UV Coil 662 Ready 679
Choke 647 Gen-set Active 663 Ready To AMF 679
Cooling 647 Generator Healthy 664 Ready To Load 680
Cooling Pump 647 Glow Plugs 664 RegenerationNeeded 680
Common Alarm Active Heartbeat 666 Running 680

Level 1 648 History Record Indication 666 Sd Override 681
Common Alarm Active Horn 666 Start Button Echo 681
Level 2 648 Start Button State 681
HornRes Button Echo 666
Common Alarm Level 1 648 Starter 1 682
HornRes Button State 667
Common Alarm Level 2 648 Starter 2 683
Idle/Nominal 667
Dual Operation OK 648

Still Log 0 683
Still Log 1 683
Stop Button Echo 684
Stop Button State 684
Stop Pulse 684
Stop Solenoid 684
Supplying Load 686
User button 1 686
User button 2 686
User button 3 686
User button 4 686
User button 5 687
User button 6 687
User button 7 687
User button 8 687
User button 9 687
User button 10 687
User button 11 688
User button 12 688
User button 13 688
User button 14 688
User button 15 688
User button 16 688
Ventilation 689
Ventilation Off Pulse 689
Ventilation On Pulse 689
objects

LBO: A
AIN Switch01
Comm object 1400
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 1 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints AIN Switch01 On (page 336) and AIN Switch01 Off (page 337). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 692) analog input.
6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AIN Switch02
Comm object 1401
Description

AIN Switch03
Comm object 1402
Description

AIN Switch04
Comm object 1403
Description

Air Valves
Comm object 1247
Description
This output is activated together with binary output PRESTART (PAGE 677) and opens after the engine is
stopped or in case that engine is not ready.
Image 8.48 Air Valves

AL Common BOC
Comm object 9
Description
Output is activated when any BOC alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No BOC alarm is active and
Fault reset button is pressed

AL Common Sd
Comm object 4
Description
Output is activated when any shutdown alarm appears .
No shutdown alarm is active and

AL Common Wrn
Comm object 3
Description
Output is activated when any warning alarm appears.
No warning alarm is active and

AL Gen Freq Wrn
Comm object 1267
Description
This output is active generator frequency warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

AL Gen Frequency
Comm object 1266
Description
This output is active when at least one generator frequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

AL Gen Voltage
Comm object 1263
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

AL Gen Voltage Wrn
Comm object 1289
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

AL Mains Fail
Comm object 197
Description
This output is active when at least one mains frequency BOC or SD Alarm is present in alarmlist or in case
of Mains undervoltage and Mains underfrequency (doesn’t appear in the alarm list).

AL Mains Frequency
Comm object 1271
Description
This output is active when at least one mains frequency BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

AL Mains Voltage
Comm object 1270
Description
This output is active when at least one mains voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

AL Maintenance 1
Comm object 2211
Description
Alarm is active when Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page 737) or BOC Maintenance Timer 1
RunHours (page 779) or Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 738) or BOC Maintenance Timer
1 Interval (page 779) is active.

AL Maintenance 2
Comm object 2212
Description

AL Maintenance 3
Comm object 2213
Description

AL Gen Overcurrent
Comm object 109
Description
This output is active when the BOC Overcurrent IDMT (page 778) or BOC Short Circuit (page 778)
alarm is present in alarmlist or isn't confirm.

Alarm
Comm object 2
Description
The output is designed to be used as external alarm indication such as a red bulb in the control room etc.
The output is active when at least one unconfirmed alarm is present in the alarmlist and remains active
until confirmation of alarm.

ATT DEF Level Lamp
Comm object 2154
Description
This output is active when ATT DEF Level Lamp is active.

ATT DPF Lamp
Comm object 2152
Description
This output is active when ATT DPF Lamp is active.

ATT HEST Lamp
Comm object 1373
Description
This output is closed if ECU send signal HEST Lamp. If ECU stop send HEST LAMP signal binary input
will be opened without no matter if alarms in alarmlist are confirmed or not.

ATT Inhibited Lamp
Comm object 2155
Description
This output is active when ATT Inhibited Lamp is active.

ATT Interlock Status
Comm object 2233
Description
This output is active when ATT Interlock Status is active.

ATT SCR Error Lamp
Comm object 2153
Description
This output is active when ATT SCR Error Lamp is active.

ATT Regen ACK Lamp
Comm object 2231
Description
This LBO is active when the engine requires to confirm the start of aftertreatment regeneration.
Note: LBO is required in Yanmar engine types

ATT PCD Lamp
Comm object 2446
Description
This LBO is active when the engine Particulate Control Diagnostic System detects removal of DPF, loss of
DPF function or failure of PCD itself.
Note: LBO is required in Yanmar engine types
LBO: C
Choke
Comm object 2091
Description
Logical binary output for choke valve control. Output CHOKE is activated every time when logical binary
output STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) is activated. Output is deactivated when one of these conditions is fulfilled:
Choke Time is elapsed
Generator voltage is higher than Choke Voltage
Logical binary input Choke Inhibit is activated
Or when some of these situations during start occurs:
Any second level alarm
Emergency stop
Stop command
Cranking pause

Cooling
Comm object 74
Description
The output is active when Gen-set is in Cooling state.

Cooling Pump
Comm object 40
Description
This LBO is used for control of engine cooling. LBO is active when engine is running, when after cooling
time is counting or when LBI Cooling Pump is active.

Common Alarm Active Level 1
Comm object 13
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one Alarms level 1 (page 714) in the alarmlis.

Common Alarm Active Level 2
Comm object 15
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one Alarms level 2 (page 754) in the alarmlis.

Common Alarm Level 1
Comm object 14
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one unconfirmed Alarms level 1 (page 714) in the alarmlist.

Common Alarm Level 2
Comm object 16
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one unconfirmed Alarms level 2 (page 754) in the alarmlist.
LBO: D
Dual Operation OK
Comm object 2096
Description
This LBO is active when there is not AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 734) alarm in alarmlist.

Dummy Load Stage 1
Comm object 1439
Description
This LBO is used to activate corresponding stage of external load bank.

Dummy Load Stage 2
Comm object 1440
Description

Dummy Load Stage 3
Comm object 1441
Description

Dummy Load Stage 4
Comm object 1442
Description

Dummy Load Stage 5
Comm object 1443
Description
LBO: E
ECU 1 Comm Fail

Comm object 1998
Description
This output is closed when there is no communication with ECU configured in ECU slot 1.

ECU 2 Comm Fail

Comm object 1999
Description
This output is closed when there is no communication with ECU configured in ECU slot 2.

ECU Comm OK
Comm object 347
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, connected and the communication with the ECU is
established.
Note: When ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 651) is not configured, output is evaluated all the time. If ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 651) is configured, output is evaluated only when engine is not stop (ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 651) is active).

ECU Comm Error
Comm object 114
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the ECU is not established or
has dropped out.
Note: When ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 651) is not configured, output is evaluated all the time. If ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 651) is configured, output is evaluated only when engine is not stop (ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 651) is active).

ECU Power Relay
Comm object 116
Description
This output is to be used for control of "keyswitch" input of an ECU. If the particular ECU does not have
keyswitch or a similar input, it can be used for control of DC power for the ECU.
The output is activated together with PRESTART (PAGE 677) and remains active for the entire duration that
the engine is running. It is deactivated at the moment that the engine comes to a stop (i.e. together with the
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658)).
Image 8.49 ECU Power Relay
IMPORTANT: This LBO also affects evaluation of Sd ECU Communication Fail (page 762) or
Wrn ECU Communication Fail (page 730) alarms. With configured LBO ECU Power Relay,
these alarms are evaluated only when this LBO is active. Without configured LBO ECU
Power Relay, these alarm are evaluated all the time.

ECU Red Lamp
Comm object 350
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active “red lamp” flag, i.e. it has detected a critical
malfunction and the engine should not be operated until a service check is performed. This flag is taken
from the DM1 frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag in their own proprietary
frames and some do not provide the flag at all.

ECU Run Stop
Comm object 958
Description
Signal for starting and stopping of ECU.

ECU Wait To Start
Comm object 959
Description
This output is active when ECU Wait To Start Lamp is active.

ECU Yellow Lamp
Comm object 349
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active “yellow lamp” flag, i.e. it has detected a non-critical
malfunction. This flag is taken from the DM1 frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag
in their own proprietary frames and some do not provide the flag at all.

Electrical Alarm
Comm object 2410
Description
LBO Electrical Alarm is active when any of generator protections of any alarm level type (Overload, Short
Circuit, IDMT Overcurrent, Current Unbalance, Overvoltage, Undervoltage, Voltage Unbalance,
Overfrequency, Underfrequency, Reverse Power) is active.
LBO Electrical Alarm is deactivated by confirmation of generator protection alarms in alarmlist and
simultaneously generator protections alarms has to be inactive.

Exercise Timer 1
Comm object 1250
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 1. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the Gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 347) subgroup. This output
is active when Timer 1 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 347) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 355).

Exercise Timer 2
Comm object 1251
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 2. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the gen-set

Exercise Timer 3
Comm object 1946
Description

Exercise Timer 4
Comm object 1947
Description

Exercise Timer 5
Comm object 1948
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 5 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic tests
of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 5 (page 379) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

Exercise Timer 6
Comm object 1949
Description
applied.

Exercise Timer 7
Comm object 1950
Description
applied.

Exercise Timer 8
Comm object 1951
Description
applied.

Exercise Timer 9

Comm object 2630
Description
applied.
Exercise Timer 10

Comm object 2631
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 10 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
applied.
Exercise Timer 11

Comm object 2632
Description
applied.

Exercise Timer 12

Comm object 2633
Description
applied.
Exercise Timer 13

Comm object 2634
Description
applied.
Exercise Timer 14

Comm object 2635
Description
applied.

Exercise Timer 15

Comm object 2636
Description
applied.
Exercise Timer 16

Comm object 2637
Description
applied.
LBO: F
FltRes Button Echo
Comm object 592
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Fault Reset button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Fault Reset button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Fault Reset command is received via communication line or
The input FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 620) is activated.

FltRes Button State
Comm object 2695
Description
LBO is active as long as it's button is pressed or it's LBI is active.

Frequency Select
Comm object 1815
Description
The Frequency select output is active when Nominal Frequency (Frequency Settings) is equal to 50 Hz
and is deactivated when Nominal Frequency (Frequency Settings) is equal to 60 Hz.

Fuel Pump
Comm object 1253
Description
Output is activated when the value of Fuel Level lies under the value of setpoint Fuel Pump On (page
270) and is deactivated when value of Fuel Pump Off (page 271) is reached.
This output also can be activated by binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 621). In this case the binary
output is active until the binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 621) is active or until the value of Fuel
Level reaches 100 % or the time set by setpoint Transfer Wrn Delay (page 272) elapsed.

Fuel Solenoid
Comm object 22
Description
This output controls the fuel solenoid valve. The Fuel Solenoid output has two different behaviors
depending on engine type – gas or diesel. This setting is done by Fuel Solenoid (page 242) setpoint in
Engine Settings group.
Diesel:
The output is activated before binary output STARTER 1 (PAGE 682).The lead time is adjusted by setpoint
Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 253).
Image 8.50 Fuel Solenoid 1

The output is deactivated when:

Emergency Stop comes
Cooled Gen-set is stopped
In pause between repeated starts
Gas:
The output closes together with binary output IGNITION (PAGE 667) when engine RPM exceed 30 RPM (fix
value).
The output is deactivated when:

Emergency Stop comes
Cooled Gen-set is stopped
In pause between repeated starts

LBO: G
GCB Button Echo
Comm object 35
Description
GCB button is pressed on the controller front facia or
GCB button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
GCB command is received via communication line or
the input GCB BUTTON is activated.

GCB Button State
Comm object 2698
Description

GCB Close/Open
Comm object 41
Description
The output controls the generator circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by
the controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm
is issued.
Image 8.53 GCB Close command

Image 8.54 GCB Open command

GCB OFF Coil
Comm object 43
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5
seconds.
Image 8.55 GCB OFF Coil command

GCB ON Coil
Comm object 42
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5
second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.
Image 8.56 GCB ON Coil close command

GCB Status
Comm object 84
Description
This output indicates the GCB position as it is internally considered by the controller.

GCB UV Coil
Comm object 44
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of generator circuit breaker. The output is active the
whole time when the generator is running. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment
the breaker has to be switched off.

Image 8.57 GCB UV Coil close command
Image 8.58 GCB UV Coil open command

Gen-set Active
Comm object 60
Description
The output is closed at the beginning of the Prestart Time period and opens when the Gen-set is fully
stopped.
If the Gen-set fails to start, then this output is opened after last cranking attempt.
The output also closes if the engine begins to rotate spontaneously.

Generator Healthy
Comm object 77
Description
This output is active when the generator voltage, frequency and voltage unbalance is within limits. It is
deactivated:
immediately when the voltage/frequency/voltage unbalance gets out of limits (when GCB is not
closed)
or
with an appropriate delay after the voltage/frequency/voltage unbalance has got out of limits (when
GCB is closed)

Glow Plugs
Comm object 1252
Description
This output is dedicated for diesel engine only. This output will be active for exact time pre-set by setpoint
Glow Plugs Time (page 246) before every starting attempt. The output is deactivated at the same time
as the STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) output is activated (100 ms after PRESTART (PAGE 677) output is
deactivated).
Image 8.59 Glow Plugs

When the Glow Plugs Time (page 246) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 244) then the Glow
Plugs Time (page 246) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 244) as long as Cranking Fail Pause (page
244).
Image 8.60 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 1
When the Glow Plugs Time (page 246) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 244) then the Glow
Plugs Time (page 246) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 244) as long as the normal Glow Plugs Time
(page 246).
Image 8.61 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 2

LBO: H
Heartbeat
Comm object 81
Description
This output toggles on/off in a period of 500 ms whenever the controller is switched on and functional.

History Record Indication
Related
Related FW 1.4.0 AMF, MRS
applications
Comm object 2762
Description
This LBO triggers 1s pulse when new history record is created in history log.
Note: When more history records are created at the same time, only one 1s pulse is created.

Horn
Comm object 1
Description
The output designed to be used for acoustic indication of a newly appeared alarm. The output is activated
each time a new alarm has appeared and remains active until one of the following events occurs:
Fault reset is pressed
Horn reset is pressed

Horn Timeout (page 235) has elapsed

HornRes Button Echo
Comm object 31
Description
Horn Reset button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Horn Reset button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Horn Reset command is received via communication line or
the input HORN RESET BUTTON is activated.

HornRes Button State
Comm object 2696
Description
LBO: I
Idle/Nominal
Comm object 39
Description
This output is used for switching between idle speed and nominal speed of the engine during the startup
phase, if this feature (input) is available on the particular engine. In the case of some EFI engines, the
idle/nominal switching is performed over the communication bus.
The output Idle/Nominal is activated after the timer Idle Time (page 253) elapses. The Idle Time (page
253) starts to countdown when Starting RPM (page 245) reached. The underspeed protection is not
evaluated during fixed 5 seconds period after reaching Starting RPM (page 245). A Start Fail protection
occurs if the RPM drop below 2RPM during idle.
Image 8.62 Idle/Nominal
Note: Connect binary output Idle/Nominal to speed governor to switch the speed:
opened = Idle
closed = Nominal
(for normally open contact type)

Ignition
Comm object 37
Description

This output is dedicated to controlling the ignition at a gas engine. the output is active together with binary
output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) in the moment when the timer Sd Ventilation Time (page 257)
elapsed and the Gen-set reaches at least 30 RPM during cranking. The timer Sd Ventilation Time (page
257) become active when the Gen-set has been stopped for any Sd protection or the controller has been
turned on only before first cranking attempt. The output is deactivated 500 ms after all Additional running
engine indications (page 120) will be inactive. the output is deactivated when the Gen-set has to be
stopped or in pause during repeated starts.
Image 8.63 Ignition 1
Image 8.64 Ignition 2

Ignition On
Comm object 1257
Description
This output is on since start button is pressed till the unit is completely stopped (or the engine doesn’t start
or Sd or E-Stop is active)
Note: This function is the same as ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 651). Ignition ON stays there from
historical reasons.

Initialized
Related
Related FW 1.4.0 AMF, MRS
applications
Comm object 1222
Description
This output is activated when the engine proceeded through initialization phase. (Initialization phase is
restart or power up of the controller.)
LBO: L
Load Shedding Stage 1
Comm object 51
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality
The load shedding outputs are activated (load is being shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is being reconnected) in the order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by the LBO Nr.1 is the less essential load of these three possible loads instances.

Comm object 52
Description

Comm object 53
Description

Comm object 452
Description
The load shedding outputs are activated (load is beeing shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is beeing reconnected) in the order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

Comm object 453
Description
The load shedding outputs are activated (load is beeing shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is beeing reconnected) in the order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
LBO: M
Mains Healthy
Comm object 78
Description
This output is active while mains failure is not detected and mains voltage and frequency is within limits.
Mains Healthy is active when mains f and V are within the protection limits
Mains Healthy deactivates when there is active mains protection level 2
Mains Healthy cannot be activated when there is inactive not confirmed alarm Sd Emergency
Stop (page 762) in the alarmlist
Note: Mains Healthy cannot be activated when there is active ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite
(page 751) or ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted (page 751), ALI Mains Ph L2 Inverted (page 751) or ALI
Mains Ph L3 Inverted (page 751).

Manual Ready
Comm object 1258
Description
This output is active when controller is in MAN mode and the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it
i.e. no red alarm is activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633) is active (Output READY (PAGE 679) is active).

MCB Button Echo
Comm object 34
Description
MCB button is pressed on the controller front facia or
MCB button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
MCB command is received via communication line or
the input MCB BUTTON is activated.

MCB Button State
Comm object 2697
Description

MCB Close/Open
Comm object 45
Description
The output controls the mains circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.

Image 8.65 MCB Close command
Image 8.66 MCB Close command

MCB OFF Coil
Comm object 47
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of mainsbus circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for
5 seconds.
Image 8.67 MCB OFF Coil command

MCB ON Coil
Comm object 46
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of mainsbus circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5
second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.
Image 8.68 MCB ON Coil close command

MCB Status
Comm object 85
Description
This output indicates the MCB position as it is internally considered by the controller.

MCB UV Coil
Comm object 48
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of mainsbus circuit breaker. The output is active the
whole time when the controller is switched on. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the
moment the breaker has to be switched off.
Image 8.69 MCB UV Coil close command
Image 8.70 MCB UV Coil open command

Mode AUTO
Comm object 19
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in AUTO mode.

Mode MAN
Comm object 18
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in MAN mode.

Mode OFF
Comm object 17
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in OFF mode.

Mode TEST
Comm object 20
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in TEST mode.
LBO: N
Neutral Close/Open
Comm object 50
Description
The output controls the neutral position of the three positions ATS switch. The ATS switch must react
within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is issued.
Note: InteliLite 4 controllers can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure
the feedback to binary inputs.

Neutral ON Coil
Comm object 2591
Description
The output activates the neutral position coil of the three positions ATS switch. The pulse lasts for
5 seconds.

Not In AUTO
Comm object 1248
Description
This output is active when controller isn’t in AUTO mode.

Not Used
Comm object 286
Description
Output has no function.
LBO: P
Peripheral Module Comm Fail
Comm object 115
Description
The LBO is active anytime when at least one CAN module is in comm fail – regardless the protection is set
upon the lost of any specific CAN module.

Prestart
Comm object 36
Description

This output can be used for control of any device, which has to be activated just before start. the output is
active for time period of Prestart Time (page 245). The output is deactivated 100 ms before the STARTER
1 (PAGE 682) output is activated.
Image 8.71 Engine start
When the Prestart Time (page 245) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 244) then the Prestart
Time (page 245) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 244) is long as Cranking Fail Pause (page 244) minus
100 ms.
Image 8.72 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 1

When the Prestart Time (page 245) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 244) then the Prestart
Time (page 245) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 244) is long as normal Prestart Time (page 245).
Image 8.73 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 2
LBO: R
Ready
Comm object 62
Description
The binary output is active when the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it i.e. no red alarm is
activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633) is active.
The binary output is switch on when the Ready state occurs.
The binary output is switch off when the Prestart or the Not Ready or the Stop state occurs i.e. always
except Ready state.

Ready To AMF
Comm object 324
Description
the output is active if the Gen-set is ready to start automatically and take the load if the mains fails, i.e.:
the controller is in AMF operating mode
the controller is in AUTO controller mode and
no red alarm is present in the alarmlist
when the red alarm is confirmed during Stop Valve and other requirements are fulfilled then the
LBO is still inactive until the state ready

Ready To Load
Comm object 58
Description
the output is active whenever the GCB is closed or can be closed i.e. the stabilization phase is finished,
the Gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 255) timer has elapsed and the Gen-
set voltage and frequency are within limits.
If GCB is open then Gen-set voltage and frequency must be in limits.
If GCB is close then Gen-set voltage and frequency can be out of limits, but protection delay can’t be count
down. If Gen-set voltage and frequency will return into limits until delay is count down then output is still
active.

RegenerationNeeded
Comm object 1372
Description
This output is active when DPF lamp from ECU is active.

Running
Comm object 67
Description
The output is designed to be used as an indication that the Gen-set is running. The output is activated if
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) is active and STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) and PRESTART (PAGE 677) are
deactivated. The out remains active until engine stop and cooling period elapses.
Image 8.74 Running

LBO: S
Sd Override
Comm object 962
Description
The output is active if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633) input is active and open if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633) input
is inactive. This output is usually used to send information about SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633) input into ECU.

Start Button Echo
Comm object 33
Description
Start button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Start button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Start command is received via communication line or
the input START BUTTON is activated.

Start Button State
Comm object 2693
Description

Starter 1
Comm object 24
Description
This output is dedicated for starter motor control. The number of cranking attempts is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 243) in Engine Settings group. Cranking fail pause is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Fail Pause (page 244).
Image 8.75 Starter
The starter output opens when:

Starting RPM are reached
the "firing" speed is reached (gas engines only)
maximum time of cranking is exceeded
request to stop comes up
D+ value is higher than D+ Threshold (page 262)
Oil pressure value is higher than Starting Oil Pressure (page 246)
Generator voltage >25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 227) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph
(page 227) (any phase)

Starter 2
Comm object 2415
Description
This output is dedicated for starter motor control. The number of cranking attempts is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 243) in Engine Settings group. Cranking fail pause is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Fail Pause (page 244).
Image 8.76 Starter
The starter output opens when:

Starting RPM are reached
the "firing" speed is reached (gas engines only)
maximum time of cranking is exceeded
request to stop comes up
D+ value is higher than D+ Threshold (page 262)
Oil pressure value is higher than Starting Oil Pressure (page 246)
Generator voltage >25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 227) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph
(page 227) (any phase)

Still Log 0
Comm object 26
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 0.

Still Log 1
Comm object 27
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 1.

Stop Button Echo
Comm object 32
Description
Stop button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Stop button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Stop command is received via communication line or
the input STOP BUTTON is activated.

Stop Button State
Comm object 2694
Description

Stop Pulse
Comm object 25
Description
Output is active for 1 second after STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 684) output activation. This signal is sent to ECU
in case of engine stop request.
Image 8.77 Stop Pulse

Stop Solenoid
Comm object 23
Description

This output is dedicated to control the stop solenoid (valve). The output is activated when an engine stop
command is received and is deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off, i.e. engine is
stopped.
Image 8.78 Stop Solenoid 1
Image 8.79 Stop Solenoid 2
Note: If Additional running engine indications (page 120) went off during 5 s pause than Stop
Solenoid is not activated again otherwise stop solenoid is activated again.

Supplying Load
Comm object 1249
Description
The binary output depends on measured generator active power. Power is compared with generator
nominal active power with use of hysteresis and with delay of switch 1 s.
When the measured active power is equal to or bigger than 5 % of Nominal Power (page 222) for 1 s
then the binary output is active.
When the measured active power is equal to or lower than 3 % of Nominal Power (page 222) for 1 s then
the binary output is inactive.
LBO: U
User button 1
Comm object
Description
.

User button 2
Comm object
Description
.

User button 3
Comm object
Description
.

User button 4
Comm object
Description
.

User button 5
Comm object
Description
.

User button 6
Comm object
Description
.

User button 7
Comm object
Description
.

User button 8
Comm object
Description
.

User button 9
Comm object
Description
.

User button 10
Comm object
Description
.

User button 11
Comm object
Description
.

User button 12
Comm object
Description
.

User button 13
Comm object
Description
.

User button 14
Comm object
Description
.

User button 15
Comm object
Description
.

User button 16
Comm object
Description
.

LBO: V
Ventilation
Comm object 38
Description
This logical binary output is activated at the beginning of start procedure together with PRESTART (PAGE
677) LBO. Ventilation output is deactivated when engine stops revolving.
Ventilation LBO is also deactivated immediately when EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 619) (or E-Stop) is
activated or when controller is switched to OFF mode.
Note: The output is intended for control of an engine room ventilation fan, engine container ventilation
fan, container louvres or similar running gen-set technology.

Ventilation Off Pulse
Comm object 2090
Description
This logical binary output is activated on falling edge of VENTILATION (PAGE 689) LBO (when engine stops).
The pulse duration is adjusted by Ventilation Pulse Time (page 275) setpoint.

Ventilation On Pulse
Comm object 2089
Description
This logical binary output is activated on rising edge of VENTILATION (PAGE 689) LBO (at the begining of
prestart period). The pulse duration is adjusted by Ventilation Pulse Time (page 275) setpoint.

8.1.6 Logical analog inputs
What Logical analog inputs are:
Logical analog inputs are inputs for analog values.
Alphabetical groups of Logical analog inputs

LAI: A 692
LAI: C 694
LAI: F 694
LAI: N 694
LAI: O 694
LAI: R 695
For a full list of Logical analog inputs go to the chapter Logical analog inputs alphabetically (page 691).

Logical analog inputs alphabetically
AIN Switch 01 692

AIN Switch 02 692
AIN Switch 03 692
AIN Switch 04 693
Coolant Temp 694
Fuel Level 694
Not Used 694
Oil Pressure 694
Oil Temp 695
RPM pickup 695
objects

LAI: A
AIN Switch 01
Comm object 209
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 53. This analog input controls logical binary output
AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 640). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints AIN
Switch01 On (page 336) and AIN Switch01 Off (page 337).
Note: This function is not suitable for tristate or binary analog sensors.
6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 02
Comm object 210
Description

AIN Switch 03
Comm object 211
Description

AIN Switch 04
Comm object 212
Description

LAI: C
Coolant Temp
Comm object 67
Description
Logical analog input designed for coolant temperature value received from analog sensor.
LAI: F
Fuel Level
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 269) has to be adjusted correctly.
LAI: N
Not Used
Comm object 230
Description
Input has no function.
LAI: O
Oil Pressure
Comm object 9
Description
Logical analog input designed for oil pressure value received from analog sensor.
Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case
choose OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 627) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is
adjusted via the same setpoint like for analog function.

Oil Temp
Comm object 77
Description
Logical analog input designed for oil temperature value received from analog sensor.
LAI: R
RPM pickup
Comm object 8
Description
This LAI selects the source of RPM.

8.1.7 PLC
List of PLC blocks
Group: Basic logical functions
OR/AND 697
Ext. XOR/RS 699
Group: Comparison of analog inputs

Comparator With Hysteresis 700
Comparator With Delay 701
Comp Win 702
Group: Math operations

Ext Math Fc. 704
Group: Time functions

Timer 705
Delay 706
Group: Other functions

Counter 710
Hold 711
Decomp. 4 713

Group: Basic Logical functions
OR/AND
PLC group Basic logical functions
Related FW 1.4.0
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1
Inputs
Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1 .. 8 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1 .. 8
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function
Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block performs logical operation OR / AND of 2 – 8 binary operands. The inputs as well as the output can
be inverted.
Function OR
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
Function AND
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
There have to be at least 2 inputs every time. There may be up to 8 inputs configured.
Image 8.80 Configuration of OR/AND block
6 back to List of PLC blocks

Ext. XOR/RS
PLC group Basic logical functions
Related FW 1.4.0
Comm object 39
Inputs

Input 1 .. 2 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1 .. 2
Outputs

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block provides logical function of two values - XOR or RS flip-flop. Both inputs and output can be
inverted.
Function XOR
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
The block contains a setting for RS dominance. This setting is available in the block dialog window (i.e.
this setting is constantly set by configuration and cannot be changed dynamically in operation).
Function RS
R-latch S-latch E-latch JK-latch
Input 1 (S) Input 2 (R)
Q
-1 -1 -1 -1
0 0 Q Q Q Q
0 1 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 1 1 1
-1 -1
1 1 0 1 Q NOT(Q )

Image 8.81 Configuration of XOR/RS block
Group: Comparison of analog inputs

Comparator With Hysteresis
PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.4.0
Comm object 3
Inputs

Input Analog No Any Compared value
Input ON Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching on
Input OFF Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching off
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block compares the input value with the comparative levels. The behavior depends on whether the
ON level is higher than OFF level or vice versa.

Image 8.82 Different On and Off levels
Image 8.83 Configuration of Comp Hyst block
Note: Level On and Level Off can be constants or values from controller.
IMPORTANT: In case that the values on inputs have different decimal numbers, then the
values are converted and the name of block is red. It is strongly recommended to use
values with the same decimal numbers.

Comparator With Delay
inputs
Related FW 1.4.0
Comm object 4
Inputs

Input 1 Analog No Any Compared value
Input 2 Analog No Same as Input 1 Comparative level
Delay Analog No 0.0..3000,0 [s] Comparative delay
Outputs

Description
The block works as an analog switch. It compares the input value with the comparative level. The output
will switch on if the input is equal or higher than the comparative level for time longer than the delay.
Image 8.84 Principle of delay
Image 8.85 Configuration of Comp Time block
Note: Input 2 and Delay can be constants or values from controller.

Comp Win
inputs
Related FW 1.4.0
Comm object 18
Inputs

Input Analog No -2 147 483 647 .. 2 147 483 647 Compared value
Input HIGH Analog No Same as Input Upper window limit
Input LOW Analog No Same as Input Lower window limit
Outputs

Description
The block output is switched on whenever the input value is in the range defined by Lo and Hi levels.
Image 8.86 Principle of delay
Image 8.87 Configuration of Comp Time block
Note: All inputs and can be constants or values from controller.

Group: Math operations
Ext Math Fc.
PLC group Math operations
Related FW 1.4.0
Comm object 17
Inputs

Input 1 Analog No -2147483647 .. 2147483647 Input 1
Input 2 Analog No Same as Input 1 Input 2
Outputs

-2147483647 .. Result of the mathematical
Output Analog No
2147483647 operation
Description
This block performs basic mathematical operations of 2 to 8 operands based on selected function.
Function Output
ADD – Addition Input 1 + Input 2 + … + Input N
SUB – Substraction Input 1 - Input 2 - … - Input N
|SUB| – Absolute value of substraction ABS(Input 1 - Input 2 - … - Input N)
AVG – Average Input 1 + Input 2 + … + Input N) / N
MIN –Minimal value MIN(Input 1, Input 2, … ,Input N)
MAX – Maximal value MAX(Input 1, Input 2, … ,Input N)

Image 8.88 Configuration of Math Fc. block
IMPORTANT: In case that values on inputs have different decimal numbers or dimensions
than the values are converted and the name of block is red. It is strongly recommended to
use values with the same decimal numbers.
Group: Time functions

Timer
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 1.4.0
Comm object 38
Inputs

The timer runs only if this input is
Run Binary No 0/1
active or not connected
This input reloads the timer to the
Reload Binary No 0/1
initial value
Reload
Analog No 0.0..3276.7 [s] Initial value of the timer
value
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Timer output
Description
The block works as a countdown timer which is decreased by 1 every PLC cycle. The timer initial value is
adjustable by the "Reload value" input. The timer is automatically reloaded with the initial value when it

reaches zero or it can be reloaded at any other time using the "reload" input. The timer remains at reload
value until the reload input is deactivated. The timer output is inverted always when the timer is reloaded.
Image 8.89 Principle of timer
Image 8.90 Configuration of Timer block
Note: Input reload value can be constant or value from controller.
Note: If you want the output to start at logical 0, tick First down option. Otherwise the output will start at
logical 1.
IMPORTANT: If the inputs are not connected and First down option is not ticked, then the
output is active.

Delay
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 1.4.0
Comm object 33
Inputs

Input Binary No 0/1 Input signal to be delayed
Input time -3200.0 .. 3200.0 Delay of the rising edge resp. pulse
Analog No
up [s, m, h] length generated by rising edge of

the input
Delay of the falling edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200.0 .. 3200.0
Analog No length generated by falling edge of
down [s, m, h]
the input
Resets the output to logical 0. The
output remains in logical 0 until new
Input reset Binary No 0/1
rising edge appears on Input (when
Input reset is deactivated already)
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Output signal
Description
This block can work in two modes of operation:
Delay mode – the rising edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time up" when a rising
edge at the input is detected. The falling edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time
down" when a falling edge at the input is detected. If the delayed falling edge at the output came
earlier than the delayed rising edge, then no pulse would be generated at the output.
Pulse mode – a pulse of "input time up" length is generated at the output when a rising edge is
detected, a pulse of "input time down" length is generated at the output when a falling edge is
detected.
Image 8.91 Delay modes principles

Image 8.92 Configuration of Delay block
Note: If Input time up or Input time down value is <0, this input is internally set to zero.
Note: Input time up and Input time down values can be constants or values from controller.
Note: Use Pulse on edge option to choose between delay and pulse mode.
Group: Other functions
Analog Switch 8
PLC group Other functions
Related FW 1.4.0
Comm object 45
Inputs

32 32
Input 1 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input value 1
32 32
Input 2 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input value 2
32 32 Input value 3
Input 3 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)
32 32 Input value 4
(optional)
32 32 Input value 5
(optional)
32 32 Input value 6
(optional)

32 32 Input value 7
(optional)
32 32 Input value 8
(optional)
Input SW 1 Binary No 0/1 Switch input 1
Outputs

Switch output
32 32
Output Analog No -2 .. 2 according to the SW 1,
SW 2 and SW 3

Description
The block works as an analog multiplexer. The output value could be selected from up to 8 inputs
according to the 'Input SW 3', 'Input SW 2' and 'Input SW 1' state is appropriate input value copied to the
output, see the table below.
Input SW 3 Input SW 2 Input SW 1 Output

0 0 0 Input 1
0 0 1 Input 2
0 1 0 Input 3
0 1 1 Input 4
1 0 0 Input 5
1 0 1 Input 6
1 1 0 Input 7
1 1 1 Input 8
Image 8.93 Configuration of Analog Switch 8 block

Counter
Related FW 1.4.0
Comm object 13
Inputs

Input Input at which the edges are
Binary No 0/1
Count Up counted
Input
Counter value limit for activation of
Preset Analog No 0 .. 32767 [-]
the output
Limit
Input Clear Binary No 0/1 Reset input
Outputs

Output is activated when the counter
Output Binary No 0/1
value exceeds the limit
Description
The block works as a counter of edges (selectable rising, falling or both) with reset input and adjustable
counting limit. The maximal counter value is 32767. The counter value is lost when the controller is
switched off. The output is activated when the counter value is equal or higher than Input Preset Limit and
stays active until the block reset is done using Input Clear. Activating of the Input Clear resets the counter
value to 0 and deactivates the output. Holding the Input Clear active blocks the counting.
Image 8.94 Configuration of the Counter block

Hold
Related FW 1.4.0
Comm object 37
Inputs

-2 147 483 647 .. 2 147 483
Input Analog No Input value
647
Input triggering the
Hold Binary No 0/1
function
Outputs

-2 147 483 647 .. 2 147 483
Output Analog No Hold output
647
Description
The block is holding Input value based on value of Hold and selected mode. The Output has resolution
and dimension based on setting of the block.S
Mode Description
The block behaves like analog memory. Input Hold behaves like the reload trigger and
Edge
reacts on rising edge. The initial value of the Output after restart of the controller is 0.
The block is like a mirror of the Input while the Hold is inactive. The value of Output is
Level
latched at the last value while Hold is active.
Image 8.95 Principle of the Hold modes

Image 8.96 Configuration of the Hold block

Decomp. 4
Related FW 1.4.0
Comm object 24
Inputs

-2 147 483 647 .. 2 147 483 Value to be
Input Analog No
647 "decomposed" to bits
Outputs

Bit 0,4,8,12,16,20,24,28 - according
Output 1 Binary Yes 0/1
to selected group of bits.
Bit 1,5,9,13,17,21,25,29 - according
to selected group of bits.
Bit 2,6,10,14,18,22,26,30 -
according to selected group of bits.
Bit 3,7,11,15,19,23,27,31 -
according to selected group of bits.
Description
The block converts the input analog value to binary form and provides selected bits as binary outputs.
Image 8.97 Configuration of Decomp. 4 block
8.2 Alarms
What alarms are:
The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. For more information see Alarm management on page 134.

8.2.1 Alarm levels in the controller
8.2.2 Alarms level 1

What alarms level 1 are:
The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level.

List of alarms level 1
AHI Manual Idle 717 Wrn Event SMS 8 Fail 725

AL Fuel Transfer Failed 717 Wrn Event SMS 9 Fail 726
ALI External Mains Fail 717 Wrn Event SMS 10 Fail 726
Wrn Module: Slot 1 718 Wrn Alarm Email 1 Fail 726
Wrn Module: Slot 5 719 Wrn Alarm SMS 1 Fail 727
Wrn Module(slotA) - false module 719 Wrn Alarm SMS 2 Fail 727
Wrn Module(slotB) - false module 719 Wrn Alarm SMS 3 Fail 727
Wrn Module(slotA) - unknown module 719 Wrn Alarm SMS 4 Fail 728
Wrn Module(slotB) - unknown module 719 Wrn Alarm SMS 5 Fail 728
Wrn Module(slotA) - unattended 720 Wrn Alarm SMS 6 Fail 728
Wrn Module(slotB) - unattended 720 Wrn Alarm SMS 7 Fail 728
Wrn Module(slotA) - comm. outage 720 Wrn Alarm SMS 8 Fail 729
Wrn Module(slotB) - comm. outage 720 Wrn Alarm SMS 9 Fail 729
Wrn Module(slotA) - unexpected 721 Wrn Alarm SMS 10 Fail 729
Wrn Module(slotB) - unexpected 721 Wrn SNMP TRAP 1 Fail 729
Wrn EM(A) - a message lost 721 Wrn SNMP TRAP 2 Fail 729
Wrn EM(B) - a message lost 721 Wrn ECUDiagBlocked 730
Wrn EM(A) - configuration mistake 722 Wrn ECU Communication Fail 730
Wrn EM(B) - configuration mistake 722 Wrn Default Password 731
Wrn EM(A) - insufficient 722 Wrn PasswEnterBlock 731
Wrn EM(B) - insufficient 722 Wrn ECU Yellow Lamp 731
Wrn EM(A) - missing or damaged 722 Wrn ECU Red Lamp 731
Wrn EM(B) - missing or damaged 723 Wrn ECU Wait To Start 732
Wrn Event Email 1 Fail 723 Wrn ATT DPF Lamp 732
Wrn Event Email 2 Fail 723 Wrn ATT HEST Lamp 732
Wrn Event Email 3 Fail 723 Wrn ATT SCR Error Lamp 732
Wrn Event Email 4 Fail 723 Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp 732
Wrn Event SMS 1 Fail 724 Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp 733
Wrn Event SMS 2 Fail 724 Wrn ATT Interlock Active 733
Wrn Event SMS 3 Fail 724 Hst ATT Force Regen Active 733
Wrn Event SMS 4 Fail 724 Hst ATT Inhib Regen Active 733
Wrn Event SMS 5 Fail 725 AHI Dual Operation Fail 734
Wrn Event SMS 6 Fail 725 ALI Dual Operation Different FW Version 734
Wrn Event SMS 7 Fail 725 Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail 734

Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail 735 Wrn Production Mode 745
AHI Dual Operation Master Fail 735 Wrn Brute Force Protection Active 746
AHI Dual Operation Slave Fail 735 Wrn Rental Timer 1 746
AHI Dual Operation Different Mains 735 Wrn Rental Timer 2 746
AL Transferring Fuel 735 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 1 746
Wrn Coolant Temp 736 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 2 747
Wrn Coolant Temp Low 736 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 3 747
Wrn Fuel Level 736 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 4 747
Wrn Charging Alternator Fail 736 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 5 747
Wrn Stop Fail 737 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 6 747
Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours 737 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 7 747
Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval 738 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 8 748
Wrn MCB Fail 739 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 13 749
Wrn MCB Fail To Close 740 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 14 749
Wrn MCB Fail To Open 740 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 15 749
Wrn Generator L1 Overvoltage 740 Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 16 749
Wrn Generator L2 Overvoltage 740 AHI Rental Timer 1 Elapsed 749
Wrn Generator L3 Overvoltage 741 AHI Rental Timer 2 Elapsed 750
Wrn Generator L1L2 Overvoltage 741 ALI Start Blocking 750
Wrn Generator L2L3 Overvoltage 741 ALI Gen Ph L1 Inverted 750
Wrn Generator L3L1 Overvoltage 742 ALI Gen Ph L2 Inverted 750
Wrn Generator L1 Undervoltage 742 ALI Gen Ph L3 Inverted 750
Wrn Generator L2 Undervoltage 742 ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite 751
Wrn Generator L3 Undervoltage 742 ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted 751
Wrn Generator L1L2 Undervoltage 743 ALI Mains Ph L2 Inverted 751
Wrn Generator L2L3 Undervoltage 743 ALI Mains Ph L3 Inverted 751
Wrn Generator L3L1 Undervoltage 743 ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite 751
Wrn Generator Overfrequency 743 Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-n 751
Wrn Generator Uderfrequency 744 Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-ph 752
Wrn Overload 744 Mains Overfrequency 752
Wrn Battery Overvoltage 744 Mains Underfrequency 752
Wrn Battery Undervoltage 744 Wrn Rental Timer Block Start 753
Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set 745 Wrn Mains Voltage Detected 753
Wrn Battery Charger Fail 745 Wrn Oil Pressure 753
ALI Manual Restore 745 Wrn Wrong GCB Control Mode 753
Wrn Override All Sd 745 Wrn Fence 1 Alarm 753

Wrn Fence 2 Alarm 754
Wrn Fuel Theft 754
MP Mains Volt Unbal Ph-N 776
MP Mains Volt Unbal Ph-N 777
6 back to Alarms
AHI Manual Idle
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI Manual Idle
Alarm evaluated All the time
This alarm is
activated when LBI
Description
FORCE IDLE (PAGE
621) is active.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

AL Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message Fuel Transfer Failed
This alarm is
activated when Fuel
Level, received from
Description ECU or LAI, does not
increase during time
Transfer Wrn Delay
(page 272).

ALI External Mains Fail
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message External Mains Fail
This alarm is active
when LBI EXTERNAL
Description
MAINS FAIL RELAY
(PAGE 620) is active.

Wrn Module: Slot 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 1
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with
Description
preconfigured module 1.

Wrn Module: Slot 2
Alarm Type WRN
Description

Wrn Module: Slot 3
Alarm Type WRN
Description

Wrn Module: Slot 4
Alarm Type WRN
Description

Wrn Module: Slot 5
Alarm Type WRN
Description

Wrn Module(slotA) - false module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

Wrn Module(slotB) - false module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - fake module

Wrn Module(slotA) - unknown module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unknown module
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

Wrn Module(slotB) - unknown module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unknown module

Wrn Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unattended
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.

Wrn Module(slotB) - unattended
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unattended
Description

Wrn Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - comm. outage
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between
Description
controller and module in slot.

Wrn Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Description

Wrn Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unexpected
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.

Wrn Module(slotB) - unexpected
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unexpected
function.

Wrn EM(A) - a message lost
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - a message lost
Description

Wrn EM(B) - a message lost
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(B) - a message lost
Description

Wrn EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - configuration mistake
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.

Wrn EM(B) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(B) - configuration mistake
Description

Wrn EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - insufficient
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.

Wrn EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(B) - insufficient

Wrn EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - missing or damaged
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in
Description slot (in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in
slot).

Wrn EM(B) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(B) - missing or damaged
Description slot (if first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in
slot).

Wrn Event Email 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event Email 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 525) and email
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN

wasn't send.
Wrn Event SMS 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 505) and
SMS wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
Description
number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 4 (page 506) and

SMS wasn't send.
Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't send.

Wrn Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN

wasn't send.
Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Wrn Alarm SMS 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
SMS wasn't sent.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't sent.

Alarm Type WRN
Description
number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 3 (page 506) and

SMS wasn't sent.
Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't sent.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't sent.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't sent.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't sent.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't sent.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't sent.

Alarm Type WRN
SMS wasn't sent.

Wrn SNMP TRAP 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message SNMP TRAP 1 Fail
Description This alarm is issued if TRAP will not be able to reach server.

Wrn SNMP TRAP 2 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message SNMP TRAP 2 Fail

This alarm is issued if TRAP will not be able to reach server, or in case there is no
Description
reply for the server
Wrn ECUDiagBlocked
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ECUDiagBlocked
LBO ALARM (PAGE 645) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp, alarm
Description
automatically disappears.

Wrn ECU Communication Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message ECU Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 651) – only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 651) – all the time
This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU is not established or has dropped out.
Wrn ECU 1 Comm Fail
Alarm Type WRN

Alarmlist message Wrn ECU 1 Comm Fail
Alarm evaluated ECU 1 is configured
This alarm is activated when there is no communication received from ECU
Description
configured in ECU slot 1.
Wrn ECU 2 Comm Fail
Alarm Type WRN

Alarmlist message Wrn ECU 2 Comm Fail
Alarm evaluated ECU 2 is configured
This alarm is activated when there is no communication received from ECU
Description
configured in ECU slot 2.

Wrn Default Password
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Default Password
The alarm is issued if the factory default password and/or access code are used
Description
and engine is running. Factory default password and access code are "0".

Wrn PasswEnterBlock
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message PasswEnterBlock
This alarm is issued to indicate that user will not be able to type in password for
Description set amount of time.
Note: This is cause by too many invalid attempts.

Wrn ECU Yellow Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Yellow Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Yellow lamp is
Description activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 645) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
alarm automatically disappears.

Wrn ECU Red Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Red Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Red lamp is
activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 645) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
Description alarm automatically disappears.
Note: This lamp can be ignored during prestart phase. Use InteliConfig to
enable this function.

Wrn ECU Wait To Start
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Wait To Start
Alarm evaluated Only when ECU is connected
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Wait To Start lamp
Description is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 645) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,

Wrn ATT DPF Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ATT Filter Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT DPF Lamp is

Wrn ATT HEST Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ATT HEST Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT Hest Lamp is

Wrn ATT SCR Error Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ATT SCR Error Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT SCR Error
Description Lamp is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 645) is not activated, after deactivation of
lamp, alarm automatically disappears.

Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp

This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT DEF Level
Description Lamp is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 645) is not activated, after deactivation of
lamp, alarm automatically disappears.

Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT Inhibited Lamp
Description is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 645) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,

Wrn ATT Interlock Active
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message ATT interlock Active
This message is written in the history when LBI ATT INTERLOCK (PAGE 613) is
Description active. LBO ALARM (PAGE 645) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp, alarm

Hst ATT Force Regen Active
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Hst ATT Force Regen Active
This message is written in the history when LBI ATT FORCE REGEN (PAGE 611) is
Description active. LBO ALARM (PAGE 645) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp, alarm

Hst ATT Inhib Regen Active
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Hst ATT Inhib Regen Active
Description This message is written in the history when LBI ATT INHIBIT REGEN (PAGE 612) is

active. LBO ALARM (PAGE 645) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp, alarm

AHI Dual Operation Fail
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Fail
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
This alarm is active when there is fail between controllers in dual operation
function.
Example:
No connection – disconnection of cable
No connection – incorrect settings of COM Modes
Description Controllers not in AUTO mode
Different Operation Modes (AMF controllers only)
Different FW versions in controllers
Different mains statuses in controllers (AMF controllers only)
Note: This alarm is also written to history.

ALI Dual Operation Different FW Version
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Different FW Version
This alarm is active when FW version (all numbers are checked) or Branch of
Description
Master and Slave is different.

Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail
Alarm Type AHI, WRN
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Master Fail
This alarm is active when Master is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Master Error Protection (page 312) option:
Wrn is selected .

Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail
Alarm Type AHI, WRN
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Slave Fail
This alarm is active when Slave is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Slave Error Protection (page 312) option:
Wrn is selected.

AHI Dual Operation Master Fail
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Master Fail
This alarm is active when Master is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Master Error Protection (page 312) option:
AL Indic is selected.

AHI Dual Operation Slave Fail
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Slave Fail
This alarm is active when Slave is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Slave Error Protection (page 312) option: AL
Indic is selected.

AHI Dual Operation Different Mains
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Different Mains
This alarm is active when there are different states of mains on controllers. For
Description example Master see healthy mains and slave see mains fail.
Note: This alarm is also written to history.

AL Transferring Fuel
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message Transferring Fuel

Description This alarm is issued if FUEL PUMP (PAGE 658) is active.

Wrn Coolant Temp
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message All the time
Alarm evaluated Wrn Coolant Temp
Description Warning alarm for Coolant Temp user protection.

Wrn Coolant Temp Low
Alarm Type WRN
Alarm evaluated Wrn Coolant Temp Low
Description Warning alarm for Coolant Temp Low user protection.

Wrn Fuel Level
Alarm Type WRN
Alarm evaluated Wrn Fuel Level
Description Warning alarm for Coolant Temp Low user protection.

AL Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm evaluated When FUEL PUMP (PAGE 658) is active
This alarm will occur when there is no increase of fuel level when FUEL PUMP
Description
(PAGE 658) is active.

Wrn Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm evaluated Engine running only

This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+ terminal is
lower than D+ Threshold (page 262) of the controller supply voltage. This alarm
Description
works similar to the red "battery" alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard. The
setpoint has to be in Charge Fail or Enabled position to enable this alarm.

Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm evaluated While the engine shall be stopped
Related
AMF, MRS
applications
This alarm occurs if the Gen-set shall be stopped, but some symptom indicates that
it is not stopped. The period when the Gen-set shall be stopped begins after the
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) has been switched off and time delay Stop Time (page
258) has elapsed and lasts for the entire time the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 658) or
STARTER 1 (PAGE 682) are off.
Description
Image 8.98 Stop Fail
Note: Gen-set cannot be started until this alarm is inactive and reset.

Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page
579) reaches 0.
Description The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page
276) (unit is hours-h) and it counts down in hours while engine is running.
Setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 Protection (page 277) has to be set to: Warning

Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 579)
Interval reaches 0.
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 277)
Description
(unit is in months-m) and it counts down in days based on actual date (No matter
if engine is running or not). Setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 Protection (page
277) has to be set to: Warning

Alarm Type WRN
579) reaches 0.

Alarm Type WRN
reaches 0.
Description

Alarm Type WRN

580) reaches 0.

Alarm Type WRN
reaches 0.
Description

Wrn MCB Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn MCB Fail
This alarm will occur when the MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 626) input does not match
the expected position given by the MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback disappears.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
immediately.
Self-opening of the breaker is not considered a fault and if all mains
values are within limits, the command to reclose the breaker is issued after
Description
delay given by the setpoint Mains Return Delay (page 296) has elapsed.
The alarm will be also issued, if the breaker does not respond to the close
command within 5 seconds. After this period has elapsed the output MCB
Close/Open is deactivated again and the next attempt to close the breaker
will occur first after the alarm is reset.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to the open
command within 5 seconds. The output MCB Close/Open will stay
deactivated. Closing of GCB is blocked until this alarm becomes inactive.

Wrn MCB Fail To Close
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn MCB Fail To Close
This alarm is activated when there is a problem with circuit breaker position while
closing.
LBO MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671) closed but LBI MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE
Description 626) did not closed in 5 seconds.
Self-closing of breaker with mains parameters with limits – not
considered as fault, MCB close command is issued after MCB Close
Delay (page 297).

Wrn MCB Fail To Open
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn MCB Fail To Open
opening.
LBO MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 671) opened but LBI MCB FEEDBACK
Description (PAGE 626) did not opened in 5 seconds.
Self-opening of breaker with mains parameters without limits – not
considered as fault, MCB open command is issued according to the
setpoint MCB Opens On (page 310).

Wrn Generator L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 285)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 287)

Alarm Type WRN

Description

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Wrn Generator L1L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1L2 > Voltage
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1
and 2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Wrn Generator L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1 < Voltage
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 286)

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Wrn Generator L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Description

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Wrn Generator Overfrequency
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator > Frequency
This alarm evaluates the generator overfrequency in the phase L1. The following
Description setpoints are related to it:
Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 288)

Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 289)

Wrn Generator Uderfrequency
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator < Frequency
This alarm evaluates the generator underfrequency in the phase L1. The
following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 288)

Wrn Overload
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Overload
The alarm is issued when the Gen-set power is over the limit for time period
longer than the delay. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Overload Wrn (page 281) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload BOC (page 281) Overload Del adjusts the delay.

Wrn Battery Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarm evaluated Wrn Battery > Voltage
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too high. The
Description
Battery Overvoltage (page 273)
Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 273)

Wrn Battery Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Battery < Voltage
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too low. The
Description

Battery Undervoltage (page 272)
Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 273)

Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set
This alarm is active when there is no email address set in the controller and
simultaneously controller administrator password is not the default password.
Description
Note: When default password is changed the Wrn Password reset e-mail
addr is not set will be active after the restart of the controller.

Wrn Battery Charger Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Battery Charge Fail
This alarm is activated when logical binary input BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 614)
Description
is active.

ALI Manual Restore
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message Manual Restore
Alarm is activated when controller is in AUTO mode, Return From Island (page
Description
308) setpoint is set to manual, load is on Gen-set and mains has returned.

Wrn Override All Sd
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Override All Sd
Description This alarm occurs when binary input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 633) is activated.

Wrn Production Mode
Alarm Type WRN

Alarmlist message Wrn Production Mode
Alarm is active when the controller has turned on Productiom mode. In turned on
Description Production mode the user has the highest level 3 access without performing log
in.

Wrn Brute Force Protection Active
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Brute Force Protection Active
This alarm is activated when account break protection detects possible attack
Description and at least one account is blocked according to Account break protection
(page 184) rules.

Wrn Rental Timer 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Rental Timer 1
This alarm occurs xx hours before Rental Timer 1 (page 474) elapsed. Hours
Description
are adjusted by setpoint Rental Timer 1 Wrn (page 476).

Wrn Rental Timer 2
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Rental Timer 2
This alarm occurs xx hours before Rental Timer 2 (page 476) elapsed. Hours
Description
are adjusted by setpoint Rental Timer 2 Wrn (page 478).

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 1
Description This alarm is issued when history event 1 will trigger.

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 2
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 3
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 4
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 5
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 6
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 7
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 8
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 9
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 10
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 11
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 12
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 13
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 14
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 15
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 16
Alarm Type WRN

AHI Rental Timer 1 Elapsed
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Rental Timer 1 Elapsed
Description This alarm is activated when Rental Timer 1 (page 474) elapses.

AHI Rental Timer 2 Elapsed
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Rental Timer 2 Elapsed
Description This alarm is activated when Rental Timer 2 (page 476) elapses.

ALI Start Blocking
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Gen Ph L3 Inverted
This alarm is active if LBI START BLOCKING (PAGE 633) is closed before Gen-set
Description
is started.

ALI Gen Ph L1 Inverted
Alarm Type ALI
Description This alarm is issued if generator phase L1 is inverted.

Alarm Type ALI

Alarm Type ALI

ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite
Description This alarm is issued if generator phases are wired in wrong order.

ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted
Description This alarm is issued if mains phase L1 is inverted.

Alarm Type ALI

Alarm Type ALI

ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite
Description This alarm is issued if mains phases are wired in wrong order.

Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-n
Alarm Type MP

Alarmlist message Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-n
This alarm is issued depending on evaluation of the unbalance of the phase
voltages, i.e. the difference between highest and lowest phase voltage at any
given time. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 303) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase voltage at any given
time.
Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay (page 304) adjusts the alarm delay.

Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-ph
Alarm Type MP
Alarmlist message Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-ph
This alarm is issued depending on evaluation of the unbalance of the phase to
phase voltages, i.e. the difference between highest and lowest phase to phase
voltage at any given time. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 303) adjusts the maximum allowed
time.
Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay (page 304) adjusts the alarm delay.

Mains Overfrequency
Alarm Type MP
Alarmlist message Mains Overfrequency
This alarm is active when Mains frequency is above the setpoint Mains
Description Overfrequency (page 304) for the period longer than Mains < > Frequency
Delay (page 308).

Mains Underfrequency
Alarm Type MP
Alarmlist message Mains Underfrequency
This alarm is active when Mains frequency is bellow the setpoint Mains
Description Underfrequency (page 306) for the period longer than Mains < > Frequency
Delay (page 308).

Wrn Rental Timer Block Start
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Rental Timer Block Start
Alarm is active when there is start command and Rental Timer 1 (page 474) or
Description

Wrn Mains Voltage Detected
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Mains Voltage Detected
Alarm evaluated Gen-set is running
This alarm occurs when setpoint Default Application Select (page 233) is
Description
adjusted to MRS and voltage is detected on mains.

Wrn Oil Pressure
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Oil Pressure
This alarm indicates that the oil pressure is lower than the pressure set in the
Description
setpoint.

Wrn Wrong GCB Control Mode
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Wrong GCB Control Mode
Alarm evaluated all the time
This alarm is issued when GCB Control Mode is selected to option No Button
Description
and simultaneously the controller is in AMF mode.

Wrn Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 1 Alarm
Description This alarm evaluates the GPS position of Gen-set. The following setpoint are

related to it:
Geo-Fencing (page 479)
Fence 1 Protection (page 481)
Fence 1 Radius (page 482)

Wrn Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 2 Alarm
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of Gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 479)

Wrn Fuel Theft
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Theft
This alarm occurs when the fuel level value measured at relevant AI (Fuel Level)
Description drops faster than is the limit adjusted by setpoint Maximal Fuel Drop (page
269).
8.2.3 Alarms level 2

What alarms level 2 are:
The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.

List of alarms level 2
Sd Module: Slot 1 757 Sd Generator L1 Overvoltage 765

Sd Module: Slot 4 757 Sd Generator L1L2 Overvoltage 766
Sd Module: Slot 5 758 Sd Generator L2L3 Overvoltage 766
Sd Module(slotA) - false module 758 Sd Generator L3L1 Overvoltage 767
Sd Module(slotB) - false module 758 BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage 767
Sd Module(slotA) - unknown module 758 BOC Generator L2 Undervoltage 767
Sd Module(slotB) - unknown module 758 BOC Generator L3 Undervoltage 767
Sd Module(slotA) - unattended 759 BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage 768
Sd Module(slotB) - unattended 759 BOC Generator L2L3 Undervoltage 768
Sd Module(slotA) - comm. outage 759 BOC Generator L3L1 Undervoltage 768
Sd Module(slotB) - comm. outage 759 Sd Current Unbalance 769
Sd Module(slotA) - unexpected 760 BOC Generator Overfrequency 769
Sd Module(slotB) - unexpected 760 Generator Underfrequency 769
Sd EM(A) - a message lost 760 Sd Overload 769
Sd EM(B) - a message lost 760 Sd Oil Pressure 770
Sd EM(A) - configuration mistake 761 BOC Coolant Temp 770
Sd EM(B) - configuration mistake 761 BOC Coolant Temp 770
Sd EM(A) - insufficient 761 BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage 770
Sd EM(B) - insufficient 761 BOC Generator L2 Undervoltage 770
Sd EM(A) - missing or damaged 761 BOC Generator L3 Undervoltage 771
Sd EM(B) - missing or damaged 762 BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage 771
Sd ECU Communication Fail 762 BOC Generator L2L3 Undervoltage 771
Sd ECU 1 Communication Fail 762 BOC Generator L3L1 Undervoltage 771
Sd ECU 2 Communication Fail 762 BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph 772
Sd Emergency Stop 762 BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N 772
Sd E-Stop 763 BOC Generator Overfrequency 772
Sd Charging Alternator Fail 763 BOC Generator Underfrequency 773
Sd Overspeed 763 MP Mains L1 Overvoltage 773
Sd Underspeed 764 MP Mains L1 Undervoltage 773
Sd RPM Measurement Fail 764 MP Mains L2 Overvoltage 773
Sd Battery Flat 764 MP Mains L2 Undervoltage 774
Sd Start Fail 764 MP Mains L3 Overvoltage 774
Sd GCB Fail 765 MP Mains L3 Overvoltage 774
Sd GCB Fail To Close 765 MP Mains L1L2 Overvoltage 774
Sd GCB Fail To Open 765 MP Mains L1L2 Undervoltage 775

MP Mains L2L3 Overvoltage 775
MP Mains L2L3 Undervoltage 775
MP Mains L3L1 Overvoltage 775
MP Mains L3L1 Undervoltage 776
MP Mains Overfrequency 776
MP Mains Underfrequency 776
BOC Reverse Power 777
BOC Current Unbalance 777
BOC Overload 778
BOC Short Circuit 778
Sd Earth Fault Current 778
BOC Overcurrent IDMT 778
BOC Rental Timer 1 Exceeded 779
BOC Rental Timer 2 Exceeded 779
BOC Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours 779
BOC Maintenance Timer 1 Interval 779
Sd Fence 1 Alarm 781
BOC Fence 1 Alarm 781
Sd Fence 2 Alarm 781
BOC Fence 2 Alarm 782
Sd Parallel Work 782
6 back to Alarms

Sd Module: Slot 1
Alarm Type SD
Description

Sd Module: Slot 2
Alarm Type SD
Description

Sd Module: Slot 3
Alarm Type SD
Description

Sd Module: Slot 4
Alarm Type SD
Description

Sd Module: Slot 5
Alarm Type SD
Description

Sd Module(slotA) - false module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module

Sd Module(slotB) - false module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - fake module

Sd Module(slotA) - unknown module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unknown module

Sd Module(slotB) - unknown module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unknown module

Sd Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unattended
Description

Sd Module(slotB) - unattended
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unattended
Description

Sd Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Description

Sd Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Description

Sd Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unexpected
function.

Sd Module(slotB) - unexpected
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unexpected
function.

Sd EM(A) - a message lost
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - a message lost
Description

Sd EM(B) - a message lost
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(B) - a message lost
Description

Sd EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - configuration mistake
Description

Sd EM(B) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(B) - configuration mistake
Description

Sd EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - insufficient

Sd EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(B) - insufficient

Sd EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - missing or damaged
Description slot (in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in
slot).

Sd EM(B) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(B) - missing or damaged
Description slot (if first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in
slot).

Sd ECU Communication Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message ECU Communication Fail
This alarm is issued if ECU is configured but the communication with ECU is not
Description
established or has dropped out.

Sd ECU 1 Communication Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd ECU 1 Communication Fail
This alarm occurs when an ECU 1 is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU 1 is not established or has dropped out.

Sd ECU 2 Communication Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd ECU 2 Communication Fail
This alarm occurs when an ECU 2 is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU 2 is not established or has dropped out.

Sd Emergency Stop
Alarm Type SD

Alarmlist message Sd Emergency Stop
Alarm is activated when binary input EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 619) is activated.
The Gen-set shuts down in the moment the input is activated and starting is
blocked until the input is deactivated and fault reset is pressed.
Note: Use red emergency button placed on the switchboard door and
Description connect it to a binary input of the controller. Then configure the function
Emergency Stop to this binary input. It is recommended to use NC contact of
the button.
Note: The MCB control is not affected by this alarm.

Sd E-Stop
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd E-Stop
Alarm is activated when dedicated E-Stop input is activated. The Gen-set shuts
Description down in the moment the input is activated and starting is blocked until the input is
deactivated and fault reset is pressed.

Sd Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Wrn Charging Alternator Fail
This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+ terminal is
lower than 80%D+ Threshold (page 262) of the controller supply voltage. This
Description
alarm works similar to the red “battery” alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard.
The setpoint has to be in Charge Fail or Enabled position to enable this alarm.

Sd Overspeed
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Overspeed
This alarm occurs immediately when the engine speed has exceeded the limit.
Description The behavior of the overspeed alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
Overspeed Sd (page 263) adjust the overspeed limit

Sd Underspeed
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Underspeed
This alarm will be issued when the Gen-set is running and then stops by itself, i.e.
the RPM drops under the value of setpoint Underspeed Sd (page 265).
Description
The underspeed alarm starts to be evaluated after successful Gen-set start and
is being evaluated for the entire time that the fuel solenoid is on.

Sd RPM Measurement Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd RPM Measurement Fail
Alarm evaluated During cranking
The alarm is issued if the engine speed has not exceeded the Starting RPM
Description (page 245) within the Maximum Cranking Time (page 244), although some of
additional running engine indication sources indicate that the engine has started.

Sd Battery Flat
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Battery Flat
Alarm evaluated During cranking
This alarm will be issued if the controller was reset during cranking of the gen-set.
If this situation occurs, the controller supposes the starting battery is so
Description
exhausted that its voltage drops so low when starter motor is energized that it
causes controller reset.

Sd Start Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Start Fail
Alarm evaluated When the gen-set is being started
This alarm will be issued after all attempts to start the gen-set have run out but
Description the Gen-set did not start. The following setpoints are related to this alarm:
Cranking Attempts (page 243) adjust the number of attempts

Sd GCB Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message SD GCB Fail
This alarm will occur when the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 623) input does not match
the expected position given by the GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 660) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback persists.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
Description
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
immediately.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to an open
or close command within 5 seconds.

Sd GCB Fail To Close
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd GCB Fail To Close
closing.
Description
LBO GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 660) opened but LBI GCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 623) did not closed in 5 seconds.

Sd GCB Fail To Open
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd GCB Fail To Open
opening.
Description
LBO GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 660) opened but LBI GCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 623) did not opened in 5 seconds.

Sd Generator L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 > Voltage
Description This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following

Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 285)

Alarm Type SD
Description

Alarm Type SD
Description

Sd Generator L1L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 > Voltage
Description

Alarm Type SD

Description

Alarm Type SD
Description

BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 < Voltage
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 1. The following
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 286)

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC

Description

BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Sd Current Unbalance
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Current Unbalance
This alarm is issued to indicate if Current Unbalance BOC (page 284) timer
Description
elapses.

BOC Generator Overfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator > Frequency
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
Description
Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 288)

Generator Underfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator < Frequency
Description
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 289)

Sd Overload
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Overload
The alarm is issued when the Gen-setmains power is over the limit for time period
longer than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the
Description following setpoints:
Overload BOC (page 281) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 282) adjusts the delay.

Sd Oil Pressure
Alarm Type BOCSD
Alarmlist message Sd Oil Pressure
Description Shutdown alarm for Oil Pressure user protection.

BOC Coolant Temp
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Coolant Temp
Description Breaker Open and Stop alarm for Coolant Temp user protection.

BOC Coolant Temp
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Coolant Temp
Description Breaker Open and Stop alarm for Fuel Level user protection.

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1 < Voltage
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description


Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC

Description

BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-ph
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase to phase voltages, i.e. the
difference between highest and lowest phase to phase voltage at any given time.
The following setpoints are related to it:
Description Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 287) adjusts the maximum allowed
time.
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 287) adjusts the alarm delay.

BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-n
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase voltages, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time. The following
Description Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 287) adjusts the maximum allowed
time.
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 287) adjusts the alarm delay.

BOC Generator Overfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator > Frequency
Description
Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 288)

BOC Generator Underfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator < Frequency
Description
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 289)

MP Mains L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type MP
Alarmlist message No
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Description
Mains Overvoltage (page 299)
Mains Overvoltage Delay (page 303)

MP Mains L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type MP
are related to it:
Description
Mains Undervoltage (page 301)
Mains Undervoltage Delay (page 303)

Alarm Type MP
Description are related to it:


MP Mains L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type MP
are related to it:
Description

Alarm Type MP
are related to it:
Description

Alarm Type MP
are related to it:
Description

MP Mains L1L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type MP
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases L1 and L2. The following
Description


MP Mains L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type MP
Description

Alarm Type MP
Description

Alarm Type MP
Description

Alarm Type MP

Description

Alarm Type MP
Description

MP Mains Overfrequency
Alarm Type MP
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases 1. The following
Description
Mains Overfrequency (page 304)
Mains < > Frequency Delay (page 308)

MP Mains Underfrequency
Alarm Type MP
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases 1. The following
Description
Mains Underfrequency (page 306)
Mains < > Frequency Delay (page 308)

MP Mains Volt Unbal Ph-N
Alarm Type MP

This alarm evaluates the Mains voltage unbalance in phase Ph-N. The following
Description
Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 303)

MP Mains Volt Unbal Ph-N
Alarm Type MP
This alarm evaluates the Mains voltage unbalance in phase Ph-Ph. The following
Description

BOC Reverse Power
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Reverse Power
The alarm is issued when the level of active power (-kW) gets under limit given by
Description setpoint Reverse Power Level (page 290) for time longer than the value of
setpoint Reverse Power Delay (page 290).

BOC Current Unbalance
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Current Unbalance
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase currents, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase current at any given time. The following
Description Current Unbalance BOC (page 284) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase current at any given
time.
Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 284) adjusts the alarm delay.

BOC Overload
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Overload
The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period
longer than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the
Description following setpoints:
Overload BOC (page 281) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 282) adjusts the delay

BOC Short Circuit
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Short Circuit
This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:
Description
Short Circuit BOC (page 282) adjusts the short current limit
Short Circuit BOC Delay (page 282) adjusts the delay in fine steps

Sd Earth Fault Current
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Earth Fault Current
This alarm indicates that the value of earth fault current is higher than adjusted
limit. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description Earth Fault Sd (page 533) adjusts the maximum allowed earth fault
current.
Earth Fault Delay (page 532) adjusts the alarm delay.

BOC Overcurrent IDMT
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of binary input
This alarm is issued if IDMT protection is activated due to over-crossing the IDMT
Description
curve set by setpoints IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 283).

The behaviour of the overcurrent alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 283) defines the reaction time of the
protection when the current is twice the amount of nominal value.
Nominal Current (page 223) set the nominal current level, where the
alarm starts to be evaluated. The reaction time is infinite at this point.

BOC Rental Timer 1 Exceeded
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Rental Timer 1 Exceeded
Description This alarm is issued if Rental Timer 1 BOC will timer elapse.

BOC Rental Timer 2 Exceeded
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Rental Timer 2 Exceeded
Description This alarm is issued if Rental Timer 2 BOC will timer elapse.

BOC Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
579) reaches 0.
276) (unit is hours-h) and it counts down while engine is running. Setpoint
Maintenance Timer 1 Protection (page 277) has to be set to: BOC

BOC Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
Description 579) reaches 0.


Alarm Type BOC
579) reaches 0.

Alarm Type BOC
579) reaches 0.
Description

Alarm Type BOC
580) reaches 0.

Alarm Type BOC

580) reaches 0.
Description

Sd Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 1 Alarm
related to it:

BOC Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 1 Alarm
related to it:

Sd Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 2 Alarm
Description related to it:
Geo-Fencing (page 479)


BOC Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 2 Alarm
related to it:

Sd Parallel Work
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Parallel Work
Description This alarm is active when GCB is closed externally while MCB is closed.
8.3 Modules
8.3.1 Plug-in modules
The available communication plug-in modules are:
CM-RS232-485 – communication module for connection via RS232 or RS485 line
CM2-4G-GPS – communication module for connection via 4G
CM3-Ethernet – communication module for internet connection via Ethernet
The available extension plug-in modules are:
EM-BIO8-EFCP – extension module with 8 binary inputs/outputs and with earth fault current protection
Note: Controller has 2 plug-in module slots.
Supported combinations of plug-in modules

Module CM3-Ethernet CM2-4G-GPS CM-RS232-485 EM-BIO8-EFCP
CM3-Ethernet
CM2-4G-GPS

Module CM3-Ethernet CM2-4G-GPS CM-RS232-485 EM-BIO8-EFCP
CM-RS232-485
EM-BIO8-EFCP
Communication modules
CM-RS232-485 783
CM3-Ethernet 785
CM2-4G-GPS 787
CM-RS232-485
CM-RS232-485 is optional plug-in card to enable InteliLite 4 the RS232 and RS485 communication. This is
required for computer or Modbus connection. The CM-RS232-485 is a dual port module with RS232 and
RS485 interfaces at independent COM channels. The RS232 is connected to COM1 and RS485 to COM2.
Image 8.99 CM-RS232-485 interface
Image 8.100 Pinout of RS232 line

Image 8.101 Pinout of RS485 line
Image 8.102 Jumpers description
Note: Balancing resistors should both be closed at only one device in the whole RS485 network.
Maximal distance of line is 10 m for RS232 line and 1200 m for RS485 line.
Terminator 120 Ω
Balancing resistor +5 V
Technical data
40 mA / 8 VDC
26 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
14 mA / 24 VDC
10 mA / 36 VDC
Isolation Galvanic separation
Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Install package to computer or open PSI to install it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate

firmware you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is re-established again automatically when the
update process is finished.
CM3-Ethernet
CM3-Ethernet is a plug-in card with Ethernet 10/100 Mbit interface in RJ45 connector. It provides an interface
for connecting a PC through ethernet/internet network, for sending active e-mails and for integration of the
controller into a building management (MODBUS TCP and SNMP protocols).
Image 8.103 CM3-Ethernet interface
Use an Ethernet UTP cable with a RJ45 connector for linking the module with your Ethernet network. The
module can also be connected directly to a PC using cross-wired UTP cable.
Image 8.104 Cross-wired cable
Technical data
General
Width × Height × Depth 73.8 × 50.3 × 21

Weight ~30 g
Power supply 8-36 V DC
Power consumption 1 W
Peak power consumption 2 W
Storage temperature -40 ˚C to +80 ˚C
Ethernet port
100 Mbit/s, full duplex
RJ45 socket
Module setup
All settings related to the module are to be adjusted via the controller setpoints. The respective setpoints are
located in the setpoint Group: CM-Ethernet (page 513).
All actual operational values like actual IP address etc. are available in controller values in a specific group as
well.
Status LED
Blinking frequency Color
Green – everything is OK
Red – some of following errors occurred:
1 Hz unplugged Ethernet cable
module cannot connect to AirGate
module can not obtain IP address from DHCP
Green – firmware is currently being programmed
10 Hz
Red – no firmware present in the module
Firmware upgrade

CM2-4G-GPS
CM2-4G-GPS plug-in module containing a GPS receiver and GSM/WCDMA/LTE modem which can work in
two modes of operation based on the settings in the setpoint Internet Connection (page 489).
Image 8.105 CM2-4G-GPS module
IMPORTANT: Operating temperature of module is from -30 °C to +75 °C.
Note: Cellular data service must be enabled in your SIM card by your mobile operator for successful
operation.
CM2-4G-GPS module works with:

WebSupervisor – internet-based remote monitoring solution
AirGate – powerful connection technology to make internet access as simple as possible
CM2-4G-GPS module also works like GPS locator. Geo-fencing function can be used with this module.
4G module types
If the anthenna is CELLULAR only and has 1 cable (OT1A4GXXMCX), it is connected to the 4G-MAIN
connector.
If the anthenna is CELLULAR only and has 2 cables, cables are connected to the 4G-MAIN or 4G-DIV
connectors (does not matter which cable to which connector).
If the anthenna is a combination of CELLULAR/GPS and has 2 cables (OT1A4GGPSCX), then cable
"4G/LTE" needs to be connected to the 4G-MAIN connector and "GPS" cable to the GPS connector.
If the anthenna is a combination of CELLULAR/GPS and has 3 cables (OT2A4GGPSCX), then cables
"4G/LTE" need to be connected to the 4G-MAIN and 4G-DIV connectors (does not matter which cable to
which connector) and "GPS" cable to the GPS connector.

Note: Type of the cable is labeled on its side.
Technical data
General
Width × Height × Depth 73.8 × 50.3 × 15
Weight ~35 g
Power supply 8-36 V DC
Power consumption 1.7 W
Peak power consumption 10 W
Storage temperature -40 ˚C to +80 ˚C
GNSS
Antenna interface SMA female, 2.8 V / 20 mA
Antenna type Active
Cellular
2G (GSM/GPRS/EDGE) Quad band,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz
3G (UMTS/HSPA+) Seven band, 800
(BdXIX) / 850 (BdV) / 900 (BdVIII) / AWS
(BdIV) / 1800 (BdIX) / 1900 (BdII) /
Supported networks and frequency bands
2100MHz (BdI)
4G (LTE) Twelve band, 700 (Bd12 <MFBI
Bd17>, Bd28) 800 (Bd18, Bd19, Bd20) 850
(Bd5) / 900 (Bd8) / AWS (Bd4) / 1800 (Bd3)
/ 1900 (Bd2) / 2100 (Bd1) / 2600MHz (Bd7)
Antenna interface 2x SMA female (Main and Diversity)
SIM card settings

SIM card must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled

How to start using CM2-4G-GPS module
You will need a controller, CM2-4G-GPS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data
service.
Note: Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. – i.e. if you want to
use the module in LTE (4G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card
supports 4G network.
Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM2-4G-GPS card
Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.
If you want to use the built-in GPS receiver, also connect an active GPS antenna to the GPS antenna
connector.
Switch off the controller.
Insert CM2-4G-GPS module into controller
Power up the controller.
Activate CM2-4G-GPS module by switching the setpoint Internet Connection (page 489) to enabled
Enter correct Access Point Name (this information is provided by Mobile Operator). Setpoint can be set
on controller's front panel or by InteliConfig.
Wait for approx 2 – 4 minutes for first connection of the system to AirGate. AirGate will automatically
generate the AirGate ID value. Then navigate to measurement screens where you will find signal strength
bar and AirGate ID identifier.
Image 8.106 Main screen of CM2-4G-GPS module
Image 8.107 Screen of AirGate
Modem Status
Code Description
OK Module successfully initialized and connected to the cellular network
E01 Unsuccessful restore to the factory settings

SIM not inserted or locked by PIN.
E SIM Use another device (e.g. mobile phone) to disable the option for SIM to be
locked by PIN
E04 It is not possible to set manually chosen network mode 2G/3G/4G/Automatic
It is not possible to register into cellular network. Possible reasons:
E registration No signal (no coverage, broken or unconnected antenna)
Manually chosen network mode 2G/3G/4G is not available
It is not possible to set PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context for defined APN
(Access Point Name). Possible reasons:
E context
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (format)
Wrong PDP context number
It is not possible to connect to cellular network (ATD*99***context) Possible
E connect reasons:
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (wrong text)
E09 It is not possible to get signal strength
E10 It is not possible to get operator name
E11 Loss of registration into cellular network was detected
E12 Data error
E13 Data error
E14 Modem was restarted
It is not possible to send SMS. Possible reasons:
E SMS send Wrong number
SIM doesn’t support SMS
E18 Modem hardware configuration error
E conn lost Loss of connection with cellular network
Restart-config Modem was restarted due to the change of controller setpoint
Restart-app Modem was restarted due to the performed cellular connection check
AirGate Status
Code Description
Resolving Resolving

Susp AGkeyEmpty AirGate is not set in the controller
Firmware upgrade
Extension modules
EM-BIO8-EFCP 791
EM-BIO8-EFCP
EM-BIO8-EFCP is optional plug-in card. Through this card, the controller can accommodate one AC current
(CT) measuring input (1A or 5A input) and up to 8 binary inputs or outputs. In InteliConfig PC configuration
tool it is possible to easily choose whether particular I/O will be binary input or output.
Image 8.108 EM-BIO8-EFCP interface
Note: This protection is active ONLY when Engine is running.
IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is supported by controller only in slot A.

Image 8.109 Overview of EM-BIO8-EFCP
Image 8.110 EM-BIO8-EFCP wiring
Note: Current inputs are supported only in MRS 16 and AMF 25 and AMF9 controllers.
EM-BIO8-EFCP technical data
Power supply
Power supply range 8-36 VDC
40 mA / 8 VDC
27 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
22 mA / 24 VDC
19 mA / 36 VDC

Binary inputs
Number Up to 8, non-isolated
Close/Open 0-2 VDC close contact
indication >6 VDC open contact
Binary outputs
Number Up to 8 , non-isolated
Max. current 0,5A
Switching to positive supply terminal
Current measuring input

Number of inputs 2
Nominal input current 1A/5A
Load (CT output impedance) < 0,1
Max measured current from CT 10 A
Current measurement
2% from Nominal current
tolerance
Max peak current from CT 150 A / 1 s
Max continuous current 10 A
Earth fault current measurement

The Earth Fault protection is done by the extension module EM-BIO8-EFCP.
When the measured current exceeds the set value, which indicates that part of the current is dispersed to
earth, and when the set Earth Fault Delay (page 532) time elapses, the Earth Fault Current Protection
(page 531), Sd Earth Fault Current (page 778) alarms activate. Earth Fault protection is not active when
Gen-set does not run and when the Earth Fault Current Protection (page 531) is disabled.
IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is not intended to protect human health, but the
device!
Image 8.111 Earth fault current protection

Firmware upgrade
8.3.2 CAN modules

The available extension CAN modules are:
Inteli AIN8 – extension CAN module with 8 analog inputs
Inteli IO8/8 – extension CAN module with 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
this CAN module can be switched to Inteli IO16/0 – extension CAN module with 16 binary inputs and 2
analog outputs
Supported combinations of modules

Inteli Inteli Inteli Inteli
Slot Inteli AIN8 IGL-RA15 IGS-PTM
AIN8TC IO8/8 IO16/0 AIO9/1
IMPORTANT: In slot 3, 4 and 5 CAN modules Inteli IO8/8 and Inteli IO16/0 are supported without
analog outputs. Analog outputs of these CAN modules are supported only in slot 1 and 2.
It is possible to add up to 80 binary inputs or up to 68 binary outputs or up to 32 analog inputs on CAN

modules.
Extension modules
Inteli AIN8 795
Inteli IO8/8 800
IGS-PTM 807
Inteli AIN8TC 813

Inteli AIO9/1 817
IGL-RA15 822
Inteli AIN8
Inteli AIN8 module is an extension module equipped with analog inputs. Inteli AIN8 module is connected to
controller by CAN1 bus.
Image 8.112 Inteli AIN8
Image 8.113 Inteli AIN8 dimensions
Note: All dimensions are in mm.

Terminals
Analog input 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON" – switch both switches)
Note: Impulse input is not supported.
Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
resistor three wire input
current input
voltage input
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
IMPORTANT: Impulse input is not supported in controller.
Supported sensors
Sensors
User curves NI100 [°F] (fix) 0-5 V
PT100 [°C] (fix) NI1000 [°F] (fix) 0-10 V
PT1000 [°C] (fix) 4-20 mA passive
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-2400 Ω 4-20 mA active

Sensors
NI1000 [°C] (fix) 0-10 kΩ 0-20 mA passive
PT100 [°F] (fix) ±1 V ±20 mA active
PT1000 [°F] (fix) 0-2.4 V
CAN address
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.
Note: When setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Remove the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on pins
4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv
5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli AIN8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press the Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process does not start – after 60 seconds the "Timeout" will be evaluated.
In this case please check:

You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blink)
12. Module FW is upgraded
LED indication
LED status Description
Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn't communicate with the controller).
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.
Terminator
Resistance sensor - 3 wires
Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0-2400 Ω, 0-10 kΩ

Resistance sensor – 2 wires
Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0-2400 Ω, 0-10 kΩ
Current sensor - active
Note: Ranges: ±20 mA, 4 – 20 mA
Current sensor - passive
Note: Ranges: 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

Voltage sensor
Note: Ranges: ±1 V, 0 – 2,5 V, 0 – 5 V, 0 – 10 V
Technical data
General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature -40 °C to +80 °C
Operating temperature -30 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3" × 4.3" × 1.8")
Weight 221.5 grams
Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-10 V
Voltage
Accuracy: ±0.25 % of actual value + ±25 mV
Range: ±20 mA
Current
Accuracy: ±0.25 % of actual value + ±50 µA
Range: 0- 10 kΩ
Resistive
Accuracy: ±0.5 % of actual value + ±2 Ω
Inteli IO8/8
Inteli IO8/8 module is an extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs and analog outputs.
Inteli IO8/8 is the name of the module, but it is possible to configure the module (by internal switch) to two
configurations:
Inteli IO8/8 – 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
Inteli IO16/0 – 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
The detection of communication speed is indicated by rapid flashing of status LED. Once the speed is
detected the module remains set for this speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of
communication speed detection is done by resetting of the module.

Image 8.114 Inteli IO8/8
Image 8.115 Inteli IO8/8 dimensions
Note: All dimensions are in mm.

Terminals
Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Binary outputs 8 binary outputs (8 binary inputs)
Analog outputs 2 analog outputs
CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
Binary inputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary input indication
Binary outputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary output indication
CAN LED Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON" – switch both switches)
Inputs and outputs

Binary inputs
8 channels
pull up
pull down
All 8 inputs are configured to one type together.
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Binary outputs
8 channels
High side switch
Low side switch

All 8 inputs are always configured to one type (HSS/LSS) together. All 8 outputs can be modified to inputs by
switch on the PCB ( Inteli IO8/8 to Inteli IO16/0).
Analog outputs
2 channels
voltage 0-10V
current 0-20mA
PWM (level 5 V, with adjustable frequency from 200 Hz to 2400 Hz, with step 1 Hz)
All inputs/outputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Output state check

Output state check function evaluates in real time the state of binary outputs and adjusted (required) state. In
case of failure (a difference between the required state and real state) history record and alarm are issued
(type of the alarm is set by "Protection upon module failure" – (No protection / Warning / Shutdown)).
This function is designed for short-circuit or other failure, which causes change of set state of binary output.
CAN address
In Inteli IO8/8 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, CAN address for binary
output and analog outputs is determined by DIP switch B.
In Inteli IO16/0 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, first group of 8 input has
address A, second group of 8 inputs has address A+1. CAN address of analog outputs is set by DIP switch B.
Note: When setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Remove the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on pins

4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv
5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli IO8/8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press the Start button
9. Wait till process is done (if the process does not start – after 60 seconds the "Timeout" will be evaluated).
In this case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blink)
12. Module FW is upgraded
LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has an LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has an LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary
output is set. When this LED is shining, then the module is configured as 8 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs.
When this LED is dark, the module is configured as 16 binary inputs.
LED at power connector – status LED

Dark FW in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli IO8/8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn’t communicate with the controller).
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of inputs and outputs.
Binary inputs – pull up
There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see example of binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the GND (-) – dashed line).
In lower picture is an example of wiring between BIN2 and GND (-). Both ways are correct.
Binary inputs – pull down
There are two options of wiring. In the upper picture you can see an example of binary input connected
between BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the Ucc (+) – dashed line).
In the lower picture is an example of wiring between BIN2 and Ucc (+). Both ways are correct.

Binary outputs – high side
When high side setting of outputs is chosen – binary output must be connected to the negative potential
directly Terminal VHS (voltage High side) must be connected to positive potential directly. Maximal current of
each binary output is 500 mA. Size of fuse depends on load.
Binary outputs – low side
When low side setting of outputs is chosen – binary output must be connected to the positive potential of
power supply directly. Negative potential is connected internally – dashed line.
Analog outputs
Note: Limit of analog ground (AGND) is 100 mA.
IMPORTANT: Terminator for analog output has special analog ground (AGND), which must not be
connected to the GND.
Technical data
General data
Protection IP20

Dimensions (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)
Weight 240 grams
Analog outputs
Range 0-10 V
Voltage Accuracy: ±20 mV + ±0.5 % of actual value
Imax 5 mA
Range: 0-20 mA
Current Accuracy: ±100 µA + ±0.5 % of actual value
Rmax 500 Ω
Level 5 V
PWM Frequency – adjustable 200÷2400 Hz
Imax 20 mA
Binary inputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 16 for Inteli IO16/0
Input resistance 4400 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for close contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for open contact
6 to 36 V DC
indication
Note: Signals and communications can't be connected as long distance lines (not to be connected outside of
the building or longer than 30 m).
Binary outputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 0 for Inteli IO16/0
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC
IGS-PTM
IGS-PTM module is extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs, analog inputs and analog
output. IGS-PTM module is connected to controller by CAN1 bus.

Image 8.116 IGS-PTM
Image 8.117 IGS-PTM dimensions

Terminals
Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Analog inputs 4 analog inputs
Analog outputs 1 analog output
Binary outputs 8 binary outputs
CAN CAN1 line
RS232-TTL Interface for programming
Power Power supply
Analog inputs
Analog inputs can be configured for:
Resistance measurement
Current measurement
Voltage measurement
The type of analog input is configured via jumpers RUI located on lower PCB.
RUI Analog input configuration

1-2 Resistance measuring
2-3 Current measuring
no jumper Voltage measuring
Supported sensors
Sensors
PT100 [°C] (fix) User curves
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-100 mV
PT100 [°F] (fix) 0-2400 Ω
NI100 [°F] (fix) ±20 mA

CAN address
Controller type selection
The type of controller to be used with IGS-PTM must be selected via jumper labeled IGS accessible at the
lower PCB.
IGS jumper Controller type

OPEN IL-NT, IC-NT
CLOSE IG-NT, IS-NT, InteliLite 4
Address configuration
If InteliLite 4 controller type is selected (by IGS jumper), address of IGS-PTM could be modified via jumpers
labeled ADR1 and ADR2.
BOUT
ADR1 ADR2 ADR offset BIN module AIN module
module
Open Open 0 (default) 1 1 1
Close Open 1 2 2 2
Open Close 2 3 3 3
Close Close 3 4 4 4
Firmware upgrade is available via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper BOOT.
RESET jumper is used to reset the device. Close jumper to reset the device. For programming FlashProg PC
tool should be used.
LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has an LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has an LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary
output is set.
LED at power connector – status LED
Dark No required power connected.
Quick flashing Program check failure.
One flash and pause Compensation fail.
Three flashes and
Compensation successful.
pause
Flashes There is no communication between IGS-PTM and the controller.
Power supply is in the range and communication between IGS-PTM and
Lights
controller properly works.

Wiring
Binary inputs
Binary outputs
Resistance sensor
Note: Range: 0-2400 Ω
IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-250 Ω. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose 0-2400 Ω sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.
Voltage sensor
Note: Range 0-100 mV

Current sensor – passive
Note: Range: ±0-20 mA
IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-20 mA. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose ±20 mA active sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.
Analog outputs
Note: Range: 0 to 20 mA ±0.33 mA
Technical data
General data
Current consumption 100 mA at 24V ÷ 500 mA
Protection IP20
Dimensions (WxHxD) 95 × 96 × 43 mm (3.7" × 3.8" × 1.7")
Analog inputs
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1.5 % ±1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ±0.5 Ω out of measured value
Range: 0-250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ±2 Ω out of measured value

Analog outputs
Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0.33 mA
Current
Resolution 10 bit
Binary inputs
Input resistance 4700 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for close contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for open contact
8 to 36 V DC
indication
Note: Signals and communications can't be connected as long distance lines (not to be connected outside of
the building or longer than 30 m).
Binary outputs
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1.5 % ±.1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0.5 Ω out of measured value
Range: 0-250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ±2 Ω out of measured value
Inteli AIN8TC
Inteli AIN8TC module is an extension module equipped with 8 analog inputs dedicated for thermocouple
sensors only.

Image 8.118 Inteli AIN8TC
Image 8.119 Inteli AIN8TC dimensions

Terminals
ANALOG INPUT 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
POWER Power supply
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON")
TEST jumper Upgrade of SW
AT-LINK Connector for AT-LINK
Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as thermocouple sensors only
Supported sensors
Sensors
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)

Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)
Note: "nc" means not cold junction compensation (by external sensor). In this case is used internal
temperature sensor on the PCB
Address and DIP switch setting

DIP switch determines CAN address for analog inputs.
Programming Firmware
Firmware is upgraded via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST.
For programming FlashProg PC tool version 4.2 or higher must be used.
LED indication

Dark FW in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)
Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and
controller works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN
address module doesn't communicate with the controller)
Wiring
Analog inputs
Terminator

Technical data
Dimension (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)

Weight 237.5 grams
Analog inputs (not electric separated) 8, no galvanic separated

Measuring ±100 mV
Accuracy ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV (± 3 °C)
Internal sensor for measuring cold junction -
±1 °C in temperature range -20 °C ÷ +70 °C
Accuracy
CANbus is galvanic separated from the
measurement and power supply.
All analog inputs are galvanic separated
Galvanic separation
from power supply.
Analog inputs are not galvanic separated
between channels
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Heat radiation 2W
Thermocouples which are galvanically separated and galvanically non-separated are supported.
Inteli AIO9/1
Inteli AIO9/1 module is an extension module equipped with analog inputs and outputs – designed for DC
measurement.

Image 8.120 Inteli AIO9/1
Image 8.121 Inteli AIO9/1 dimensions

Terminals
ANALOG INPUT 9 channels

ANALOG OUTPUTS 1 channel
CAN CAN1 line
POWER Power supply
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON")
TEST jumper Upgrade of SW
AT-LINK Connector for AT-LINK (Upgrade of SW)
Analog inputs
4 channels AIN1 – AIN4 can be configured as:
Sensor ±65V (determined for measurement of battery voltage)
4 channels AIN5 – AIN8 can be configured as:
Thermocouples – type J,K or L (in °C or °F)
Sensor ±75mV DC – (for connecting current shunts)
1 channel AIN9 can be configured as:
RTD (Pt1000, Ni1000)
Common resistance 0-2400Ω

Analog outputs
1 channel AOUT1. Type of output:
0-10V DC
0-20mA
PWM (5 V, freq 2.4 Hz ÷2.4 kHz)
Analog output has 4-pins connector – GND and one pin for each type of output.
All analog inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Supported sensors
Sensors
User curves
PT1000 [°C] (fix)
NI1000 [°C] (fix)
PT1000 [°F] (fix)
NI1000 [°F] (fix)
0-2400 Ω (fix linear)
±65 V DC (fix linear)
±75 mV (fix linear)
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)
Address and DIP switch setting

DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs and outputs.
Programming Firmware
Firmware upgrade is available via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST and
switch OFF and ON the power supply.
For programming use FlashProg PC tool version 4.4 or higher.
LED indication

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)

Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and
controller works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN
address module doesn’t communicate with the controller)
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.
Measuring resistance – AIN9

2 – wire measurement
Ranges: Pt1000, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω.

Analog input 9 is determined for measuring resistance only.
Technical data
Dimension (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)

Weight 248 grams
CAN1 – galvanic separated from power supply
Interface to controller
and measurement,

Analog inputs (not electric separated) 9 channels
0-65 V ± 0.25 % of actual value + ± 120 mV
Measurement is not galvanic separated from
Range
power supply, but IN- is not interconnected with
AIN1-AIN4 – Voltage inputs
GND – there is floating measurement.
Accuracy of
± 0,1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV (± 3 °C)
measurement
Range ± 75 mV (nominal) (measurement up to ±80 mV)
AIN5-AIN8 – Voltage inputs Accuracy of ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 75 µV
measurement Galvanic separated from power supply
Range 0- 2400 Ω
± 0.5 % of actual value + ± 4 Ω Pt1000, Ni1000 ±
AIN9 resistance input Accuracy of
2,5 °C
measurement
It is not galvanic separated from power supply.
Analog output
I 0-20mA /500Rmax. ± 1 % of actual value + ± 200 uA
U 0-10V ± 0.5 % of actual value + ± 50 mV
PWM – 5 V, 200 Hz-2.4kHz 15 mA max.
Galvanic separated from power supply
Galvanic
CAN bus is galvanic separated from the measurement and power supply
separation
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 80 °C
The product is fully supported in firmware IGS-NT 3.1.1 or higher.

For information about support of this module in IGS-NT fw branches and ID-DCU – please read New Feature
Lists.
IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator (IGL-RA15) is designed as an extension signalling unit.
The unit is equipped with a fully configurable tricolor (red, orange, green) LED for intuitive operation
together with high functionality.

Image 8.122 IGL-RA15
Image 8.123 IGL-RA15 dimensions
Terminals
Horn Horn
CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
CAN address
Address Jumper A Jumper B

1 OPEN OPEN
5+6 CLOSED OPEN
Customer defined CLOSED CLOSED
SW changing of CAN1 address is enabled only when both jumpers are closed. Any one of these addresses
(1+2 or 3+4 or 5+6 or 7+8) can be set via the following steps:
Switch to programming mode (Hold the Horn reset and Lamp test when unit is powering on). Status led is
yellow

Press Lamp test sixteen times
Set the address up by pressing Horn reset.
The number of red luminous LEDs means the CAN1 addresses (two for addresses 1+2, four for
addresses 3+4, six for addresses 5+6 and eight for addresses 7+8)
Press Lamp test
LED indication
Each LED color is adjusted independently of controller output settings. If controller output 1 is set as
"Common Shutdown" it does not mean red LED1 color for iGL-RA15. The LEDs color can be adjusted by
following steps:
yellow
Press Horn reset to change the LED1 color (green, yellow, red)
Press Lamp test to switch to the next LED color adjusting
Continue to adjust all LEDs color
After LED15 color adjusting press Lamp test three times
Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns
to normal operation without changes saving.
Status LED
The signals LEDs are handled like binary outputs. This means everything that can be configured to binary
outputs can be also configured to the LEDs of IGL-RA15.
Lights Configured logical output is active on the controller
Dark green LED Configured logical output is not active on the controller
Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was
Dark yellow or red LED
pressed.
Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was still
Yellow or red LED blinks
not pressed.
Power LED
Blinking green The unit is OK and the communication to the master controller is OK.
Blinking red The unit is OK, but the communication to the master controller is not running.
Blinking yellow EEPROM check not passed OK after power on
Yellow Horn timeout or controller address adjustment
Horn setting
The horn output is activated if any of red or yellow LED is on. Output is on until pressing Horn reset or horn
timeout counts down. The timeout can be set via the following steps:
yellow
Press Lamp test fifteen times

Set the horn timeout by pressing Horn reset.
The number of green luminous LEDs means timeout in 10 s (any for disabling horn output, 1 for 10s
timeout, 2 for 10s timeout, 15 for disabling horn timeout).
Press Lamp test two times
Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns
to normal operation without changes saving.
The horn is activated:

If any red or yellow LED lights up or
At the end of the extended lamp test. See chapter Lamp and horn test (page 825)
The horn can be silenced:
By pressing horn reset button or
It silences automatically after adjusted time
Lamp and horn test

Pressing and holding lamp test button for less than 2 s executes the basic lamp test. All LEDs light up with the
configured color. If the button is held longer than 2 s, an extended test is started. Every LED is tested step-by-
step in green color and then in red color. The horn is activated at the end of the test. Afterwards, that the unit
returns to normal operation. The horn can be silenced with horn reset.
Wiring
* terminator resistor only when iGL-RA 15 is the last unit on the CAN1 bus.
Note: The shielding of the CAN bus cable must be grounded at one point only!
Note: See the section Technical data (page 211) for recommended CAN bus cable type.

Technical data
General data
0.35-0.1A (+1Amax horn output) depends on supply
Current consumption
voltage
Protection IP65
Humidity 85%
Dimensions (WxHxD) 180 × 120 × 55 mm
Weight 950 g
Horn output
Maximum current 1.0 A
Maximum switching voltage 36 V DC
CAN bus interface

Galvanic separated
Maximal CAN bus length 200 m
Speed 250 kBd
Nominal impedance 120 Ω
Cable type twisted pair (shielded)
Following dynamic cable parameters are important especially for maximal 200 meters CAN bus length
Nominal Velocity of Propagation min. 75 % (max. 4.4 ns/m)
2
Wire crosscut min.0.25 mm
Maximal attenuation (at 1 MHz) 2 dB / 100 m
Recommended Industrial Automation & Process Control Cables
3082A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3086A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
BELDEN (www.belden.com) 3087A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
3105A Paired EIA Industrial RS485 cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Trunk Cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Drop Cable
LAPP CABLE (www.lappcable.com)
Unitronic BUS CAN
Unitronic-FD BUS P CAN UL/CSA
6 back to Appendix

Intelilite4 Amf25 Global Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Intelilite4 Amf25 Global Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Intelilite4 Amf25 Global Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

InteliLite 4

Copyright © 2023 ComAp a.s.

1.4.3 Dangerous voltage 8 3.1 AMF – Automatic Mains Failure Start 21

1.4.4 Adjusting the setpoints 8 3.2 MRS – Manual Remote Start 22

1.5 Functions and protections 8

2 System overview 11 4.2.2 Mounting 24

2.1 General description 11 4.3 Terminal Diagram 25

2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4 11 4.4 Recommended wiring 26

2.2 True RMS measurement 11 4.4.1 General 27

2.3 Configurability and monitoring 11 4.4.2 Example of AMF Wiring 28

2.3.1 Supported configuration and 4.4.3 Grounding 28

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 2

5.1.1 Binary inputs 63 5.5.12 RPM Measurement 120

5.1.2 Binary outputs 63 5.5.13 Multi ECU 121

5.1.3 Analog inputs 63 5.5.14 History log 122

5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools 5.5.15 Breaker control 123

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 3

7 Technical data 211

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 4

6 back to Table of contents

1.1 Clarification of Notation

1.2 About this Global Guide

1.3 Legal notice

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 5

1.3.1 General security recommendations and set of measures

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 6

1.3.2 Used open source software

1.4 General warnings

1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 7

1.4.4 Adjusting the setpoints

1.5 Functions and protections

Description ANSI code Description ANSI code

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 8

EN 61010-1 EN 60068-2-30:2005 25/55°C, RH 95%, 48hours

EN 60068-2-2 (70 °C/16 h) UL 6200

Supplier's Declaration of Conformity

Unique identifier: IL4AMF25BAA, IL4AMF25BLA

Tel: +1 815 636 2541

FCC Compliance Statement

1.7 Document history

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 9

Fuse switch Relay coil

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 10

6 back to Table of contents

2.1 General description

2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4

2.2 True RMS measurement

2.3 Configurability and monitoring

2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 11

2.3.2 Configuration parts

Image 2.1 Principle of binary inputs and outputs configuration

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 12

This tool provides the following functions:

This tool provides the following functions:

WebSupervisor available at: www.websupervisor.net

InteliLite4 AMF25 Global Guide 13

This tool provides the following functions:

This tool provides the following functions: